JP2022022443A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

SOLUTION: Based on operation of operating means, at least a first period in which performance contents advantageous to a player are set and a second period in which performance contents more disadvantageous to the player than those in the first period are set by period setting means. A first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner and a second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner that is a notification mode different from the first notification mode are notified by notification means at least during the same period.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and an effect of showing the lottery result is executed. In such a gaming machine, an input means such as a push button that can be operated by the player is provided, and a predetermined effect is executed according to the operation timing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-110361

However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the timing of operating the input means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display means for displaying a game effect, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination for determining that the operation means has been operated. A means, an effect variable means that changes the effect based on the determination result by the operation determination means, an effect setting means that sets an effect content that is changed by the effect variable means depending on the timing of operating the operation means, and an effect setting means. Based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. The first period and the second notification mode are different from the first notification mode and the first notification mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are discriminateably notified by the period setting means for setting at least the first period and the second period. It has a notification means for notifying at least the same period of the second notification mode in which the period is discriminateably notified.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period during which the operation of the operating means becomes effective.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2. In the first notification mode, the current period set by changing the symbol for the transition of the period according to a predetermined rule. Is to be notified.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second notification mode is notified by varying the symbol regarding the transition of the period based on a randomly set rule. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect variable means based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect content variable by the effect variable means is set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. Is set by at least the period setting means. The first notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. Is notified by the notification means at least in the same period.

As a result, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of first periods are set within the valid period in which the operation of the operating means is effective in the period setting means. , There is an effect that it can be easily operated and configured in the first period.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined rule. Since the current period set is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is symbolized based on a randomly set rule. Is variable and notified, so there is an effect that a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the swinging operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the rocking operation unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swinging operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st slide operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. 26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a reversing operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of FIG. 31 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 32 (b). ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit on the XXXIIc-XXXIIc line, and FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit on the XXXIId-XXXIId line of FIG. 32 (b). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear, the transmission device and the L-shaped lever in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device and an L-shaped lever. (A) and (b) are front views of the rocking operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is the inside of the main control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of ROM of, and (c) is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of RAM in the main control device in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. (A) to (b) are examples of the notification modes displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are examples of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are examples of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the long press effect process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the capture effect lottery table. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes of the capture effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes of the temporary stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process executed by the MPU in the display apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the 5th control example. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the V winning apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a jackpot determination in the first random number counter C1 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the value, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the fifth control example and the jackpot determination value in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the fifth control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the jackpot type in the above, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the jackpot type in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the small hit type counter C5 in the fifth control example and the small in the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the hit type, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in the second special symbol. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of disconnection (normal) in the fifth control example. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in the time saving in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the 5th control example. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of the jackpot based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control. It is a time chart showing from the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening in the example to the occurrence of a big hit by a special symbol. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 2 unvariable state among the special figure 2 gaming states, (b). Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 variable state among the special figure 2 gaming states. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a small hit game state in the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is the second. 5 A schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example, in which a jackpot based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch is generated in the special figure 2 game state. Is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state at the start of a big hit among the special figure 2 gaming states, (b). Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that the time-saving game is given after the big hit in the special figure 2 game state. c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, of the special figure 2 gaming states, the state shifts to the special figure 1 gaming state after the big hit. It is a figure. (A) is a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125 (b), and is a schematic diagram showing that the jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the state where the jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is the timing of FIG. 125 (b). It is a display screen which is displayed, and is the schematic diagram which showed the state departure with a jackpot C in hold. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a 3V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2V effect command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the modification example in the 5th control example. It is a perspective enlarged view of the detour member in the sixth control example. It is a rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which made the flow path opening device in the sixth control example perspective perspective. FIGS. (A) to (C) in the seventh control example are schematic views schematically showing an execution system of continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the seventh control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram at the time of deviation (normal) in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in the above, and (c) is the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous chance number table at the time of hit in the seventh control example, and (b) shows the contents of the continuous chance number table at the time of loss in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the latent number lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 8th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the first type table in the eighth control example schematically. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 8th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. It is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the external output processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 9th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a wind turbine (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown). (Not shown), rail 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start It is configured by assembling a mouth (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball that flows down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is used. Since it is easy to win a prize, a ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and a normal symbol start opening (through gate). ) 67 is passed to open the electric accessory, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340,464,560 and drive motors 441,771,772,773,774.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200 with the disassembled operating unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is open on one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 200, a swing operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reverse operation unit 500, a decorative operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, respectively. It is configured as a unit.

Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in a manner surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the second slide operation unit 700, a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversal operation unit 500, and the decorative unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. It is disposed and housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, another operating unit (for example, the first slide operating unit 400) is laminated on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the second slide operating unit 700). Since it is arranged, the predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit in the front view.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light transmissive material and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation mode of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 8, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 are arranged at the overhanging positions, and in FIG. 9, the tilt member 460 and the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 (FIG. 22). (See) is shown in the overhanging position, and FIG. 10 shows the state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are placed in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swinging operation unit 300 swings to an arm member 320 whose base end side is pivotally supported so as to swing, and to the swinging end side which is the opposite side of the base end side of the arm member 320. It is provided with an upright member 330 that can be pivotally supported, and these arm members 320 and the upright member 330 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted and the standing member 330 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ..

As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 is shaken by a hanging member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slid diagonally downward and a bending arm portion 433 (see FIG. 22) of the hanging member 430. It is provided with a tilting member 460 that is movably supported by an axis, and these suspension members 430 and tilting member 460 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspending member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhanging position shown in FIG. 9, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the end in the sliding direction (left), and the tilting member 460 is located in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of each slide member 720, 740 formed so as to be slidable, and the slide members 720, 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It is operated between the position and the overhang position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right outside the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are vertically and vertically the opening 211a of the rear case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhanging position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the "heart" can be visually recognized from the front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging.

As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflective member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the reflective member 520 is formed so that the surface visible to the player can be inverted (turned over). Rectangle. The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member that projects to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400, 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated on the left side (see FIG. 5) of the opening 211a of the rear case 210.

Since each of these operating units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and is arranged in a stacked state as described above, the operating units 300 to 700 are among the operating units 300 to 700. With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operating units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operating units 300 to 600 and the second slide operating unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

FIG. 11 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are displayed. There is a gap of 700 minutes between the second slide operation unit and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging positions, so that the player The gaps seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the rocking operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the rocking operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 There is a gap of 700 minutes for the second slide operation unit. Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging positions, so that the player can play. The gaps seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

The swinging operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are front perspective views of the swinging operation unit 300. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 is swung around the swinging shaft 312, and the posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swinging (tension). The more you go to the position, the more you stand up). Next, the overall configuration of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swinging operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 whose base end side is pivotally supported by the base member 310, and an arm member 320 thereof. The upright member 330 internally fitted and pivotally supported on the swinging end side, which is the opposite end on the base end side, and the drive device arranged on the back surface of the lower right portion of the base member 310 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14). The 340, the transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and connected to the arm member 320, the torsion spring 360 that applies a urging force to the arm member 320, and the lower right front view of the base member 310. It is mainly provided with a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the.

The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swinging operation unit 300, and is fixed to a fitting hole 311 formed in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311 thereof. A cylindrical swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311 and a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole. A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with 311, is formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14), and is bent to the left and right opposite to the guide hole 315. It is provided with an upright hole 316, which is an elongated hole that is extended, and a hook portion 317 that is projected in a hook shape on the front side on the right side of the front view of the fitting hole 311.

The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swinging operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and has a main body portion 321 formed in the shape of a long plate and a main body portion 321 thereof. A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321 and a sliding ring portion 323 opened on the swinging end side of the main body portion 321 in the same direction as the tubular portion 322. A plate-shaped front portion 324 that is raised and arranged on the front side of the main body portion 321 and an elongated hole-shaped release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322, and the main body. A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back surface side of the portion 321 and projecting toward the base member 310, and projecting toward the front side on the left side of the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14). It is provided with a projecting portion 327.

The tubular portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung around the tubular portion 322 pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that internally supports the upright member 330. It is formed with a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the upright member 330.

The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in a state where a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321 and the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the portion on the overhanging end side of the upright member 330 is the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion. It is housed in the gap between it and 321 (see FIG. 16).

The release hole 325 is a long hole connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and has an action of restricting the swing of the arm member 320 by the positional relationship between the transmission device 350, the tubular portion 322, and the release hole 325. This is a hole that causes the above, but the details will be described later.

Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 are slid into the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. It suppresses rattling of the arm member 320 and stabilizes the swing of the arm member 320. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off from the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made to.

The projecting portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and is a portion to which the urging force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

The upright member 330 is a member arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the ascending direction, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 331 and its main body portion. An overhanging ring portion 332 protruding from the back surface side of the 331 in a large diameter ring shape, a changing sliding portion 333 projecting to the back surface side at the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the overhanging ring portion 332. It is provided with a retaining portion 334 which is formed in the shape of a disk and is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

The main body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

The overhanging ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, in the upright member 330, the outer surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding ring portion 323 over a wide area (large area) and is pivotally supported so as to be swingable. Therefore, even when the large upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the upright member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320.

The changing sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the standing hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the standing member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, and the details will be described later. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, it is possible to prevent the changing sliding portion 333 from falling off from the upright hole 316 and to swing the arm member 320. Can be stabilized.

The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330, and is the back surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. It is abutted to the side. Therefore, the erecting member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

The drive device 340 is a motor that is arranged on the back surface side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven. The drive gear 341 is for inserting the drive gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the driving device 340 is first transmitted, and is pivotally supported by the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 on the proximal end side and meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340. Tooth. Further, a regulated sliding portion 351 projecting toward the front side is provided at a swinging end which is an end on the opposite side of the base end side.

The regulated sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the regulated sliding portion 351 is slid into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. Further, particularly when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmitting device 350.

The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source in the swinging motion of the arm member 320, particularly when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and is attached to the hook portion 317 of the base member 310. It includes a base end side arm portion 361 that is supported (pressed downward) and a moving end side arm portion 362 that is supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

Next, the rocking operation of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the rocking operation unit 300 showing the swinging motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. 16 (b), 17 (b), and 18 (b) are rear views of the rocking motion unit 300 showing the swinging motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 16 shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 17 shows a state in which the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at a point where the curvature of the standing hole 316 changes. In 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, the standing member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion of the upright member 330 on the overhanging end side is housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324.

That is, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by utilizing the space required for shielding the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space can be effectively used outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, a pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and a changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at the lower end of the upright hole 316. As a result, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the overhanging position, the standing member 330 changes its posture to a posture in which the major axis direction D1 faces the vertical direction (standing posture).

The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (the wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) is larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. To. Then, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the size of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. In this embodiment, the gaps formed are formed in such a manner that the gaps are gradually changed.

The gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 when starting from the retracted position, and it is possible to secure the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320.

Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is based on the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with slightly shorter dimensions (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed to be substantially the same). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 arranged near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

In the present embodiment, the upright member 330 is arranged above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 tilts forward due to the weight of the upright member 330 (tilts toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum for the forward tilting. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into contact with the base member 310 on a surface, and the resistance to the forward tilt of the arm member 320 can be improved.

Here, the upright hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture change portion 316a, the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the size of the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323.

As a result, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed in a short period of time from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually recognizing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as a unit at the overhanging position while suppressing the shielding space in the vertical direction of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance of the standing member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the upright member 330 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the tubular portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work of the rotational force around the tubular portion 322 on the changing sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 when starting from the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320.

The concentric circle portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in the direction along the circle centered on the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the concentric circle portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 does not change. , The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. As a result, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one unit, and the effect of integrally performing the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 can be easily realized.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, a pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the upper end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion of the standing member 330 is arranged. 333 is arranged at the upper end of the upright hole 316. As a result, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as a stopper. In particular, as will be described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 360, the need for a stopper at the end is greater than when it is driven by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portions 326 are formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portions 326 function as a stopper can be dispersed. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the sliding portion 326.

Although the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can function as a stopper, since the upright member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem arises. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are integrally formed with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the overhanging end side (upper side of FIG. 18) of the standing member 330 overhangs above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Is formed. Therefore, even if the swing angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, the action of projecting the standing member 330 toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be ensured, and the swing of the arm member 320 can be ensured. The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

Further, since the moving distance of the standing member 330 on the overhanging end side can be secured while keeping the swing angle of the arm member 320 small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. can. This effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) where the degree of the posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is large, so that the effect of increasing the speed at the start of the arm member 320 is remarkable. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the state immediately before the upright member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front portion 324 will be described. 19 (a) is a front view of the rocking operation unit 300, FIG. 19 (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 19 (c) is a bottom surface of the rocking operation unit 300. It is a figure. It should be noted that FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (c) show a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an intermediate position between the overhang position and the retracted position, and in detail, the arm member is in the overhang position. The state in which the overhanging end side of the upright member 330 begins to be housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 when the evacuation member 330 is swung toward the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the front portion 324 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 19 (c)) of the upright member 330. As a result, even when the upright member 330 wobbles around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum (swings in the vertical direction in FIG. 19C) when the arm member 320 swings, the upright member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. , The wobbling of the upright member 330 can be suppressed.

Here, the position A where the upright member 330 and the front portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in the front view is above the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed in. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the wobbling of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage where the arm member 320 is arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, the movement loci of the upright member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the upright member 330 can be brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the wobbling of the upright member 330. can.

20 (a) to 20 (d) are diagrams for explaining the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the overhanging position in chronological order, and is a basis of the arm member 320. It is a partial front enlargement view of the rocking operation unit 300 on the end side. 20 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20 (c) shows the state of FIG. 20 (b). The state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the overhanging position is shown, and the cover member 370 is omitted from FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

First, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position (posture change from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. From the overhanging position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20 (d), the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14), and transmission is performed. When the regulated sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved via the states of FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (b), so that the retracted position (FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the drive device 340 can be suppressed. For example, in the case of an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 are extended vertically downward (see FIG. 18 (b)). As a result, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 at the start of swinging from the overhanging position.

Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position (posture change from FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (d)) will be described. The urging force of the torsion spring 360 is applied to the arm member 320. In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the base end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from above by the hook portion 317 of the base member 310, and the moving end side end portion. The 362 is pressed in the lower right direction by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

As a result, the torsion spring 360 has a reduced distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and has elasticity in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction). The force is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is regulated by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the tubular portion 322 as the rotation axis of the arm member 320 and the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is , Is orthogonal to the direction Y connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 that swingably supports the transmission device 350 and the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

In this case, the regulated sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the regulated sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the overhanging position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

The operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulated sliding portion 351 from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated (ON state) by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view. Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the proximal end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 shortened with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the arm. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

From this state, when the regulated sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. As a result, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

For example, in a mode such as a drive motor in which the driving force is gradually increased, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the start of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the start, a large acceleration at the start of the arm member 320 can be secured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is made idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20 (c)).

When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the overhang position (see FIG. 20 (c)), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is rotated (ON state) again clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the regulated sliding portion 351 is moved to the arm. It is located at the dead center in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the driving force of the constant driving device 340 is not generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is near the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven only when it is arranged in (ON state), and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the overhang position. As a result, the period for driving the drive device 340 can be reduced as compared with the case where the drive force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, so that the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), when the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position, the regulated sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 320 from the state of being arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position, the rotation direction of the regulated sliding portion 351 and the extension direction of the release hole 325 coincide with each other, so that the movement starts. Occasionally, the resistance that the regulated sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of operation, which requires the largest force.

Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. 21 (a) and 21 (b) are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIG. 21A, the state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged in the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position. The state of being evacuated is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid diagonally downward (from the upper right to the lower left in the front view) from the retracted position, and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed in the process of the slide movement. It changes (it tilts toward the overhanging position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L-shape in front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and the cover member thereof. A front-viewing substantially T-shaped suspension member 430 that is sandwiched between the 420 and the base member 410 and slides along the front side surface of the base member 410, and a drive that slides the suspension member 430. A drive device 440 that generates force, a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 whose one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and whose other end is connected to the base member 410. It mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported on the overhanging end side, which is the opposite end of the hanging member 430 on the base end side, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. It is composed of.

The base member 410 is a member that is formed in the shape of an L-shaped plate when viewed from the front and forms the skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400. A plate-shaped main body vertically elongated portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body and a guide rib portion extending vertically and slightly inclined in the left-right direction on the front side of the main body horizontally elongated portion 411 and projecting in a straight rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 drilled in the substantially central portion of the horizontally long portion of the main body and through which the drive shaft of the drive device 441 is inserted, and the lower portion of the vertically elongated portion 412 of the main body from the lower right to the upper left in the front view. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in an elongated long hole shape and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the drive device 440 are pivotally supported.

The horizontally long portion 411 of the main body includes an outer frame 411a projecting from the upper side and the left and right edges in a wall shape toward the front side. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length in the thickness direction (vertical direction of the slide plane of the hanging member 430) of the slide main body portion 431 of the hanging member 430. Formed long.

The slide plane of the hanging member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410, and is formed in a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the horizontally elongated portion 411 of the main body when viewed from the front. A portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 are mainly provided.

Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body horizontally elongated portion 411 of the base member 410, the hanging member 430 is in the front-rear direction even if the hanging member 430 is slid and moved in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, it is possible to evenly secure the contact area between the horizontally long portion 411 of the main body of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420.

The suspension member 430 is a member that is arranged in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and has a rack gear on the upper side surface. A horizontally long plate-shaped slide main body 431 to be engraved, a recessed groove 432 that is recessed in a groove shape on the back side of the slide main body 431 and abuts on the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and a slide. A plate-shaped bending arm 433 that hangs down from the substantially central part of the main body 431 and is bent toward the overhanging position in the middle, and a slide main body 431 at a part where the bending arm 433 of the slide main body 431 begins to hang down. Mainly includes a swing shaft 434 projecting from the front side toward the front side, and a tubular hanging cylinder 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (overhanging end) of the bending arm portion 433. ..

The slide main body portion 431 is formed to be slightly thinner than the gap formed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the hanging member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the direction in which the cover member 420 is fastened to the base member 410).

The recessed groove 432 is a recessed groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides the guide rib portion 413 diagonally downward due to the sliding of the recessed groove 432. Will be moved.

The bending arm portion 433 is extended along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the overhanging position, and the base member 410 is in a state where the suspending member 430 is arranged in the retracted position. A thickened portion 433a formed by increasing the wall thickness is provided on the front side in a portion formed below the horizontally long portion 411 of the main body. The thickness of the bending arm portion 433 on the slide main body portion 431 side of the thickened portion 433a is formed to be thinner than that of the slide main body portion 431 and the thickened portion 433a. As a result, the bending arm portion 433 is formed in such a manner that the deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs in the bending arm portion 433 on the slide main body portion 431 side of the thickening portion 433a. Further, the thickness direction of the bending arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (sliding direction).

The swing shaft 434 is a shaft formed by penetrating the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projecting to the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

The hanging cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIGS. 21 (a) and 25 (a)), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

The drive device 440 is a device in which each member is formed by sandwiching the base member 410 from the front and rear and generates a driving force required for the movement of the suspension member 430. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft to be penetrated, a drive gear 442 pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and arranged in front of the base member 410, and being meshed with the drive gear 442 thereof. It mainly includes a pair of transmission gears 443 that are pivotally supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416, respectively.

One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper side surface of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshed with the transmission gear 443 is slid and moved.

The auxiliary member 450 is a member arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, and one end thereof is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end slides into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body portion 451 that is possibly connected and formed in the shape of a long plate, a swing hole 452 drilled at one end, and a slide shaft 453 projecting toward the back at the other end. It mainly includes a hanging shaft 454 projecting from an intermediate position of the main body portion 451 toward the rear surface.

The auxiliary member 450 is axially supported by the suspension member 430 and its other end is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that it cannot move in the thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 25). Is formed in. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed in such a manner that the auxiliary member 450 approaches (swings) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 so that the hanging member 430 slides to the retracted position. As a result, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the hanging member 430 abuts on the auxiliary member 450, so that the wobbling of the hanging member 430 can be suppressed.

The swing hole 452 is externally fitted to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. As a result, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be swingable around the swing shaft 434. That is, as the suspension member 430 is slid and moved, the auxiliary member 450 is oscillated (tilted) around the oscillating shaft 434.

The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower right end in the front view) is slid and moved along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is arranged at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the hanging member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415.

The tilting member 460 is a member that is pivotally supported by the hanging cylinder 435 of the hanging member 430 and has an independent drive source (drive device 464), and is pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 and has a long plate shape. The first cover member 462, which is fastened to the lower part of the base member 461 from the front side and forms a gap between the base member 461 and the base member 461, and the first cover member 462 and the base member thereof. A transmission device 463 arranged in a gap formed between the transmission device 461, a drive device 464 for generating a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a length of the base member 461 connected to the transmission device 463. It mainly includes a moving base member 465 that is slidably formed in a direction, and a second cover member 466 that is arranged on the front side of the moving base member 465 and is fastened and fixed to the moving base member 465.

The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and has a suspension shaft 461a that is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side and is internally fitted and supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430. , A connecting shaft 461b adjacent to the hanging shaft 461a, a box-shaped storage portion 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the back side, and a front surface above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d projecting to the side, and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e provided along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

The accommodating portion 461c forms a space for accommodating the drive device 464, and a hole is formed in the bottom portion thereof to allow the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 to pass through.

The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a pivotally supported by the drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and pivotally supported by the pair of rotary shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears thereof. Of the 463b, the crank pin 463c is mainly provided at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b arranged on the moving base member 465 side.

The crank pin 463c is rotated around the rotation shaft 461d by rotating the drive gear 463a and the transmission gear 463b.

The moving base member 465 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and a plurality of posture maintenance pins 465a are projected from the back surface side (three locations in the present embodiment) and inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. A long hole-shaped slide hole 465b extending and drilling in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a pair of bulky portions 465c projecting to the front side are mainly provided.

Since the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b is connected to the slide hole 465b, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed. The slide is moved.

The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid and moved as the moving base member 465 is slid and moved.

The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. It is provided with a hanging hole 471 to be supported, and a tubular portion 472 which is formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end portion and is swingably externally supported by a connecting shaft 461b of a tilting member 460.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. The state in which the first cover member 466 is slid diagonally upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

The tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23), so that the second cover member 466 is slid and moved, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in the front view (see FIG. 24). Can be produced to change.

Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, vibration and wobbling are likely to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. Since the present embodiment has a plurality of configurations for suppressing the vibration and wobbling, it will be described below.

With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. 25 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the upper end position (evacuation position) of the movement path in which the suspension member 430 slides is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially shown. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 by arranging the suspension member 430 in the retracted position are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. 2) is moved to the outer right of the display area P.

At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is housed at a position on the front side of the hanging member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are laminated and arranged in the thickness direction (FIG. 25 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can be arranged more compactly than the total area of each member in. Therefore, the space on the right outer side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and the display area P can be largely secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and the base is on the back surface on the overhanging end side (tip side). A vertically elongated portion 412 of the main body of the member 410 is arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction at the retracted position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by a swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity where the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is suspended, and the suspension member 430 is arranged at an overhanging position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases the bending arm portion 433 so that the hanging member 430 slides from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is formed in a manner approaching (swinging) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

Therefore, when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position, the allowance (overhanging length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm portion 433 is obtained when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position. S) is shortened. As a result, even when the hanging member 430 wobbles due to the driving of the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed short. Therefore, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction (wobble of the tip of the bent arm portion 433) at the retracted position.

Here, the slide movement of the hanging member 430 will be described. Since the suspension member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 in the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back surface side, the suspension member 430 is slid and moved along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends in a straight line in the diagonally downward direction (from the upper right of FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left of FIG. 25 (a)).

The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is caused by the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 441 from the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise in front view, and the rotation causes the pair of transmission gears 443 to rotate, and the rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (left side in FIG. 25A) is moved. , The hanging member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the overhanging position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (overhanging position) of the movement path in which the suspension member 430 slides is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially shown. Is abbreviated to.

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the lower end in the moving direction of the slide main body portion 431 (the lower left end in FIG. 26A) is the outer frame of the base member 410. It comes into contact with 411a. Further, as described above, since the hanging member 430 moves downward toward the overhanging position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the hanging member 430 is canceled, the position of the hanging member 430 is changed. It can be reliably maintained in the overhanging position.

For example, when the slide movement direction of the suspension member 430 is the horizontal direction, gravity is not applied to the slide movement direction even if the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, so that the suspension member 430 is extended. It is necessary to add another force to keep it in position.

On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the component force of gravity is applied in the direction of the slide movement, so that the suspension member 430 is suspended. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the overhanging position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 440 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the hanging member 430 retracts from the portion where the bending arm portion 433 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. It is smaller than when it is placed at the position (see FIG. 25 (b)). Therefore, it is difficult for the base member 410 and the cover member 420 to suppress the wobbling of the bending arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430.

On the other hand, the root side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended toward the extension direction (lower left direction of FIG. 26B) of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the overlapping area between the auxiliary member 450 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 and the bending arm portion 433 is formed widely.

As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be separated from the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420, and the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. It is formed so that it can be contacted with. Since the thin portion of the bending arm portion 433 (the portion on the slide main body portion 431 side from the thickening portion 433a) is formed so as to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (the wobbling in the thickness direction is dominant). As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the sliding direction.

Further, the thin portion of the bending arm portion 433 (the portion on the slide main body portion 431 side from the thickening portion 433a) is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid and moved in the lateral direction (slide) of the slide main body portion 431. It is formed adjacent to the direction perpendicular to the direction). As a result, the wobbling caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm portion 433, and the wobbling of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 26) can be suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide main body portion 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and to suppress wear of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction.

For example, it is conceivable that an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 is extended toward the lateral side of the slide main body portion 431, and the tip end side of the arm portion is formed thinly. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the deflection, the wobbling of the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 causes the wobbling of the arm portion to be transmitted to the slide main body portion 431. There is a risk that the slide body 431 will wobble.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness is made thin from the root of the bending arm portion 433 extending from the slide main body portion 431, the wobbling generated at the tip of the bending arm portion 433 is used for bending the thin portion, and the slide main body is used. The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 in the line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26 (a). As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm portion 433 includes a thickening portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450 side, the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. It is possible to easily bring the bent arm portion 433 into contact with the auxiliary member 450 even when the amplitude of the bending arm portion 433 is small.

It will be described back to FIG. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, the movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 serves as a stopper that prevents the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 from moving toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is larger than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is placed slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid and slid toward the overhanging position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be arranged at a position offset upward by the distance L1 for the descending tilt.

Therefore, an extra space on the right outer side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, or it becomes a factor that reduces the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460.

However, in the present embodiment, as the hanging member 430 moves toward the overhanging position, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture so as to be lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. Lifted against member 430. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 25 (a)), the lower end position of the tilting member 460 and when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position (FIG. 26 (a)). )) The lower end position of the tilting member 460 is located at substantially the same height (vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

Therefore, when the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, it is not necessary to arrange the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 for the descending inclination, and the right side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

Here, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the drive device 464 is arranged. Therefore, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, so that the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is the fulcrum of the wobbling of the hanging member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. It is possible to suppress the wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the 430.

Further, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the drive device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the rotational direction around the suspension cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. This force R pulls the auxiliary member 450 to the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in the direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the slide movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that the wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. can.

As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, the resistance to the wobbling that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that the wobbling of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the hanging member 430, all the vibrations and wobbling generated in the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the hanging member 430, but in the present embodiment, the vibration and wobbling of the tilting member 460 are transmitted. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be separately transmitted. As a result, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 excessively, and the degree of freedom in designing the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be improved.

Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. Note that FIG. 28 shows a closed state in which the reflective members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33 (b)) by rotating the reflective member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 forming a skeleton, a reflective member 520 pivotally supported by the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and reflection thereof. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 in which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is internally fitted, and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the drive portion side of the reflection member 520. , A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 meshed with a rotary gear 523 of a reflection member 520 is engraved, a drive device 560 that generates a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and a transmission of the drive device 560. It mainly includes a cover member 570 that is arranged on the back surface side of the gear group 562 and is fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

The base member 510 has a bottom surface portion 511 having a rectangular opening in the center and formed in a flat frame shape, and is vertically extended from the right end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side and the back surface side of the bottom surface portion 511. A first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511 are mainly provided. The opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for arranging a substrate (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflective member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). Ru.

The bottom surface portion 511 is vertically extended in the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in the rear view (see FIG. 30), and includes a long hole-shaped slide hole 511a for guiding the transmission member 550.

A plurality of slide holes 511a (4 locations in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 so that the extending directions coincide with each other in a straight line, and the slide holes 511a are formed at both upper and lower ends. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a from the lower end thereof, is a long hole narrower than the slide hole 511a, and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. The rib portion slide hole 511b is formed.

Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotating shaft 511c in which a plurality of the bottom surface portions 511 are projected toward the rear surface side below the opening and the transmission gear group 562 of the drive device 560 is pivotally supported.

The first wall portion 512 is a groove cut in a U shape from the front side to the back side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft portion of the reflective member are formed. The arrangement intervals of the shaft support grooves 512a are evenly spaced, and are formed at intervals shorter than the width dimension (longitudinal dimension in the rotation axis direction) of the reflective member 520.

The second wall portion 513 is arranged so as to face the shaft support groove 512a and is formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a. It is provided with an extension portion 513b formed between the grooves 513a and extended from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (front side in FIG. 29).

The extension portion 513b is formed in a stepped shape in which the width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) becomes smaller toward the front side, and the positioning protrusion portion 543 of the second lid member 540 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). Fitted in.

The reflective member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source, and is a long plate-shaped main body portion 521 formed of an opaque resin material and a straight line from the left and right ends of the main body portion 521. A pair of rotary shafts 522 projecting from each other and a rotary gear 523 that is fastened and fixed to the rotary shaft 522 on the side of the pair of rotary shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is arranged so as to be aligned with each other. Be prepared.

The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) chamfered and formed on the end face in the width direction.

The rotation shaft 522 is formed at the center position in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 521. Further, of the pair of rotary shafts 522, the rotary shaft 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is arranged is extended longer, so that the second wall portion is between the rotary gear 523 and the main body portion 521. The 513 is formed so that it can be disposed.

The rotary gear 523 includes an expansion tooth 523a in which adjacently engraved teeth are connected and the diameter from the center of rotation is longer than the other teeth. The expansion teeth 523a can prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating.

The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29) of the first wall portion 512, and is a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. A portion extending vertically toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (front surface in FIG. 29) of the support hole 531 and the first lid member 530, and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531. A extending lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end face extending to the edge of the lid is provided.

Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, if the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the portion 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one.

On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (left-right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflective member 520 does not depend on the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not get in the way, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one. The effect can be improved.

Regarding the method of assembling the base member 510, the reflective member 520, and the first lid member 530, at least two assembling methods can be performed. For example, first, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the base member 510 in a state where the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is fitted into the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflective member 520 can be inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

Secondly, with the first lid member 530 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotary shaft 522 on the side opposite to the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 is connected to the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530. There is a method of fitting the rotary shaft 522 on the drive portion side into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall portion 512 after inserting the rotary shaft in the diagonal direction (direction from the front side to the back diagonally to the right).

With reference to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. 31 (a) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of FIG. 31 (a). In addition, FIG. 31A shows the side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520. Therefore, for example, even when the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first lid member 530, the reflective member 520 has the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530. It is positioned between and and is pivotally supported.

Further, in the present embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, as described above, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is pivotally supported between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530, and the first lid. It is also pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for supporting the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to secure a sufficient area of the shaft support groove 512a that pivotally supports the reflective member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is bored in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 531 as well. As a result, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflective member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for supporting the reflective member 520 can be sufficiently secured.

It will be described back to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for axially supporting the drive portion side of the reflective member 520 to the base member 510, and is a long plate-shaped base member 541 arranged on the most front side and a base member 541 thereof. The extension shaft support portion 542 that is projected toward the back surface side and is extended in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30), and the extension shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541 are connected to each other. A positioning protrusion 543 and a positioning protrusion 543 are provided.

The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (b), and FIG. 32 (d) is a portion of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIId-XXXIId of FIG. 32 (b). It is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning protrusions 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extension portions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. As a result, the second lid member 540 can be accurately aligned with respect to the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32 (b)).

Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in the shape of a long plate, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 bends in the thickness direction to the reflective member 520 in the axial direction. The force is applied, and the rotation of the reflective member 520 may be hindered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 is hit from the thickness direction (left-right direction of FIG. 32 (c)) of the extended portion 513b of the base member 510. Be touched. As a result, the rigidity of the second wall portion 513 in the thickness direction can be improved.

The end of the extension shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 in the extension direction and the end portion of the base member 510 on which the shaft support groove 513a is formed are brought into contact with each other, and the open end of the shaft support groove 513a is closed ( See FIG. 32 (d)). As a result, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is pivotally supported by the holes formed by the shaft support groove 513a and the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

It will be described back to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflecting member 520, and is formed in the shape of a long plate and has a main body portion that is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. The 551 and the long plate-shaped extended wall portion 552 extending from the end surface of the main body portion 551 (the left end surface of FIG. 29) to the front side, and the end surface of the extended wall portion 552 on the front side intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520, and a plurality of (four locations in this embodiment) are arranged on the front side of the main body portion 551 and a slide of the base member 510. From the width dimension of the slide shaft 554 connected to the hole 511a and the rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) of the rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) extending downward from the slide shaft 554 at the upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 554. Also includes a rib portion 555 projecting with a slightly smaller width dimension, and a second rack gear 556 engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551 and meshed with the transmission gear group of the drive device 560.

In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously provided are arranged at intervals slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. The space spaced apart from this space can prevent the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 from over-rotating, which will be described in detail later.

The drive device 560 is a device that generates a drive force, and is meshed with a drive gear 561 pivotally supported by a drive shaft, a gear meshed with the drive gear 561, and a second rack gear 556 of a transmission member 550. It includes a transmission gear group 562, which is a plurality of gears including the gears, each of which is meshed with a plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

When the drive gear 561 of the drive device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the driving force of the drive device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid and moved in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated around the rotation shaft 522 by the sliding movement of the transmission member 550.

33 (a), 33 (b), and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotational operation of the reflective member 520 is illustrated in chronological order, with FIGS. 33 (d) and 33 (c). (E) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotational operation of the reflective member 520 is illustrated in chronological order, and FIG. 34 shows the reflective member 520 and the reflective member 520 in the posture of FIG. 33 (d). It is a partial side view of the transmission member 550.

In addition, in FIG. 33, the illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), a state (closed state) in which the main body portions 521 of the reflective member 520 are in contact with each other is shown. 33 (b) and 33 (e) show a state (open state) in which the reflective member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the states of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), and FIG. 33 (c). ) And FIG. 33 (f), the surface opposite to the surface on which the reflective member 520 is directed to the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is directed to the front side, and the main body of the reflective member 520. The state in which the 521s are in contact with each other (closed state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 33 (d), in the closed state, the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 is meshed with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 to regulate the rotation.

The rotational operation of the reflective member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33 (d)) by the drive device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 The main body portion 521 of the reflective member 520 is rotated as the reflection member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33 (e)). Further, by sliding the first rack gear 553 to the left, the reflective member 520 is rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction of each other are brought into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33 (f)).

Here, at the end position of the slide movement of the transmission member 550, the reflection member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion and the posture is corrected (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not accurately meshed with each other, the posture of the reflection member 520 in a state where the transmission member 550 is arranged at the end position of the slide movement. Can be stabilized.

In the closed state of the reflective member 520, the end portion of the main body portion 521 is abutted in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the above-mentioned light source can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. can.

Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, once the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, while the shutter member slides from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping with the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, it takes a long time for the player to visually recognize the entire light.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflective member 520 makes it possible to pass the light emitted to the player by rotating the reflective member 520 from the closed state while suppressing the leakage of light in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members 520 can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflective member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, the time required for the player to visually recognize the entire light can be shortened in the case of rotating the reflective member 520 as compared with the case of sliding the shutter member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the reflective member 520 reduces the area occupied by the reflective member 520 in the front view (see FIG. 32 (a)), so that the light source formed on the back surface side of the reflective member is reduced. The light of is visible. Therefore, the space for arranging the reflection operation unit 500 can be saved.

In the reflective member 520, the chamfered portions 521a are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). As a result, the distance between the reflective members 520 in the thickness direction in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflective members 520 can be made flatter.

For example, when a pattern recognized as one on the thickness direction surface of the plurality of reflection members 520 is formed on the thickness direction surface of the plurality of reflection members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflection members 520 is made inconspicuous and the pattern is formed. It is possible to suppress the deviation of. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more clearly.

The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523a is formed to be longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body portion 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotary gear 523 is to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the expansion tooth 523a is dammed by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating, and it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged due to excessive pressure generated at the contact surface of the reflective member 520.

Further, as described above, since the first rack gear 553 is arranged at a space slightly shorter than the space when the tooth group in which the four teeth are connected is omitted from one tooth, FIG. 33 (f). ) When the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 is to be rotated clockwise in FIG. 33 (f), the interval at which the teeth of the rotary gear 523 are formed between the tooth groups of the first rack gear 555 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotary gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged by the chamfered portion 521a which is the contact surface due to the over-rotation of the reflective member 520.

Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. 35 (b) shows the pair of first slide members 720. The state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the overhanging position (front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is shown.

The second slide operation unit 700 has a display area in which a pair of first slide members 720 and a pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. P is formed so as to be divisible in a grid pattern. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

36 and 37 are an exploded front perspective view of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are an exploded rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit 700. It should be noted that FIGS. 36 and 38 show the disassembled state of the base member 710 and the members arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and FIGS. 37 and 39 show the back surface of the base member 710 and the base member 710. The state in which the member arranged on the side is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming a display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 in the center. A first slide shaft rod S1 that is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the 710 and its base member 710 and whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction, and a slide along the first slide shaft rod S1. Mainly a pair of first slide members 720 to be moved and a front side cover member 730 formed in a pair of upper and lower parts while being fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720. Be prepared.

Further, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft rod S2 whose longitudinal direction coincides with the vertical direction, and a second slide shaft thereof. A pair of second slide members 740 that are slid and moved along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears meshed with the second slide member 740 are arranged, and a pair of second slide members 740. And the back side cover member 760 formed on the left and right and the upper part while being fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the back side of the transmission device 750, and arranged on the back side cover member 760 and the first slide member 720 and the first slide member 720. It mainly includes a driving device 770 that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740.

As shown in FIG. 36, since the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (left side of FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

The first slide member 720 extends downward from the lower end of the main body portion 721 formed in an L-shaped front view, the bogie portion 722 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 721, and the bogie portion 722. It is provided with a decoration unit 723.

The main body portion 721 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the left-right direction, and has a rack portion 721a on which a rack gear is engraved on the upper surface, and a rack portion 721a connected below the rack portion 721a and the rack portion 721a. It is provided with a plate-shaped bogie receiving portion 721b arranged on the left side of the front view.

The trolley portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the trolley receiving portion 721b so that the left end coincides with the left end of the trolley receiving portion 721b. The bogie portion 722 is arranged inside the bogie main body portion 722a formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting wall portions from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, respectively, and inside the bogie main body portion 722a. Also provided are a group of rotating bodies 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed having a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged in pairs on the left and right.

In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft rod S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to project slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surface of FIG. 36) of the bogie main body portion 722a.

The first slide shaft rod S1 is provided with a pair of fastening plate portions S1a to be fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends, and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

An aspect of arranging the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft rod S1 is inserted between the rotating body group 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. As a result, the bogie portion 722a is arranged between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft rod S1. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft rod S1.

Next, the bogie receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the bogie portion 722 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the first slide member 720 is pivotally supported by the first slide shaft rod S1 so as to be slidable.

In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with the transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the drive device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

When the first slide member 720 slides and moves, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft rod S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft rod S1 can be reduced and friction is reduced. Further, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in pairs on the left and right and they are in contact with the first slide shaft rod S1, the wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft rod S1 can be stabilized.

The front side cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is arranged on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is arranged on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. As a result, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (left front direction in FIG. 36) about the first slide shaft rod S1, the wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710 on the left side of the rear view with the transmission cylinders 711 and 712 which are arranged so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are formed so as to be axially rotatable. The fixed gear portion 713 is extended along the vertical direction and the gear is engraved on the wall surface facing inward (to the right in FIG. 38), and the fixed gear portion 713 is meshed with the rack gear 754 (FIG. 38). The rolling gear 714 pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of 39) and the guide wall portion 715 projecting from the back surface of the base member 710 and extending in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view. And mainly prepare.

The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are provided with drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on the wall surface facing inward (to the left in FIG. 38).

As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (upper part of FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other will be omitted.

The second slide member 740 extends from the left end of the front view of the main body portion 741 formed in the shape of a long plate, the bogie portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and the bogie portion 742 to the left. It is provided with a decorative portion 743.

The main body portion 741 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

The bogie portion 742 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the main body portion 741 so that the upper end thereof coincides with the upper end of the main body portion 741. The dolly portion 742 is formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting wall portions from the left and right ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, respectively, and the trolley body portion 742a is perpendicular to the bottom surface inward. 742b is provided with a group of rotating bodies 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with various rotating axes are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts.

In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged vertically in parallel, and the length of the left-right spacing is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft rod S2.

The decorative portion 743 is provided with a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a pivotally supported by a shaft projecting toward the back surface at the left end of the front view.

The second slide shaft rod S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

An embodiment of the arrangement of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft rod S2 is inserted between the rotating body group 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the bogie portion 742. As a result, the second slide member 740 is pivotally supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 so as to be slidable. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft rod S2.

Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft rod S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. As a result, the main body portion 741 is arranged between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft rod S2.

Here, the rack gear engraved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

Since the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft rod S2 when the second slide member 740 slides, the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft rod S2 can be reduced and friction is reduced. Further, since a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged vertically in pairs and they are brought into contact with the second slide shaft rod S2, the wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft rod S2 can be stabilized.

Here, the main body portion 741 having the rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the bogie portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft rod S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the ends. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 with the second slide shaft rod S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state of the rack gear and the rolling gear 714. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the deviation of the meshing state.

As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device that transmits the driving force of the drive device 770 to the second slide member 740, and is on the long plate-shaped main body portion 751 and the back side of the main body portion 751. It has a drive gear 752 to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and teeth meshed with the transmission gear. It mainly includes a rack gear 754 which is a long plate-shaped member extending in the direction and is slid up and down along the slide elongated hole 751a of the main body portion 751.

In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) portion of the pair of upper and lower portions (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

The main body portion 751 includes a slide elongated hole 751a formed in an elongated hole shape in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

The rack gear 754 is provided with a columnar shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) that projects vertically from the front and penetrates the slide slot 751a of the main body portion 751. The shaft support portion 754a is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

Here, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is moved via the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide slot 751a.

Since the shaft support portion 754a of the rack gear 754 (see FIG. 37) is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down by sliding the rack gear 754 up and down. ..

At this time, the rolling gear 714 is meshed with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and is also meshed with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, a double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

The back side cover member 760 includes a back drive part cover member 761 arranged on the drive part side of the second slide member 740, a back upper cover member 762 arranged on the upper part, and a back drive part cover member 761 on the left and right sides. It mainly includes a back cover member 763 that is arranged so as to face each other in the direction.

The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the transmission device 750, and the drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

The rear upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and the drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface of the decorative portion 743 on the extended end side, and prevents the second slide member 740 from being rotated toward the back surface side with the second slide shaft rod S2 as a fulcrum and coming out.

The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, 774 include drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

An example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 40 (a), the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged in the retracted positions, respectively, and in FIG. 40 (b), the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged. 40 (c) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position in FIG. 40 (b) by a predetermined amount to the right in the front view. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the upper front side cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front side cover members 730 is not shown.

Here, the transmission of the driving force to the driving gears 711a and 712a when the pair of first slide members 720 slides is described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in the front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in the front view) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a), the pair of first slide members 720. Are each slid toward the overhanging position and abutted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 40 (b)).

The drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720 is in the state of FIG. 40 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force just before reaching. In the present embodiment, the contact between the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722, so that it is not necessary to consider the bending of the decorative portion 723 in the slide direction. Therefore, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

In the pair of first slide members 720, the rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to project slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the bogie main body portion 722a, so that the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other. At that time, the rotating bodies protruding outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are pressed against each other. Will be. That is, while the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b that project outward from the contact surface side. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact of the pair of first slide members 720 at the time of contact can be alleviated.

After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, the drive motor 771 generates a driving force for sliding and moving the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pushing the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side of the front view to the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side of the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40 (c)).

That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid and moved without coordinating the drive motors 771 and 772. As a result, the power consumption of the entire drive motor 771,772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases as compared with driving only one of the first slide members 720. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravitational load as in the case where the first slide member 720 is moved in the vertical direction, and the amount of increase in the motor load is the drive motor 771,772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs evenly in each.

Therefore, it is easy to adjust the motor life of the drive motors 771,772 (see FIG. 35), and it is possible to easily adjust the replacement time of the drive motors 771,772. As a result, the number of maintenance of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

An example of the movement mode of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 which shows an example of the change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 41 (a), the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged in the retracted positions, and in FIG. 41 (b), the main bodies 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the overhanging positions. In FIG. 41 (c), a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are moved by a predetermined amount from the position in FIG. 41 (b) upward in the front view is shown.

Here, the transmission of the driving force to the driving gear 752 (see FIG. 39) when the pair of second slide members 740 slides is described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a), the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motor 7743, 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise in the front view, and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise in the front view). The pair of second slide members 740 are slid and moved toward the overhanging position, and are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position (see FIG. 41 (b)).

Of the pair of second slide members 740, the drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740 arranged above the front view reaches the state of FIG. 41 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before.

After the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the drive motor 774 (which generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740 arranged below the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 ( The pair of second slide members 740 are pressed by the driving force (see FIG. 35) (by pushing the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view to the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view). It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid and moved without coordinating the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35). As a result, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the entire drive motors 773 and 774.

Here, when the member moving downward changes the moving direction upward, the load on the drive motor may increase due to the influence of gravity, and the motor life may be shortened. In addition, since the deceleration time for changing the direction is long, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of the production is reduced.

However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the moving direction from the descending movement to the upward movement, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. You can take advantage of the momentum of movement. As a result, the motor load generated when the direction of the second slide member 740 is changed due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. Further, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of the effect can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. The back cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back cover member 760 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 hits the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppressing gear 743a. Be touched.

Here, at the time of starting the second slide member 740, the meshing relationship between the bending suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized, and the bending suppressing gear 743a rotates smoothly, so that the second slide member 740 and the receiving gear are rotated smoothly. The resistance generated between the portion 715a and the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the start of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other by the bogie portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decorative portion 743, and the side on which the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the decorative portion 743 is arranged. The end of the is tilted with respect to the guide wall portion 715. As a result, the load from the deflection suppressing gear 743a on the receiving gear portion 715 increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper bending suppressing gear 743a of the pair of bending suppressing gears 743a is the receiving gear. It is pressed against the part 715.

As a result, a force in the direction of returning the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact between the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

Further, the contact surface between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 can be increased by forming the contact between the gears. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. The effect of sliding can be improved.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning apparatus 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, and is first variable. To light the base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 and the LED on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c arranged on the back side of the base member 65c. Opening and closing for opening and closing the LED substrate 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, the back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. A flow path formed by an opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that projects to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is composed of.

FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 50 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line Lb-Lb of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined downward to the left so as to be guided to the left in FIG. 50 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (the inside of the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the short-time game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second winning opening 640 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left-handed immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 51A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning opening 65 during the big hit game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the big hit game. Can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variation grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure it so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (for one ball winning in this embodiment). You can pay out 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the probability change switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for imparting a probabilistic gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the gaming board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. An opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A taxiway leading to the general winning opening 65b1 is formed. When a game ball enters the general prize opening 65b1, 10 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate. Here, when the game is played by right-handed hitting, which is a game method in which the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, the game ball does not roll on the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 pass through this opening and are configured to win a prize in the general winning opening 65b1. A plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided on the upper portion of the first variable winning device 65.

Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angles of the game nails K2 and K3 are adjusted as a means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. It is configured so that it can be widened or widened. Here, the game store will increase the profit by reducing the number of game balls that win the specific winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit so that 10 balls can be entered in one round and the number of game balls to be fired increases. Is conceivable. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted so that it is difficult to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, the distance between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Further, when the game nail K1 is narrowed in order to narrow the distance between the game nails K1 and K2, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, even if the jackpot game is not in progress, the ratio of winning the general winning opening 65b1 will be high, and the damage on the game store side will be large. It is possible to prevent the nail from being adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the taste of the game is remarkably lowered by the adjustment on the side of the game store.

Further, when the game nail K1 is tilted to the right to narrow the distance between the game nails K2 and K3 and the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a is adjusted to be lowered, the game ball is moved to the second winning opening 640 side. Is easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning opening 640 becomes high, the ratio of winning to the second winning opening 640 during the time-saving game or the probabilistic game state becomes high, and the damage on the game store side becomes large. , It is possible to suppress that the winning rate of the specific winning opening 65a is set low. A plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640, and a game ball flowing down to the left on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The game nails placed between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 are arranged so that all the game balls are guided to the second winning opening 640 even if adjusted.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed with each other has been described, but the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment is the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. It is possible to form a state in which the drive gear 2341 is engaged (engaged state) and a state in which the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are disengaged (non-engaged state). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

43 and 44 show the front surfaces of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in which the swinging operations of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in the second embodiment are illustrated in chronological order. It is a figure.

The main body portion 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 43 (a), the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 43 (b), the arm member The state in which the 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the overhanging position to the retracted position is shown in FIG. 43 (c), the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position in FIG. 43 (c), and FIG. 43 (a) in FIG. The state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c) is shown in FIG. 44 (b), and the state in which the arm member 320 is extended to the front of the overhanging position is shown in FIG. 44 (c). ), The state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position by pulling the transmission device 2350 to the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are meshably formed.

The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed by the drive shaft and is formed in the shape of a front view fan, and an extrusion pin 2341b that is projected toward the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 projecting toward the front side at an end portion of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side of the front view.

The base member 2310 includes a swing shaft 2318 projecting toward the front side at the lower right side of the front view of the shaft support position of the drive gear 2341.

The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in the shape of a long rod, and one end of the first main body portion 2381 is swingably supported by the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310, and one end of the first main body portion 2381. The second main body 2382, which is swingably supported by the other end on the opposite side and is formed in the shape of a long rod, and the second main body 2382 are bored in a long hole shape along the extending direction. It also includes a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be swingable on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and to be in contact with the extrusion pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position will be described. In the arm member 320, the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c) by the rotation of the drive gear 2341, so that the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350 with the pull slide hole 2383 and tilted toward the transmission device side.

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the meshing between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 43 (c)), the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center, so that the transmission device 2350 The arm member 320 is maintained in the retracted position even when the meshing with the drive gear 2341 is released.

From the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the drive gear 2341 is further rotated, and when the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (to the right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pull slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled and the transmitter 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in front view.

By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead center formed by the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 has a torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) Is oscillated toward the overhanging position (see FIG. 44 (b)).

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged to the right of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. As a result, the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the overhanging position (see FIG. 44 (c)).

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the mesh between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It is possible to reduce the resistance applied to the teeth. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the urging force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of swinging the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be remarkable.

Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are meshed only when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance that occurs between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 Does not affect the swing of the arm member 320 when it swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

Therefore, by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when swinging the arm member 320 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and even if a large capacity of the drive device 2340 is selected. , It is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a), and 46 (b) show the second embodiment in which the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position in chronological order. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit 2300 in the form. It should be noted that FIG. 45 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 45 (b) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. In 46 (a), a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 45 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an overhang position is shown. Will be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the upright member 330 is gently upright has been described, but in the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the upright member 330 is suddenly upright.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the upright hole 2316 of the base member 2310 includes a posture changing portion 2316a formed at the upper part of the bending point and a concentric circular portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

The posture changing portion 2316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture change portion 2316a, the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45B and 46). (A)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in the direction along the circle centered on the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is slid on the concentric circle portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. , The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

In the present embodiment, since the concentric circle portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the upright hole 2316, the arm member 320 stands upright with respect to the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. 45 (b). The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

Since the posture changing portion 2316a is formed above the bending point of the standing hole 2316 (that is, near the upper portion of the concentric circle portion 2316b), it is shown in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung in such an arrangement, the upright member 320 is abruptly upright.

As a result, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made abrupt. Therefore, the high speed of the operation of the rocking operation unit 2300 felt by the player can be further improved.

The first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is formed of a resin material has been described, but in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is formed of an elastic rubber material. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

47 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. In FIG. 47, the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466 m disposed at the upper end portion.

The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

The connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the hanging shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed to be stretchable by swinging the tilting member 2460.

Here, in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a, so that the tilting member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts while the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the suspension shaft 461a. Be moved.

In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force opposite to the swing direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time until the tilting member 2460 swings back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the swinging operation of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven, and the effect of the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and abuts on the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment has a second slide operation unit 2700. The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and one of the first slide members 2720 is controlled to run in the reverse direction according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment in which an example of the operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 48, the illustration of the upper front side cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 are arranged in the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. 48 (b) shows. The state in which the first slide member 2720 on the right side of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid and moved by a predetermined amount is illustrated, and in FIG. 48 (c), the first slide on the left side from the state of FIG. 48 (b). The state in which the member 2720 is slid and moved by a predetermined amount is shown.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is formed in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 48) and extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). It is provided with a hole-shaped detection hole 2721c.

The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor disposed on the front side, and is a detection device disposed at a position where transmitted light can penetrate the detection hole 2721c by sliding the first slide member 2720. It is equipped with 2716. The detection device 2716 is arranged substantially in the center of the base member 2710 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid and moved from the state of FIG. 48 (a) and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position through the detection hole 2721c, the right side is shown. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the first slide member 2720 on the left side is slid and moved and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position through the detection hole 2721c, the slide member 2720 on the right side is the slide member on the left side. It is controlled to feed backward (slide to the right) at a speed that allows contact with the 2720 at a constant speed.

That is, while the first slide member 2720 on the left side slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is shielded from the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When the penetrating position is reached, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected and the position information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. Ru.

Based on the position information and velocity information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side, the backward acceleration required for the first slide member 2720 on the right side to come into contact with the first slide member 2720 on the left side at a constant velocity is obtained. It is calculated, and the acceleration is controlled so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side does.

As a result, the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 2720 can be softened, and the durability of the first slide member 2720 can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid in the upright holes 316, 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be disposed in the changing sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll the upright holes 316, 2316. This makes it possible to suppress the resistance generated when the posture of the standing member 330 changes.

In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315. The case where it is formed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be abruptly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of changes in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (rapidly or loosely).

In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315. The case where it is formed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330 and the collar member and the base member 310 is formed so as to gradually decrease from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the upright hole 316. good. In this case, the resistance applied to the standing member 330 when the arm member 320 starts from the retracted position to the overhanging position is suppressed, and the wobbling of the standing member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position. can do.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end to the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction in diameter orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be formed differently on the left and right with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326.

That is, the right side surface of the guide hole 315 (right side in FIG. 18A) is a portion formed on the upper side of the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position. When the arm member 320 is slightly moved in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft, the arm member 320 is positively abutted. By greatly reducing the degree of reduction of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, it is possible to smooth the swing of the arm member 320 in the overhanging direction.

On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (left side in FIG. 18A) is a place where the arm member 320 comes into contact with the arm member 320 when the arm member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 tilts forward. Therefore, the degree of reduction of the groove is made gentle up to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, and the arm member 320 is rapidly formed near the upper end to receive resistance when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position. It can be suppressed. That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 is tilted forward, it is possible to prevent the sliding portion 326 from coming into contact with the left side surface of the guide hole 315, and the arm can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracting position. As a result, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced, and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the upper end, the arm member 320 can be swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position from the start. The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. As a result, the swing of the arm member 320 can be smoothed.

Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the lower end, the arm from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position. A downward force acts toward the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. As a result, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflective members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are rotated at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing of rotation may be staggered or the speed of rotation may be staggered for each reflective member 520. As a result, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 to rotate the reflective member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotary belt and the rotary gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotary belt rotates further while the reflective members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotary belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflective member 520 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the expansion teeth 523a are formed on the rotary gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed at intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth spacing may be formed on the rotary gear 523.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reflective member 520 may be formed of a transparent resin material. In this case, the light emitted from the light source can be visually recognized by the player regardless of whether the reflective member 520 is in the closed state or the open state. Therefore, the player is allowed to visually recognize the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long period of time. Can be done.

In each of the above embodiments, of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700, the case where one slide member 720 is pushed by the other slide member 720 and slides is described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to be always driven by independent drive motors.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly bring the main body portions 741 into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, elastic members such as rubber and coil springs may be arranged on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be softened as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the "heart" can be visually recognized from the front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, the shape that can be visually recognized is not limited to the "heart", and may be, for example, a "star", a "fish", or a "car". Further, different shapes may be visually formed when the degree of overhang of each of the slide members 720 and 740 is different. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where one of the second slide members 740 among the pair of second slide members 740 pushes in and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact point of the second slide member 740, it can be moved in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides and moves one of the second slide members 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, it is possible to switch the motor to be driven according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 774 and 774 can be adjusted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, a pair of first slide members 720 may be brought into contact with each other on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, on the lower end side of both ends of the decorative portion 723 in the longitudinal direction, which is the opposite side of the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted. .. In this case, since the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other can be softened, the load on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with each other on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area at the time of contact of the pair of first slide members 720 can be reduced.

Further, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is surely transmitted to the other, the pair of slide members 720 are moved when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other. The effect of making it visible as a unit can be remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front side cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 separated from each other are visually recognized in a coordinated operation, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the bogie portion 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the rotating body group 722b having a small diameter can be sandwiched between the rotating body group 722b having a large diameter and the first slide shaft rod S1. As a result, the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b can be improved by bringing the rotating body groups 722b into contact with each other.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the first slide member 2720 at one place has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first slide member 2720 is stopped by drilling the detection holes 2721c at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the center and the other end of the main body 2721 of the first slide member 2720). Multiple positions can be formed. At this time, by differentiating the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction, the positions of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of locations depending on the detection period of the detection device 2716.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the shape of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be drilled in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously bored along the slide direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is being moved while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined from the time interval for blocking the transmitted light of the first slide member 2720. Further, by making the number of circular detection holes 2721c perforated different for each position in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the central portion), the detection device 2716 is transmitted while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected by the number of times the light is blocked.

In the second embodiment, after one slide member 2720 is stopped at an overhanging position, the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, when detecting only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by running the at least one first slide member 2720 in the reverse direction. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of contact.

In the second embodiment, the case where one detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be arranged corresponding to a pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of one second slide member 740.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is arranged on the base member 2710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be arranged on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<About the first control processing example>
Next, an example of the first control process in the control process of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is used as a trigger on the first symbol display device 37. Fluctuation display is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It should be noted that the third symbol is commonly displayed in a variable manner with respect to the variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variablely displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variablely displayed at the same time. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of numbers from "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is displayed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol string having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol column is displayed as a left symbol column displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol column displayed on the right side of the left symbol column, and a right symbol column displayed on the right side of the middle symbol column.

In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle portion of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, is the reserved ball. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of "black circle" is displayed for one, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls from the number of reserved symbols.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is the same. It is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided in each of these areas, and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set according to the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1 per unit, the type counter C2 per first, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number table per one, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "9" is as described above. It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the value "0-9" is the first random number for the high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time loss, long-time loss, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 72) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 55 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponds to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the time of low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 63). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 72) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 71) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 15) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability change effective flag 203p, a probability change effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time reduction / medium counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has one. , Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning the first winning opening 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N in the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. 66). See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the display itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c). S703: No in FIG. 69).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates a low probability gaming state (including a time-saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51 (a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag has been set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1241 in FIG. 77). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j determines the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65). It is a counter for counting. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) After it is determined whether or not they match (S1267 in FIG. 78), the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243: Yes in FIG. 77). The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal display") for attracting the attention of the player. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the first variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated by 1 by the processing of S1224 in the notification processing (FIG. 76, S1111) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal display" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal display. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, the girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The word "attention" is displayed, which is a notification that prompts the player to see. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51 (a)) in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game. The production is being performed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first step is performed before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the variable winning device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the player to read the code with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to do.

The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 81 to be ejected is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot B is used. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51 (a)) based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON is the probability change switch 65e3. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, the period during which the probability change effective flag 203p is on indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probabilistic valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3 can be determined (measured). In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51 (a)) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game. There is.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The long-press effect lottery table 222b has a frame button 22 as one of the fluctuation patterns described later, when a SW fluctuation pattern in which a display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is selected. It is a selection table for selecting the notification mode for notifying the operation timing and the like. FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In the long-press effect lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long-press operation in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a certain period or longer is set as a long-press navigation type. As the long-press navigation type, three types of long-press navigation A, long-press navigation B, and long-press navigation C are set.

Here, each long press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (b) are views showing an example of the display mode of the long press navigation B. When the SW fluctuation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, the characters "Get a big hit with a long press !!" are displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the player presses and holds it. By executing the above, the notification mode in which the jackpot is expected to be given is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters "Predict the start timing of long press in the period meter !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the color changes from the left side to the right side with time below it. An indicator that changes in order is displayed. By this notification, the player predicts the correct long press start period and starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until all the colors of the indicators change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61B, the timing of releasing the long press (timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the characters "Release at count 0 !!" are displayed, and an indicator whose color changes in order from the left side to the right side is displayed below the characters. The characters "3, 2, 1, 0, release !!" are displayed at the upper right end of the indicator, and the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character "0". Navigation to release. Here, a countdown may be displayed by a character, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the character "Release !!" is displayed.

In this way, in the notification mode of the long press navigation B, the player is made to predict the timing of the start of the long press, and the timing of the release of the long press is clearly notified, so that the navigation is composed of medium difficulty. are doing.

When the timing of the long press start coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW fluctuation pattern, the player is notified that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. This allows the player to know early on that it is a big hit.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press navigation A, the player expects that the character "Get the big hit at the long-press timing !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the big hit is given by the long-press timing. The notification mode to be notified is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), an indicator is displayed, and after long-pressing for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator changes, the player's arbitrary period, a preset length. The text "Hit a long press period !!" is displayed to prompt you to apply the press period.

In this way, the long-press navigation A is a notification mode in which the player must predict both the start timing of the long-press and the release timing of the long-press, and is configured with the most difficult navigation notification mode. ing.

FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press navigation C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters "Get the jackpot in the specified long press period !!" are displayed, and the long press is pressed at the specified timing and period. A notification is executed that prompts the player to do so. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, the characters "start" and "end" are displayed below the indicator, and a long press is performed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes until the start. It is notified that the long press is released at the timing of "end" after starting.

In this way, the long-press navigation C is the navigation content with the lowest difficulty level among the long-press navigation types, and as will be described later, it is a notification mode that is selected only when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. ing.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long-press effect lottery table 222b, the value (range of 0 to 198) of the effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long-press navigation type for each hit / fail determination result. There is. When the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is set so that a long-press navigation type with a lower difficulty level can be easily selected than when the result is a hit. This can be configured to change the expectation for a big hit depending on the type of long-press navigation displayed. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel that whether or not the jackpot is given changes depending on the operation method of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game.

If the long press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the long press effect may be terminated in the middle and switched to a predetermined variable effect of the main symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag 223d. At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW effective time storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lottery. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by the long press counter 223h described later, and when the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds, this long press flag 223 g is set to ON. ..

The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or longer, it is regarded as a long press, and it is determined that an operation different from the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed in a normal short time (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured. It is possible to determine whether or not the long press is executed by the long press counter 223h.

The SW effective time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the period for which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the SW fluctuation pattern described above, the frame button 22 set in the fluctuation pattern is determined to be off. The period (time) set to be enabled (S1807: No in FIG. 83) of the button 22 is set in the SW effective time storage area 23i as the SW effective time. When the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i, it is subtracted and updated by 1 based on the passage of the SW effective time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 84) is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the change period of the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed against. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will be more. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of the ordinary symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and it becomes easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 15).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. 15). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 84) (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 59) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 86 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 59) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 59, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 86 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol are displayed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 65. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S216: Yes), set an opening scenario for a specific winning opening based on the big hit type (S217), and then set the start of big hit A (16 rounds, etc.). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

When the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of whether or not it is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so that the first acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). A display mode at the time of a jackpot indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

In this process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In this process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. If there is, it is a process to acquire various random number counters and execute the hold process of the value.

When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S502), and the gaming state is determined. If is probable (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the gaming state is not probable (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 68 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 53 (a)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 53 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 68, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 69 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 72, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning process (see FIG. 66) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol change start process (see FIG. 68). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 70 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 64) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read by S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such troubles can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that the operation timing is reached (S1106: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability change flag 203g is set to on (S1213). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 even during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1223, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal display from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1221 that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal display".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1231). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). After that, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

In the process of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1236). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). After that, the process of S1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1239). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1242). After that, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1244). The probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is ON (S1246). If the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), the probability change valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1248). When it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to off (S1249). The probabilistic valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, if it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the details of this exception handling (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1261). If it is outside the round validity period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1265) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) and the number of winning numbers (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1267).

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot B.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1271), and then this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1514. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1514 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1514 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1516. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 80). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1408 is performed via the processing of S1404 to S1406. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S1410, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the processing of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1502 to S1510, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1604). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). Further, in the process of S1608, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1608 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by S1608. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start prize or drawing a special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1607, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, "look at the liquid crystal display") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1610).

Next, in the processing of S1609, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed in the display control device 114. The command is set so that it can be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so that this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect has not been started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect has started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is acquired (S1802), and the long press effect is long-pressed from the lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55 (b)). Select a navigation pattern (S1803). Next, the command for displaying the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

In the process of S1805, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time of the SW effective time storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1805). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIGS. 83 and S1507) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is larger than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether or not the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is to subtract the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether or not the long press flag 223g is on (the frame button 22 is pressed). S1809). If it is determined that the long press flag 223g is on (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810).

If it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and a display command indicating that the long press is in progress is set (S1812). Return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1807: No). S1813). If it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 0) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set to off (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 84) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. And S2102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the process of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 84. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. If it is via 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a). FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined by the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to display the S2304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display stop type command for two or more is not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2701). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the backsides A to C according to the backside type of the backside image specified in the display data table, the backside image discrimination flag set by S2702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and there is an error command. If (S2410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2802). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2802. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating a long press among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the length is long. If there is a command indicating a press (S2412: Yes), the long press effect process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401. Here, the command indicating a long press is a display command indicating a long press navigation pattern set in the process of S1804, a display command indicating a long press in progress set in the process of S1812, and a process of S1814. Corresponds to the display command indicating long press off set in.

Here, the details of the long press effect processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a long press effect process. This long press effect process executes a process corresponding to a command indicating a long press received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the long-press effect processing (FIGS. 90 and S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a long-press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901 when it is determined that the long press navigation effect is performed (S2901: Yes), the display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a long press navigation effect (S2901: No), it is determined whether the command is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). If it is determined to be a long press command in the process of S2903 (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if it is not determined as a long press command (S2903: No), display data corresponding to the long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this Ends the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Extract only the stop type command, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 91. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3201, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 91 to continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time (Fig. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, the details of the transfer setting process (S2305) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3514), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S3518). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. In the second control example, the content of the SW fluctuation pattern is changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of pressing and holding the frame button 22 is described to be executed in the SW fluctuation pattern, but in the second control example, the effect of catching a fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is performed. Is different in that it is executed. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving directions of the fish and the net displayed in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed by the SW fluctuation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98A to 98B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 98A, the fish and the net are displayed, respectively, and the characters "press the button according to the fish !!" are displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish is in the net of the net, a display mode is displayed so that the player can obtain the fish. Further, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of multiple scales is displayed, and the color can be changed by one square up and down at high speed (for example, a speed of one square in 0.5s) (for example, from blue to red). Variable) is displayed. There are 6 scales, and the characters "GET" are displayed on the 3rd and 6th scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed while the color of the scale is variable, the display timing is such that the fish is in the net.

On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move and be displayed in the movement direction set in the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but when the position of the indicator scale "GET" is changed, the display is controlled so that the fish is located in the net.

As a result, the player can more easily understand the timing of pressing the frame button 22 by relying not only on the positional relationship between the fish and the net but also on the timing at which the indicator changes, and participates in the production of the SW fluctuation pattern. This makes it easier to play games. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish is displayed at the position of the net by the indicator. In the present embodiment, the indicator is always displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the indicator may be displayed when the expectation of the big hit is high and not displayed when the expectation is low. With this configuration, by displaying the indicator, the expectation for the big hit can be raised, and further, the big hit can be produced in the state where the player can catch the fish.

FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to the capture effects A to C when the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is off. Has been done. The capture effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing when the fish is in the net, and is set as an effect capable of catching the fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the timing (period) during which the fish enters the net is shorter than the period required for the frame button 22 to be pressed and the frame button 22 to be detected. It is set to be impossible to capture.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the net and the fish coincide with each other, the display is shifted. That is, it is configured so that the effect that the fish was caught is not displayed. However, not limited to this, when the fish and the net match, the frame button 22 is configured to be momentarily excluded from the valid period (for example, the matching display period of 0.2 s) and controlled. It is possible to reduce the load of controlling the display by shifting.

The capture effect A and the capture effect D are set in a display mode in which the fish and the net each move laterally at random positions at high speed and are displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions and are displayed. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net move diagonally to random positions and are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, it is set to be easier to select than when the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out of alignment. Therefore, the player can predict the hit / fail determination result based on the moving direction between the fish and the net (that is, the type of capture effect). Therefore, it can be expected that the player is expected to produce the SW fluctuation pattern.

In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is determined by lottery based on the selection of the SW fluctuation pattern, but the selected SW fluctuation pattern may be set in advance. .. Further, in this control example, the movement direction between the fish and the net is configured to be set according to the type of the capture effect, but the movement direction is not set in advance and the display position is updated every time the display position between the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display position of the fish and the net currently displayed, the movement direction and the movement distance may be determined and displayed by lottery. With this configuration, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and the player can be given a fresh effect.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example differs from the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 54 (b)) in that the long press flag 223 g and the long press counter 223 h are deleted. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing in the second control example>
In the control process in the second control example, the contents of the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed from those in the first control example. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The second control example differs from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 99, S1520). do. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the capture effect, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is the SW variation pattern (variation pattern of the capture effect). When it is determined that the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f obtained from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the selected SW fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 97 (c)). S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). When this display command is output to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW effective time set in the SW fluctuation pattern is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i (S1825). After that, the process of S1826 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1821 that the variation pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the process of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is set (S1826). When it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating that the SW is pressed is set (S1829). The SW effective time is reset to the initial value of 0. As a result, the SW effective time is reset at the same time as the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by changing the plurality of effects. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 in the process of S1826 (S1826: No) or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process. To finish.

In this control example, the frame button 22 can be pressed once in the capture effect, but the setting is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 may be set a plurality of times.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. In the second control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) is the display setting process for the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed to 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (FIGS. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are deleted. Is different in that each is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether or not the command indicating that it is related to the SW effect has been received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to a display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), a display command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like.

When it is determined that the command related to the SW effect is received in the process of S2414 (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect processing (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect processing (S2415). In the SW effect processing, a process of setting the corresponding display data and the like is performed based on the SW effect (capture effect) command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and the command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed. ..

In the SW effect processing (FIGS. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command indicates any of the capture effects A to F, which is the SW effect (S2911). If it is a command indicating any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), the display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2911 when it is determined that the command does not indicate any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the displayed capture effect content is set (S2914). After that, this process ends.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, the position between the net and the fish of the capture effect is fixed at the displayed position and a certain period of time (in this control example, the initially set SW effective time elapses). It will continue to be displayed until the same period as the period up to) has elapsed. After that, if the fish can be stopped at the position inside the net, a display mode (for example, the character "Get !!") indicating that the fish has been caught is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish stops at a position other than the position in the net, a display mode indicating that the fish could not be caught (for example, the characters "catch failed !!") is displayed.

Next, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. It differs in that it is. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the process of S3005 is executed, the SW effect display setting process is executed (S3030). The SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether or not the capture effect is being displayed is the period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW effective time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. Indicates whether it is a period.

If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), the indicator determines whether the color of the scale corresponding to "Get" is variably displayed (S3032). When the indicator is displayed with the Get scale variable (S3032: Yes), display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). After that, this process ends. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set according to the display coordinates of the fish data. With this configuration, the indicator can match the display position of the fish and the net according to the timing when the scale of Get is variable. In this control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed on Get is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button is timely. It is set so that a fish can be caught by pressing 22. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period during which the indicator is displayed on Get is set shorter than the period required for pressing the frame button 22, and capture is performed no matter when the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

In the present embodiment, the capture possible state and the capture impossible state are set by changing the time when the indicator is changed, but the capture effect D to F is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is captured at the timing of capture. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that they cannot be caught.

Further, in this control example, the capture success is configured to notify the jackpot of the success / failure determination result, but the capture is not limited to that, and the player is given points to be used in the game as a game privilege by the capture success. , A URL that can download a standby image used in a mobile phone, a three-dimensional code, or a special background image may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect of succeeding in capturing even if the result of the hit / miss judgment is incorrect. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

In the process of S3032, when the scale other than the position corresponding to Get is variably displayed (S3032: No), the indicator determines whether it is the timing when the next graduation is variably displayed. (S3034). When the indicator determines that it is the timing when the next scale is variably displayed (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data in which the fish is displayed and the coordinate data in which the net is displayed are selected, respectively. It is set by moving each in the movement direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same process as in S3035 is executed again (S3037). As a result, when the indicator is not the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display position of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the process of S3034, if the timing of the indicator scale is not variable (S3034: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3036 that the position data do not match (S3036: No), this process is terminated. ..

In this way, although the movement direction set in the capture effect is determined, the display position of the fish and the net is randomly set by lottery, so that the display of the fish and the net can be irregular. .. On the other hand, the variable indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly variably displayed.

In this control example, the display position of the fish and the net is configured to be determined by lottery every time the display position is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position is set in advance in the display data table like the indicator. You may.

Further, in this control example, the movement direction of the fish is defined by the type of the selected capture effect, but the movement direction is not limited to this, and the positions of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In the first control example, the timing at which the special symbol starts to change when the reserved ball is not stored is fixed regardless of the gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). However, in the second control example, the processing is executed so that the timing of the fluctuation start differs depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, the weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53 (c)) in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The weight counter 203u is for counting the delay time for delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol when the number of reserved balls is 0 in the case of the time reduction (in the case of the probabilistic game state or the time reduction game state). It is a counter.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the weight counter 203u, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). When the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, the weight counter 203u is decremented and updated by 1 each time the time saving / medium fluctuation processing (FIGS. 106, S231) is executed.

In this way, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time reduction and the change of the special symbol is not executed, then the game ball enters the second winning opening 640. Even if it does, the start of the fluctuation is delayed by 1 second. Here, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the game ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640. In this case, it becomes easy to win two or more game balls in the open state once. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter in one opening with 0 reserved balls, if the change start of the second special symbol is set immediately at the timing when the first game ball enters. , The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined as 0, and it becomes easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. As a result, the efficiency of the game is deteriorated even though the time is shortened, which makes the player uncomfortable.

However, in the characteristic configuration of this control example, the timing of the fluctuation start is delayed by 1 second by the weight counter 203u, so that if the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are continuously played. When the ball is entered, the problem that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is determined as 0 and the first fluctuation is started can be suppressed.

In this control example, the delay time of 1 second is set when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the state where the fluctuation is stopped during the time reduction, but the delay time is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and it is possible to delay until the timing when the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. .. Further, the delay time may be set according to the timing at which the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set. In this case, even with a short delay time, it is possible to effectively determine that the number of reserved balls is 0 and suppress the selection of a relatively long fluctuation pattern. Further, it is not limited to the time saving, and is not limited to the second winning opening 640.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying until the number of reserved balls is 3 or more.

Further, in this control example, the change start of the second special symbol is delayed in the time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability change game state may be used, and the timing of delay is determined by lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to delay when the number of reserved balls is a certain number or less (for example, one). Further, it is not limited to the second special symbol, and may be configured to be delayed by the first special symbol. In addition, by delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol at the end timing of the jackpot game, it is configured to suppress the problem that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined to be insufficient and the fluctuation is started. May be good.

In this control example, the timing of the start of fluctuation is configured to be delayed, but the time is not limited to this, and the fixed time of the special symbol during fluctuation (the period from the lapse of the fluctuation time to the determination of the stop of fluctuation). That is, when the period from when the symbol is fixedly stopped until it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 in FIG. 64) is set variably, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored. , The period may be set to be long.

Further, in this control example, it is configured to delay when the time is shortened, but at the time of the start of the change of the second special symbol, the period until the start of the change is set each time (the holding ball is determined and the start of the change is set). It may be configured to set a long period (time until). Further, regardless of the gaming state, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the timing for setting the variation start of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Control processing in the third control example>
Next, the control process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 106. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 105, S111). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIGS. 105, S111) in the third control example, the processes S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 64, S104) in the first control example. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is shortened (S231). It is determined whether the player is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state. If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S231: Yes), the time saving and medium fluctuation processing is executed (S232).

Here, the time-saving and medium-time variation processing (S232) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving / medium fluctuation processing (S232). In the time-saving and medium-time variation processing (FIGS. 106 and S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S311). When the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0, it means that the delay time is already set for the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is subtracted by -1 to set (S312). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 in the process of S311 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, which is the reserved ball number of the second special symbol, is 0. (S313). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 105. After the process of the time-saving medium variation process (FIG. 106, S232) is executed, the process of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S233). If a counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

In this way, since the change start of the special symbol is not set until the weight counter 203u is executed, it is suppressed that the change of the second special symbol is determined to be 0 to 2 on hold and executed during the time reduction. can. In this control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is set to 1 second, but the time is not limited to this, and is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction (3 seconds in this control example) 5. It may be configured to set the seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to control so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to 3 or more and then the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected as a state in which the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and the game efficiency is deteriorated during the time reduction.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the fourth control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped by shaking and fluctuating) a plurality of times during the fluctuation period of one special symbol with respect to the first control example, and the special symbol is changed a plurality of times. As if, it differs in that the effect of making it look like a pseudo is set. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect is a change of 1 special symbol, by temporarily stopping the 3rd symbol at least once and displaying the change again, as if the change of 1 is a plurality of changes. It is a production to show to the player.

FIG. 107A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is variablely displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is started, the velocity is variable (dynamic display) at which the symbol can be identified from the start of the variation, and then the variation is difficult to identify the type of symbol. It becomes a high-speed fluctuation which is a fluctuation of the speed (dynamic display), and as shown in FIG. 107 (b), a temporary stop display is suddenly displayed. FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode when the temporary stop is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the third symbol is slightly shaken up and down and fluctuates, and the character is displayed on the front side thereof. The still symbols are displayed so as to overlap each third symbol. This still symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is visibly configured. Further, the stationary symbol is attached and displayed at the timing of the fluctuation display immediately before the temporary stop from the state of high-speed fluctuation before the temporary stop of the third symbol. Specifically, when the display is performed at high speed, the third symbol is displayed semi-transparently and the background image can be seen through. Then, immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically 0.5 seconds before, the semi-transparent display is canceled and the display is displayed in an opaque state. A still symbol is attached and displayed at the display timing. It should be noted that this stationary symbol is not displayed in a swaying manner like the third symbol, but is displayed still, so that the player does not temporarily stop, but whether the third symbol has been fixedly stopped. Can feel like.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is a fixed stop, and it is possible to make it appear that the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

In this control example, the static symbol is the same symbol for each third symbol, but may be a different symbol or shape. Further, the brightness of the third symbol displayed on the back surface may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static symbol. By displaying in this way, the stationary symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to think that the stationary symbol has been fixedly stopped.

In this control example, only the character is displayed as the static symbol, but the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 in the case of 7 symbols) is attached. It may be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the stationary symbol can be made to have the illusion that it is the third symbol, and the player can be made to appear as if the player has stopped.

<Control processing in the 4th control example>
Next, the control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) with respect to the first control example. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. It differs in that it is. Since the same processing as that of the first control example is executed for other configurations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), which is one of the processes in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340), will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying a symbol is executed when a pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing for temporarily stopping the symbol is set in advance in a variable pattern, and is automatically set by defining the display data table.

In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is being performed. When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). If it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the temporary stop of the symbol (S3043: Yes), the still image data is set at the symbol position where the temporary stop is performed (S3043). After that, this process ends.

Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap with the symbol information in the display data table. In this way, by executing the still image data to be superimposed and displayed at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data can be changed by operating the frame button 22 of the player, and other lottery and other lottery can be performed. It can be changed and set according to the notice display, etc., and a wide variety of still images can be created.

In this control example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a number of times preset in the fluctuation pattern, and then the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the super reach display mode is displayed. Will be done. A still symbol is temporarily stopped on the third symbol to be temporarily stopped, and the color of the still image is green in the first temporary stop so that the player can identify the number of times the temporary stop is performed. The third time is set to yellow, the third time is set to red, and the fourth time is set to gold. Actually, when the still image is displayed without shaking and fluctuating, it is easy for the player to recognize it as the number of times the fluctuating display is actually performed instead of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that when a stationary symbol that informs the number of consecutive times is displayed due to the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols, the variation display of the special symbol after that will be a super reach variation display. Can be done. In this control example, the higher the number of temporary stops, the higher the expectation of a big hit (it is easy to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit), and four temporary stops are executed. It consists only of a pseudo-continuous production in which the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. Therefore, when the red still symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that the still image is displayed even in the next fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the still image is set to be hidden at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. As a result, the player can easily set the fluctuation of the third symbol.

The still image is not limited to the character of this control example, and may be a character or may be displayed in a size that hides the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol on the back surface. Since it is actually a temporary stop, the third symbol on the back surface may be configured to be visible through a still image so that the third symbol on the back surface can be slightly seen to be shaken and fluctuated. ..

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, it is determined whether or not the probability-changing gaming state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid (probability-changing solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. It was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the big hit game state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which the game ball can enter during the small hit game. It differs in that it is configured as such. Other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In this control example, for each of the above-mentioned control examples, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower center instead of the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900 is on the right instead of the first variable winning device 65. The difference is that the second winning opening 640 is provided at the lower part, the second winning opening 640 is provided at the upper part of the V winning device 900, and the electric accessory 640a is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Although details will be described later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning opening in each of the above-mentioned control examples. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that the retention member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-mentioned control examples, and the other points are the same structure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the differences between the game boards 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right portion of the game board 13.

A normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is provided at the lower right of the game board 13 in this control example, and a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 enters by free fall. The second winning opening 640 is provided at a position (lower left position) where there is no need to do so. Further, nails are provided from the left portion to the upper right portion of the second winning opening 640, and these nails are provided at a predetermined interval (interval at which the game ball cannot pass) to the above-mentioned normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. It is provided in. Further, the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (another solenoid 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured so that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a is opened. Further, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened, if the opening operation time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the game ball is being guided, so that the game ball becomes the first. 2 The ball will not enter the winning opening 640.

In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. Although it is configured not to enter the 640, the configuration is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be made by covering it with a case body or the like. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as changing the distance between the nails so that the game ball can pass through. Further, the case body may be a case body in which the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the second winning opening 640 are integrated, or a case body in which only a part thereof is integrated may be used.

Further, a shielding member interlocking with the electric accessory 640a is provided to close the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retracted state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (advanced state). The second winning opening may be opened. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

Further, it is configured so that whether or not the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 enters the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Not limited to this, a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through a passage port, a game ball that has simply been launched, etc.) goes to the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured so that whether or not to enter the ball is changed.

A V winning device 900 is provided under the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like described above. The V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out to the player. Is done. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes through the V winning switch 900e3 described later, a big hit game is given.

An opening / closing door 900f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side is provided above the V winning opening 900a as in the first control example described above, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened. The game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed, so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. The details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. The opening / closing door 900f1 is opened / closed by a V inlet solenoid (one of other solenoids 209z) (not shown).

The upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 and the rolling surface of the game ball on the upper part of the V winning device 900 are provided with a configuration for suppressing the momentum of the rolling game ball (not shown). Specifically, a material with a high coefficient of friction (eg rubber, a material with irregularities) is used to reduce the rolling speed, or a structure in which a rolling game ball collides is used to reduce the rolling speed. There is a structure that guides the ball in the depth direction of the board and lengthens the rolling distance. This is a configuration for collectively entering a large number of game balls into the V winning device when the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened.

On the left side of the V winning device 900, a first winning opening 64 is provided in the lower center of the game board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower part of the first winning opening 64. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in a jackpot game (for example, 16 times in the case of a jackpot C), and a predetermined number of times a game ball enters the first variable winning device 65a. Game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning device 65, the reference numeral is changed from 640 to 65 for the same part. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2, which will be described later, will be described. do. In the V winning device 900 in this control example, the retention member 900n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example, and the V switch 900e3 is replaced with the probability change switch 65e3. Is different in that is provided, and is the same in other respects. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, the reference numeral is changed from 65 to 900 for the same part. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 113A is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2. In this control example, the retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2. With this retention member 900n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 900h3, which is the region to which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 side by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 and is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

The retention member 900n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The retention member 900n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retention solenoid 209a (not shown). The retention member 900n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination region 900h3 by advancing forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) to the rear, the game ball staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

Here, in the V winning device 900, the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened during the small hit game, so that the game ball can enter the ball. Further, the staying member 900n is closed during the small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V winning device 900), and after the small hit game is completed (no new ball can be entered into the V winning device 900). After a predetermined time has elapsed (after 3 seconds in this control example), the opening operation is performed. That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is limited to one game ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 even if the switching member 900h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 from becoming excessive.

The game ball that has flowed down into the special discharge flow path 900e2 will pass through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability change game is given based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3, but in this control example, the jackpot game is given based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 (). See S4603, S4607 of FIG. 138 and S4904 of FIG. 142, which will be described later).

In this control example, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 are limited to one ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the number of game balls to be limited may be appropriately changed by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 900e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2.

In this control example, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 900k is not operated. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 900k is operated, so that the design cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

When the flow path solenoid 900k is not operated, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence by the retention member 900n newly provided in this control example, and the operation is the same as that of the first control example described above. Is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The difference in electrical configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are one. The difference is that the part and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and the staying solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. However, it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 114, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

This control example differs from the first control example described above in that a staying solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the retention solenoid 209a is used to operate the retention member 900n in the V winning device 900. Further, the solenoid described in each of the above-mentioned control examples (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) is treated as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

As other changes, ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113, and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added). It will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, each counter in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 115. This control example differs in that a small hit type counter C5 is added in addition to each counter in the first control example described above.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this control example), reach the maximum value (99), and then return to 0. The small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is special at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the small hit type is selected based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Since the other counters are the same as those of the first control example described above, they are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. ..

The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116 (a)). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Further, in the RAM 203 in the present control example, in addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the big hit start flag 203v1, the big hit medium flag 203v2, the small hit start flag 203w1, the small hit medium flag 203w2, the big hit type value 203x1 when passing V, and the V flag It has at least 203x2 and a normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y. In this control example, the probability change flag 203e is unnecessary, so the illustration is omitted.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in order to determine whether it is the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process 2. (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and is set to off when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the jackpot start timing (see S4702 in FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to execute the process according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot middle flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. This jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing, similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S4704 in FIG. 140), and when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the start timing of the small hit. Is set to off (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to for determining whether or not a small hit is in progress in the small hit control process (S4807 in FIG. 141), and is turned off when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

The jackpot type value 203x1 when passing through V is used to set the jackpot type to be given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. The big hit type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is acquired in the V-passing process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138). The big hit type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared in the small hit end process executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

The V flag 203x2 is a flag for memorizing that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hit. be. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 in the V-passing process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referred to in the small-hit end process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142). It is set to off after being referenced (S4906 in FIG. 142).

The normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the time saving game is the first time. This normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is set to be turned on when the jackpot type is C at the timing of the jackpot end in the jackpot control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the normal symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Details will be described later, but when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is on (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), the electric accessory 640a is used for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that a large number of game balls can enter the second winning opening 640 after being opened (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a small game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). It is set so that the ball can enter (S644 in FIG. 136).

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIGS. 117A to 117C are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117D schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining and the first random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (b). Judgment value) is set in the table. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 399", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 398", and if it is "1 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "399", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the big hit of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 400. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit of the first special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "3/400".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the random value that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random values is 400, and it is a jackpot. Since the total number of random numbers is 11, the probability of becoming a big hit of the second special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398, the probability of small hits of the second special symbol is "398/400".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, it is a normal symbol hit. It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

As in each control example described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is released for a predetermined time.

Here, as described above in FIG. 112 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in this control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (another solenoid 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is released for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time reduction is in progress, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time reduction is not in progress. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a hit when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be won in the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second winning opening even though the time reduction is not in progress (the jackpot with the time reduction is not revealed).

Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball fall area a (a in FIG. 112) that receives the game ball that has naturally fallen on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not fall naturally. It has a game ball guidance area b that guides the game ball that has rolled from the game ball fall area a to the second winning opening 640.

That is, the length of the game ball guidance region b (distance at which the game ball rolls) is at least the distance at which the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the time reduction. By designing it to be longer and shorter than the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.5 seconds) during the time reduction, the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a is surely placed in the opening operation during the time reduction. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a from winning the second prize opening by guiding to the second winning opening 640 and performing the opening operation when the time is not shortened.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIGS. 118A to 118C are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b.

The first winning type selection table 202b selects the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type, and the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for the purpose (see FIG. 118 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), at the time of a big hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected, and when the value is "0 to 49", the big hit C (16R time saving big hit) is selected. In the case of "50 to 99", the jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), at the time of a big hit based on the second winning opening 640, the big hit C (16R time reduction) regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"). Big hit) is selected.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and when the value is "0 to 1", the small hit C (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "2 to 99", a small hit E (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49" at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit C (V can pass) is obtained. It is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", a small hit D (V can pass) is selected.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game by the small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operating, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operating. The game ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits to which a big hit is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hit E is a small hit to which no big hit is given.

Further, in this control example, the type of the big hit given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the big hit given after the small hit C is the big hit C (16R time-saving big hit), and the small hit The jackpot given after D is configured to be jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot).

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 in the subsequent small hit game. You may do it. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass through the V winning switch 900e3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)). At least the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 is specified. Since the probabilistic change state is not provided in this control example, the deviation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, since the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4, the fluctuation pattern during the time saving is defined as shown in FIG. 120 (d). Specifically, during the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is short deviation (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the case of deviation, and long / small hit (10 seconds) in the case of small hit. In the case of a big hit, it is stipulated that it will be a long big hit (20 seconds). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern in the case of a deviation during the time reduction may be a long deviation (10 seconds) and the same length as the small hit.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V inlet passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m (see FIG. 124 (b)). .. Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the detection port 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). This V-entrance pass counter 203j is referred to when setting an effect command for display in the V-pass process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the effect command for display is set in the V-pass process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. This round number cumulative counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and the continuation determination counter 223m receives a jackpot end command. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), so that the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is displayed as the third symbol. It will be displayed on the device 81.

The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used for determining whether or not the big hit or the small hit is continuous, and is used for determining whether to initialize the round number accumulation counter 223k described above. This continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when the small hit start command of the small hit C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is subtracted by 1 when the small hit start command of the small hit D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). This continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144), and if the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, when the small hit D is consecutive twice, the jackpot and the small hit are small. It is determined that the continuation of the hit is completed, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In this control example, the gaming state is divided into a special drawing 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1) gaming state (left-handed game) and a special drawing 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 2) gaming state (right-handed game). Be done. Special figure 1 The game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is launched aiming at the first winning opening 64. If the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64 and the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot C, the winning to the second winning opening 640 is performed after the end of the jackpot. An easy time-saving game state (described as being in the time-saving in FIG. 122) is given. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state, a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in order to aim at the second winning opening 640 arranged on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is jackpot D, the special figure 1 gaming state is performed again because the time-saving gaming state is not given after the end of the jackpot. Further, in this control example, there is also a route in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit type is the small hit C, the big hit (V prize) is obtained. In this case, after the big hit is over, the game shifts to the time-saving game state.

Next, the lottery of the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 is set with a higher probability of a jackpot that is in an advantageous state for the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. ing. In this control example, it has a hold storage function for holding and storing the right to receive a lottery based on the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is changing (specifically, the change display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 after the stop display is displayed, the right to draw a lottery based on the winning is currently changing. It can be put on hold (holding upper limit = 1) until it is confirmed and displayed.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in the short-time and medium-time games in the special figure 2 game state will be described. In this state, the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above in FIGS. 117 and 119, most of the lottery contents of the second special symbol are distributed to small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot (V prize) via a small hit in order to increase the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time saving game state is given again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the small hit type is small hit D, the time-saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, so that the process shifts to the non-time-saving game in which the time-saving game in the special figure 2 gaming state is not given.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in the non-time-saving medium-sized game in the special figure 2 game state will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol stored on hold by the hold storage function of the second special symbol is executed. As a result of the lottery, if the small hit type is small hit C, the time-saving game is given after the end of the big hit, so that the game shifts to the time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, the time-saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no hold memory, so that the game state is shifted to the special figure 1 game state. Since this state is in a non-time saving state, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory.

In this control example, in the second special symbol lottery, a symbol hit whose jackpot type is jackpot C may be selected.

That is, it is designed so that the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is an advantageous lottery for the player, can be performed at least twice by using the above-mentioned hold function. Unless the small hit D is selected twice in a row, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 gaming state.

FIG. 123 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning the second winning opening 640 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example, and FIG. 123 shows a small lottery result based on winning the second winning opening 640. It is a hit, and the case where the big hit (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2 is explained, and the case where the lottery result based on the prize to the second winning opening is the big hit (design hit) is explained. be. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. 123 (a). Based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the second special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing. The time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow path solenoid 900k, and the retention solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on (the stagnation solenoid 209a). FIG. 113 (a). In this state, since the player shoots a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900, a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 900, one of which is formed by the retention member 900n. It becomes a stagnant state (900h in FIG. 113), and other game balls usually flow down the discharge flow path 900e1. The time of the small hit effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

Next, the flow of small hit control by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, the V inlet solenoid is turned off and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed among the above-mentioned plurality of solenoids. By closing the opening / closing door 900f1, a new game ball will not be won in the V winning device 900. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the retention solenoid 209a is turned off, the retention member 900n is in the open state (retracted state), and the game ball retained by the retention member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. Since the set time t2 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball existing in the V winning device 900 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1 when the set time t1 elapses, the V winning is set when the set time t2 elapses. Only the game balls retained by the retention member 900n flow down the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the device 900. Next, the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

By driving the staying solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference in this way, even if the game ball is stayed by the staying member 900n within the movable range of the guiding piece 900h2, the guiding piece 900h2 and the staying member 900n Since the game ball stagnated by the solenoid can be reliably flowed down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the game ball, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 has passed through the V winning switch 900e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening. Will be done.

Next, the differences from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123 (b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the V winning device 900 is not operated. That is, after the fluctuation control of the first special symbol by the main control device 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. During that time, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

Here, the relationship between the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (a) and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (b) will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the total of the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set in 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started regardless of whether the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning hit or the symbol hit, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a). ) Is to match the timing of opening, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect executed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. Can be done.

Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of the time-saving game in this control example. The variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol is on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery hold number of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved display area to be shown is provided below the third symbol display device 81 with a comment area for guiding a comment display and a right-handed game, and a production area in the center where a story is developed as the game progresses. Has been done. FIG. 124 (a) shows that since the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640, the display indicating that the variable display area has not changed is displayed, but the hold display area has no hold. The display is shown, and the current mode name and right-handed notification are displayed in the comment area.

FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The difference from FIG. 124 (b) is that the variable display area is displayed indicating that the second special symbol is changing, and the branch road is displayed in the effect area. In the production area, the character moves deep into the cave during the second special symbol change, and when the game ball wins in the second winning opening 640, that is, the holding area is displayed as having a hold. , Go on one side of the fork. In this way, by allowing the story displayed in the production area of the third symbol display device 81 to be developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640, the game ball during the second special symbol change. It prevents the launch of the second special symbol and ensures that the second special symbol is on hold. In this control example, control is shown in which one of the forked roads is selected and advanced based on the indication that there is a hold, but the player may proceed on the forked road each time the game ball wins a prize in the second winning opening. May select a path to be taken by operating a predetermined operating means, and control to proceed to the selected path due to the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 generated after the selection is completed. .. Further, the color tone and design of the forked road may be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol in the change and the lottery result of the second special symbol held. By doing so, the player can participate in the development of the story progressing in the production area, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the production suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is possible to further prevent the ball from stopping firing.

Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the fluctuation is stopped when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. A door is displayed in the effect area, a definite display indicating a small hit is displayed in the variable display area, a display indicating that there is a hold is displayed in the hold display area, and a right-handed notification display is displayed in the comment area. When this effect image is displayed, the V winning device 900 is open on the lower right side of the game board surface, so a comment is displayed to aim at the V winning device 900 by hitting right, and the V winning device is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, the effect of the character destroying the door is executed in the effect area. Further, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol of the change and the lottery result of the second special symbol held.

Even if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above in the explanation of FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed as changing. Therefore, by making the display display area smaller or by providing it in a place other than the third symbol display device 81, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. be able to.

Further, if the fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is off is set to 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), the effect image in which the door does not come out may be displayed at this timing.

Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900, and FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image in the effect area. A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area of. The types of characters appearing from inside the door will be described later in FIG. 127. When a monster appears, the process shifts to the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 (a) is a production image during a big hit. Since the effect image during the jackpot is mainly a battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the payout display during the jackpot (not shown) are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is a production image when a monster is subdued in a battle production during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, there is at least one more big hit (a state in which the lottery result of the second special symbol on hold is a big hit or a time-saving game is given after the big hit). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) is a production image when a monster is defeated in a battle production during a big hit. When a monster is defeated in a battle production, it is in a state of shifting to a normal game state (a state in which there is no hold of the second special symbol and a time-saving game is not given after a big hit). In addition, after displaying the effect image that is defeated in the battle once, a so-called revival effect may be provided such that the monster is revived and subdued. In addition, if the V prize is not won during the small hit, the door will not open (not shown).

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the character appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125 (a) will be described. FIG. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 is “0” in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2).

In FIG. 127 (b), both the lottery result of the second special symbol and the reserved lottery result of the second special symbol are small hits with time reduction (in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2, the small hit type counter value C5 is “0 to 0 to”. It is displayed in the case of 49 "). In other words, it will be a premier production in which a big hit will be given at least three more times.

The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above, but as shown in FIG. 123, any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol starts the jackpot state. Since the same timing is set and the timing for displaying the type of jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the player is given a lottery for the second special symbol. It can make it difficult to grasp the result.

Further, by displaying FIGS. 124 (b) and 125 (a), it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball, to surely obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and to win the V prize device. Can be surely done.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, for the first control example described above, the point of executing the V inlet passage processing and the V passage processing in the timer interrupt processing, the special symbol variation processing in the timer interrupt processing, the start winning processing, and the normal symbol It differs in that a part of the variable processing is changed and that the big hit control processing 2 and the small hit control processing are executed in the main processing. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the fifth control example. In each of the timer interrupt processes S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109, each process of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example, respectively. Since the same processing as is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process of S104 (see FIG. 129), the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), and the normal symbol variation process of S106 (see FIG. 136) executed in the timer interrupt process. ), The V inlet passage process of S140 (see FIG. 137) and the V passage process of S141 (see FIG. 138), which will be described later, are performed, which is different from the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 129, the difference from the first control example of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes S240 to S244 are different from the first control example. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol variation start processing 2 of S240 is performed in place of the special symbol variation start processing of the first control example (see S213 and FIG. 64). Details of the special symbol change start processing 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132.

The processing of S241 to S242 is performed in place of the processing of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit after the lapse of the fluctuation time (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the big hit type. (S217), the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to 0, and this process is terminated.

By setting the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 to ON in the process of S241, whether or not the jackpot start timing is set and whether the jackpot game is in progress in the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 140) described later. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

Further, by setting the time saving middle counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time saving game is configured to end when the big hit game is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

In the process of S243, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S243 that the lottery result is not a small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, since the lottery of each special symbol is configured to be a small hit, the small hit game is started when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244. It is configured to do. Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol change start processing 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S4001). If the time is not shortened (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time reduction is in progress (S4001: Yes), the time reduction variation start process (S4003) is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal variation start process (S4002) and the time-saving variation start process (S4003) executed in the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). After that, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S4102). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)). If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a big hit (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4104). After that, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4105), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). After that, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4108), and this processing is terminated.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the time saving fluctuation start processing (S4003) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a time saving variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time reduction start processing (S4003) differs from the above-mentioned normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) in that the display mode for time reduction and the variation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. The time-saving variation pattern determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 120 (d)) as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hit start setting process, which is the process added in the above-mentioned fifth control example, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C or D (S4302). When it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the processing of S4303 to S4306 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4307.

When the small hit type is C or D (S4302: Yes), the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set in the big hit type value when passing through V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

On the other hand, when the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set in the big hit type value when passing through V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

When the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

In this start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to 405 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. When the processing of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S406). In this S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

Next, the processes of S407 to S408 are executed. When the processing of S408 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in this control example, the upper limit of the number of pending numbers in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, so that this is configured.

In the process of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processes of S410 to S411 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (S412). In this S412, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored in the same manner as the processing of S406 described above.

When the processing of S407, S409 or S412 is completed, the look-ahead processing 2 (S440) is executed and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead process 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 shows a look-ahead process 2 (S440) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 134) instead of the look-ahead process of S413 executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the look-ahead process 2, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (S4401). If there is no new prize (S4401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize (S4401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S4402).

If it is determined in the processing of S4402 that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), it is based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. As a result of the lottery, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). In this normal symbol variation process (S106), since the change in the lottery probability in the lottery of the normal symbol is eliminated with respect to the above-mentioned first control example, the process of S640 is executed instead of the process of S608 to S611. The difference is that the processes of S641 to S644 are executed instead of the processes of S616, and the change in the fluctuation time depending on whether or not the time is shortened is eliminated (the processes of S619 and S621 are deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes S601 to S607 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. When the processing of S607 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant.

When the processing of S640 is completed, the processing of S612 to S615 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. In the processing of S614, when it is determined that the time is being shortened (S614: Yes), and in the processing of S615, it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

If it is determined in the process of S641 that the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), it is the case that the first normal symbol variation processing is executed in the given time saving game. 2 In order to make the winning opening 640 win a lot of game balls, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "5 seconds x 1 time" (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and during that time, the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, when the first normal symbol change processing in the time-saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640, and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

When the processing of S642 is completed, the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is set to off (S643), and the process proceeds to the processing of S620.

On the other hand, in the processing of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the initial normal symbol variation processing is executed, and it is based on the second winning opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times". (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only a part of the game balls passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. It will be guided to 640. Therefore, when the normal symbol variation processing is executed after the first time in the time-saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, but can enter the V winning device 900 arranged below the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time-saving game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900.

Further, during the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning opening 640. It is not the time, but the time when a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 can enter. As a result, even if the game ball is not fired at the time of the first execution of the normal symbol variation processing, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the second special symbol) is performed during the subsequent execution of the ordinary symbol variation processing. The number of reserved balls in the lottery) can be accumulated up to the upper limit (1) in this control example. On the other hand, during the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 may enter the second winning opening 640. It's an impossible time. As a result, when the time-saving game is not given, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is not allowed to enter the second winning opening 640.

When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is terminated. As a result, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed at 3 seconds regardless of whether or not the time is shortened.

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and the time reduction function may be provided in conjunction with the time reduction function of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation time may be set to 2 seconds during the time reduction. Further, in this control example, the only condition for terminating the operation of the electric accessory 640a is the passage of time, but in addition to this, the electric accessory is subject to a predetermined number of balls (for example, the upper limit of the number of reserved storages). The operation of 640a may be terminated. By doing so, when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first normal symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second and subsequent normal symbol time saving operations are started. Therefore, at the start of the small hit game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being in the open state for a long period of time, and the small hit game can be smoothly performed. ..

Next, the V inlet passing process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

In the V entrance passing process (S140), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that a small hit is in progress (S4501: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process ends. If it is not in the small hit (S4502: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S4503) and this process is performed. finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

Next, the V-passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S141). This V-passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

In the V-passing process, first, the jackpot type value at the time of V-passing is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot C (S4602: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot D (S4606). If it is determined in the process of S4606 that it corresponds to the jackpot D (S4606: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. When the processing of S4603 or S4607 is completed, the V passage command is set (S4604), the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4605, the time saving game is ended by setting the time saving middle counter 203f to 0.

If it is determined in the process of S4606 that it does not correspond to the jackpot D (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. In this control example, it is the small hit C or the small hit D that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and the big hit C or the big hit D is set as the big hit type value at the time of passing V. Only if there is. Therefore, if the V-passing process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 900e3 is executed when the jackpot type value at the time of passing V is not jackpot C or jackpot D, it is illegal. It is considered that the game ball is won in the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the processing of S4608, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the main process in the fifth control example. In this main process, the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the small hit control process (S1041) is executed after the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed. It differs in that it is done.

The other processes S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example, respectively. The explanation is omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first variable This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65.

In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4701, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to off (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this process is terminated. ..

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S4704). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S4704: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4704, if the special symbol is in the big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S4707). .. After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, total) are inserted in the first variable winning device 65. 10) If a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the jackpot ends.

In the process of S4710, when it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit middle flag is set to off (S4712).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S4713). In the processing of S4713, if it is determined that the jackpot is C (16R time saving big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is set to ON. Then (S4715), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, if it is determined that the hit is D (16R time saving no big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the effect of jackpot termination. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small hit control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed and V This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to off (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display small hit start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the small hit.

When the process of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON (S4804) based on the opening scenario, the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and the present process is completed.

The opening scenario referred to in the processing of S4804 is set in the above-mentioned small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 133), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid. The 900k open scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened, and the game ball can be entered into the V winning device 900. On the other hand, only in the small hit C or D in which the flow path solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which a big hit is not given.

Further, by starting the operation of the retention member (the residence solenoid 209a is turned on) in the process of S4805, one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 900h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S4801 when it is not the timing to start the small hit of the special symbol (S4801: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S4806). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S4804, if the special symbol is not in the small hit (S4804: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4806, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S4806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V inlet is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10) have passed in the V winning device 900). When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that the closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V inlet solenoid is set to off in order to close the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 (S4708: Yes). S4808), the retention solenoid 209a is set to off in order to terminate the operation of the retention member (S4809), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the above-mentioned V inlet closing condition is satisfied. As a result, the small hit end process (turning off the flow path solenoid) can be executed after the operation of the retention member 900n is completed, so that the game ball retained in the distribution destination region 900h3 is transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. You can surely enter the ball.

In the processing of S4810, when it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to off (S4811), the small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is released. Clear the scenario (S4813) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4810, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S4812) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S4812). This small hit end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to off (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to on (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to off (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not on (S4902: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 900e3 to the small hit game ball, so a big hit is given. In order to end without doing so, a small hit end command is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4909.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the effect of jackpot termination.

When the processing of S4906 or S4907 is completed, the value of the jackpot type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared (S4908), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the command determination process 2 (S1530) executes a process based on the reception of a hit-related command. The other parts are the same, and the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

In the command determination process 2 (S1530), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are executed as in the first control example. After that, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and S1619. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1619.

In the process of S1619, as in the first control example, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1619), and then the present process is terminated.

Here, the hit-related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S1643). This hit-related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S5002), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIGS. 125 (b) and 127) suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5003). In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S5006: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether or not the continuation determination counter 223m is 0. (S5008).

In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the jackpot D is executed twice in succession, and it is the timing when the continuation of the jackpot ends. The round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5008 that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the big hit end command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S5010).

In the process of S5010, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S5006: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S5011), and then the small hit to be started is started. It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the process of S5012, if it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), then the big hit game based on the big hit C is given, so that the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D is determined. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5012, if it is determined that it is not a small hit C (S5012: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit D (S5014). In the process of S5014, if it is determined to be a small hit D (S5014: Yes), then a big hit game based on the big hit D is given, so that a continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D is given. 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5015) to end this process. If it is determined in the process of S5014 that it is not a small hit D (S5014: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the small hit start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S5016).

In the process of S5016, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S5016: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S5017). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5016, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

In the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the V passage processing described later in order to determine the number of game balls entering the V winning device 900 during the small hit game.

When the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set (S5020) in order to execute an effect based on the ball entering the V winning device 900 during the small hit game (see, for example, FIG. 125 (a)). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S5021).

In the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V pass process is executed in order to execute the process based on the entry of the V winning device 900 into the V winning switch 900e3. (S5022), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the V-passing process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S5022). This V-passing process (S5022) is a process executed when it is determined that a V-passing command has been received in the hit-related process (see FIG. 144).

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game that has been executed is the small hit C (S5101). In the process of S5101, when it is determined to be a small hit C (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit on hold (S5102).

In the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is no hit in the hold (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the hold ball, but a big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3. be. Here, the jackpot C is a jackpot with a time reduction, and the probability of becoming a small hit C or D (that is, subsequently becoming a jackpot C or D) in the time reduction game is "397/399". Therefore, in order to execute the 2V effect, which is an effect suggesting that the probability that the big hit game is given for two consecutive times is high, the display 2V effect command is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106.

The display 2V effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 2V command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given for two consecutive times.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a hit on hold (S5102: Yes), a jackpot C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3, and a jackpot or a small hit based on the hold ball is given. If it is done. That is, there is a high probability that the big hit game will be executed two times in a row, and the big hit game will be executed based on the small hit in the hold. Therefore, there is a high probability that the big hit game will be given three times in a row.

Here, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), it is an effect suggesting that the probability that the jackpot game is given three times in a row is high (for example, FIG. 127 (b). ) Is executed, a display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball is not sufficiently fired during the small hit game, and the game ball enters the V winning device 900. If the sphere is not enough. In this case, in this control example, in order not to display the effect suggesting that the probability that the big hit game is given three times in a row is high, the process of S5105 is executed and the process shifts to the process of S5106. As a result, even when the number of prize balls based on the winning of the V winning device 900 is small, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to put the game ball into the V winning device 900.

The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be given three times in a row. do.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the small hit game being executed is not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit on hold (S5107). When it is determined in the process of S5107 that there is a hit on hold (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

In the process of S5108, if it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), the big hit game based on the passage of V is executed, and the small hit C is given based on the hold ball (that is, 2). There is a high possibility that a continuous jackpot game will be given). Therefore, in this case, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109) in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be given three times in a row. The process proceeds to S5106.

On the other hand, in the process of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the passage of V is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the hold ball (that is,). 1) is given a jackpot game). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute the effect suggesting that the jackpot game is given for two consecutive times, the display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106.

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that there is no hit on hold (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the jackpot game based on V passage is executed, so that the jackpot based on V passage is not executed. In order to execute the effect suggesting that the above has been obtained, the display V effect command is set (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5106.

The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display V command, the display control device 114 gives the third symbol display device 81 an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the fact that the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is completed, the V inlet passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the hit-related command processing is executed when the hit-related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2302). This command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and performing processing according to the determined command.

In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Next, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S2440).

If it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the process of S2440 (S2440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2441), and the process returns to the process of S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command in the processing of S2440 (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the processing of S2401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2441) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. This hit-related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command processing (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a hit start command for display (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to the process of S5203.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of the jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S5202), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the timekeeping counter 233h (S5303) based on the jackpot start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5305). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the process of S5201 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5203. When the processing of S5201 or S5202 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to the process of S5205.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the operation on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S5204), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5205. When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

If it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command in the process of S5205 (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third symbol display indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S5205, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

When the processing of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). If it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display in the process of S5207 (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command process (S5208). This small hit start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and has an effect of suggesting the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command process (S5208), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). After that, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5605). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5207 that there is no small hit start command for display (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

When the processing of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the processing of S5209 (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5211.

Here, the details of the small hit end command process (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command process (S5210). This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a small hit end command has been received, and is an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command process (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the small hit end command for display has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

When the processing of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). If it is determined in the processing of S5211 that there is a V entrance passage command for display (S5211: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command process (S5212). This V entrance passage command process (S5212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and the V winning device 900 is entered during the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect based on the entry of the game ball on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5805), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V inlet passage command in the process of S5211 (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5213.

After finishing the processing of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a display 3V effect command (S5213). If it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command in the process of S5213 (S5213: Yes), the 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S5215.

Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing the 3V effect command process (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display 3V effect command has been received, and is 3V (big hit) at the end of the small hit game. Is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that (3 times is continued) on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, as described above, the display 3V effect command is given a big hit and becomes a big hit C when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, the 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5905), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5213 that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5215.

After finishing the processing of S5213 or S5214, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). If it is determined that there is a display 2V effect command in the process of S5215 (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to the process of S5217.

Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing the 2V effect command processing (S5216). This 2V effect command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display 2V effect command has been received, and is 2V (two large hits) at the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that the third symbol display device 81 is to be continued.

Specifically, as described above, the display 2V effect command is given a big hit and becomes a big hit D when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the 2V effect command process (S5216), first, the 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6005), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display 2V effect command in the process of S5215 (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5217.

After finishing S5215 or S5216, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). If it is determined that there is a display V effect command in the process of S5217 (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5217, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed by the hit-related command, so this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing (S5218). This V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display V effect command has been received, and a V prize is won at the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3) on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command process (S5218), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6105), and this process ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the machine is shifted to a state in which it is easy to receive a lottery for the second special symbol (time-saving gaming state) based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. 2 A game that provides a big hit by opening the V winning device 900 based on the lottery result of the special symbol and passing through a specific area (special discharge flow path 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing through the V winning switch 900e4). It is equipped with.

The pachinko machine 10 having such game performance is provided with a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

First, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 does not open in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), and the game board 13 is not provided. It was provided only on the right side of. Secondly, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball is easily won in the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Even so, a time (0.2 seconds) in which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a in the normal game state is opened. Thirdly, the game ball falling area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally falls) into the electric accessory 640a and the game ball that has been rolling from the game ball falling area a are accepted and guided to the second winning opening 640. It is necessary to provide a game ball guidance area b that is possible and that a ball that has naturally fallen from the game board 13 does not buffer, and the game ball rolls around the game ball guidance area b to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, if a so-called small hit, which is not a big hit but is opened by the V winning device 900, is selected, a special discharge flow provided with the V winning switch 900e4. In order to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the road 900e2, a switching member 900h and a staying member 900n are provided. It is a composition such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

Further, in the fifth control example, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 are used from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball. Although it is arranged as (specific winning opening 65a), the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be changed as appropriate. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to a game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during a right-handed jackpot game, a normal symbol start opening (through) The first variable winning device 65 may be provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path rather than all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the launched game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, so that it can be applied to various devices provided downstream thereof. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order. In order to prevent more reliably, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path is opened to open the ball entry or passage port of various devices provided on the downstream side. It is good to close it. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices other than the proper game order, it is based on the detection signals from various switches that detect the game ball provided in each device and the current game state. It is good to notify. Regarding the content of the notification at that time, if a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly related to the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormality notification is made, and in the normal game state, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is passed. If it is detected, by changing the status notification and the urgency of the notification, the game hall clerk can quickly detect the situation that may be disadvantageous to the game field. It should be noted that the abnormality notification is a notification that the sound is louder than the game volume and the signal is output to the outside, and the status notification is a notification that indicates a normal striking method on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device. Conceivable.

Further, in this control example, from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 (specification). Although it is arranged as a winning opening 65a), the V winning device 900 is placed above the second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a) in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. May be provided. With this configuration, even if the electric accessory 640a variably operates and is in the open state during the small hit game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. Further, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 during the small hit game, so that the electric accessory 640a operates variably during the small hit game. This can be suppressed and does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900.

Further, in this control example, the game ball into the V prize device 900 at the time of a small hit game is used by using a configuration in which the flow of the game ball is delayed on the rolling surface of the game ball on the upper part of the V prize device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1. In addition to this, for example, it is a rotating body equipped with 10 pockets for one game ball in the V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13. The V-pocket is provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and the game ball that entered the 10th ball at the start of the small hit game is stored in the V-pocket. A space for storing may be provided, and the game balls may pass through the V winning switch 900e3 for the first time when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space. Further, a control and a configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V winning device 900 by utilizing the advance / retreat operation of the electric accessory 640a.

By setting a limit on the number of time reductions of the normal symbol, the game ball may be smoothly entered into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. Specifically, the normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the electric accessory 640a operating time (for example, 2 seconds) during the shorter time than the fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit. The range in which the total time (for example, 5 seconds) is reduced may be set to the number of time reductions (in the above example, the number of time reductions is 4). With this configuration, since the time-saving game of the normal symbol is completed at the start of the small hit game, it is possible to shorten the time for the electric accessory 640a to variably operate during the small hit game. Further, when the small hit game is started, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a may be prohibited, and the control may be performed to change the electric accessory 640a to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). However, when the reserved memory of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control is changed to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). May be done. In addition to the control of internally ending the time-saving game and returning it to the normal game, the time-saving of the normal symbol here means that the fluctuation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times in the time-saving game of the normal symbol. After a predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set long only for the first predetermined number of times, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set short. , The concept includes all of the control of the state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a hold storage function (special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol. Since this reserved memory is an important configuration for maintaining the playability of the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with a plurality of technical configurations for storing the reserved memory.

First, the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time-saving game state is developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of the second special symbol (FIG. 120 (d)), in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit, is made longer than the variation time of the normal symbol of 3 seconds (S620). It is a composition such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to store the reserved memory. Regarding the second configuration described above, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of whether or not the time-saving game is in progress, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time-saving game is other than during the time-saving game ( It may be set shorter than (during normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the normal game. That is, in general, in the pachinko machine, the time saving function is canceled during the big hit game, and the normal symbol fluctuates with the fluctuation time based on the normal game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the electric accessory 640a does not operate until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the normal game elapses at the maximum, and the game ball may be inserted into the second winning opening. I can't. During that time, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is confirmed and a big hit occurs via the small hit, the problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is a feature of this control example, cannot be stored. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-mentioned times.

In the above-mentioned contents, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the small hit game (V) in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit. The total time (until the detection of the game ball by the winning switch 900e4) may be set longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. This is because the game is in a short-time game during the small hit game. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hit game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining a ball flowing down to the special discharge path 900e2 in the V winning device as in this control example. If, by any chance, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time-saving game, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may start, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the right. It is advisable to make a highlight so as to make a hit, or to give voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big hits and misses, but all of them may be distributed to small hits. By doing so, the reserved memory of the special symbol always becomes a big hit via the V winning device, the speed of the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) that is opened when the jackpot game is played and the V winning device 900 are provided in different configurations, but both functions are V winning. It may be provided in the device 900. In that case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is made to flow down to the normal discharge flow path as shown in FIG. 113 (a) by using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, the cost can be reduced, and the space can be saved. Further, the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900 may be used to determine whether or not to give a time-saving game after the big hit game is completed. In this case, a time reduction is given when the game ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. The switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be predetermined based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, or the switching member 900h is regularly moved at regular intervals to discharge the flow. You may try to switch routes. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to give a probability variation in combination with the technical configurations of the first control example to the fourth control example.

Further, the discharge flow path in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be configured to be three or more depending on the number of functions. Further, the switching member for switching each discharge flow path is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be any configuration as long as the flow path can be switched.

In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate, and the ball is ejected. You may set a jackpot with less time (for example, 2 rounds) and no time reduction. By doing so, it is possible to provide a playability (so-called time saving fall function) in which the time saving ends without acquiring a large amount of balls. Further, in this control example, when a game ball is inserted into the V winning device 900 which has been opened during the time-saving game, a big hit is always made, but the game is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

By using each of the above configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which the number of balls is reduced and the time reduction ends or a pattern in which the time reduction does not occur to the result of entering the V prize device 900 during the time reduction game, so that the jackpot game is acquired. When this happens, the player can be happy and sad.

Further, in this control example, the determination of whether or not to grant the time-saving game after the end of the big hit is determined based on the small hit type (the big hit type in the note). The time reduction is not always given after the end of the jackpot, and if a big hit is made during a non-time reduction game, the time reduction is always given after the end of the big hit, depending on the current game state (whether or not the time reduction is in progress). , Control may be performed to determine whether or not the time reduction is given after the end of the big hit. Even with such control, whether or not to give a time-saving game after the big hit is set based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol.

The number of cards that can hold and store the lottery of the second special symbol may be set as appropriate, and various games can be played by changing the number of cards that can be held and stored in the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hit lottery probability of the second special symbol. It is possible to have sex.

<Variation example of the fifth control example>
Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 153. In this modification, the number of second special symbol lottery that can be held and stored is increased (for example, four), and the probability of hitting special 2 based on the second special symbol lottery is reduced (for example, 1/6) pattern (Fig.). It is a pattern that reduces the value C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value of 117 (C) and increases the loss). By doing this, there is no guarantee that the special 2 hit will occur twice, but since it is possible to receive more lottery for the 2nd special symbol, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the 1st special symbol, it depends on the lottery result. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring a series of villas, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by pre-reading the result of the lottery stored on hold, it is possible to provide a blissful effect for the player, such as a four-series villa final effect.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged on the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, and when the game is played so as to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area (right-handed), the open / close door 65f1 is in the closed state. In some cases, the difference is that the game balls are configured to roll up to about 12 balls on the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed with respect to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (a part in which the detour member 660 is arranged). The detour member 660 is inserted into the opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 with screws in a state where the flow path through which the game ball can flow protrudes to the front side of the game board 13. .. The detour member 660 is composed of a flow path wall portion 660a facing the game board 13 in the front-rear direction.

The flow path wall portion 660a is composed of a front side flow path wall portion 660a1 and a rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2, and the front side flow path wall portion 660a1 and the rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2 are on the bottom surface. It is partially connected and is integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portions 660a1 are arranged with three wall portions protruding rearward at intervals of two or more game balls (2.5 game balls in this control example). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three protruding wall portions on the front side, and the distance between the wall portions is configured in the same manner as the front side wall portion.

In the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2, the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and further, the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 It is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass between them. The bottom surface of the detour member 660 is configured with a slight downward inclination from right to left, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, the bottom surface is closed and the game ball detours over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The road member 660 rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. Further, a connecting portion 660k connecting the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom surface connects each wall portion from each protruding wall of the detour member 660 entrance portion and the front side wall portion 660a1 to the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is formed like this. Since the connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to form a step even when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is reduced.

The rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated at the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball meanders from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball rolls on the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be increased in number. In the detour member 660 in this control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is composed of 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls are inserted in the front-rear direction in the first detour flow path portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion protruding from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion protruding from the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is composed of flow paths. Since five similar flow paths are formed in communication with each other, a maximum of 12 game balls can roll in the detour member 660.

As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the game ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, and more. You can enter the game ball in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is rotated by rotating the rotating piece 650a each time the game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 65e1. The opening piece 650i to be closed is gradually moved in the direction of opening the special discharge flow path 65e2 (to the left in FIG. 155). Then, when the game ball passes through the nine balls, the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the open piece 650i is moved to a position where the game ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state where nine or more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660, the game balls can be made to flow down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, and it is possible to give the player a probability change game state. As a result, the player detours many game balls before the start of the jackpot so that more game balls are rolled on the detour member 660 at the timing when the jackpot game starts. The game can be played so as to fire at 660. Therefore, even in the jackpot game in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, the player can be made to consume a large amount of game balls to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the amusement shop side. Furthermore, even a short-time jackpot game can increase the interest.

Next, the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 155. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example is provided with a flow path opening device 650 in place of the flow path solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h and the switching member 65h. Is different.

Here, the details of this flow path opening device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the flow path opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an opening piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the opening piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b thereof. It is composed of a rotating piece 650a for rotating the rotating drum 650b and a movable solenoid 650c for moving the restricting piece 650d for restricting the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i is configured in a door shape so as to close the upstream opening of the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable to the left and right. Further, one end of the spring wire 650h is attached to one end side of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of an extra-fine stainless steel wire, and is made of a coiled spring in the middle portion. The coil spring 650h is always attached so as to urge the open piece 650i in the direction of closing the special discharge flow path 65e2. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotary drum 650b, and the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding the spring wire 650h (rightward rotation direction in FIG. 156) to cause the spring wire 650h to rotate. The open piece 650i wound around the rotating drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

The rotating piece 650a is always arranged so as to project from the normal discharge flow path 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure that rotates the rotating drum 650b only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and the rotating piece 650a is rotated downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) spring wire 650h. After rotating in the direction, it is configured to rotate and return to the position (position shown in FIG. 155) before abutment with the game ball by the urging force applied to the rotating piece 650a. When the rotating piece 650a is inverted and returned, the rotating drum 650b is configured so that only the rotating piece 650a rotates without rotating. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 projecting to the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b at intervals of 90 degrees, respectively. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to abut on the restricting piece 650d, and when the restricting piece 650d abuts on any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotary drum 650b winds up the spring wire 650h. It regulates the rotation to. On the other hand, when the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h, the restricting piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by abutting the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 are on the left side of the restricting member 650d. With the stopper members e1 to e4 positioned on the left side while allowing the wire to be located (see FIG. 156), the rotation in the direction opposite to the winding direction is restricted.

As a result, when the game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a and the rotating drum 650b is rotated 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are regulated members. The rotating drum 650h is held in the rotated position by being restricted by the rotating position by the 650d. When the next game ball flows down the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the same operation is repeated, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In this control example, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, and the regulating member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). As a result, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the regulating member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the urging force of the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is in the closed position. It can be slid and moved.

Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a probability variation based on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the probabilistic game is given. In addition, the rate of granting the probabilistic game can be changed by the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

In the present embodiment, the rotating piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge flow path 65e4, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The open piece 650i may be configured to be movable. With this configuration, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters, the open piece 650i is in the open state, and it can be easily configured to flow down into the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it can be configured so that the probability change is surely given by entering 10 more balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open pieces 650i are configured to be in the open state by winning nine prizes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by any other number. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, when the game ball wins the first variable winning device 65, the sprocket is rotated, and in the tenth game ball, the winning opening provided in the sprocket can be won. It may be configured to face a suitable position.

<About the 7th control example>
A seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the continuous chance effect described later is executed, which is not in the first control example described above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

First, the continuous chance production will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the order of change of the special symbol is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 and the reserved balls are stored. It is configured to be. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight reserved balls including the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selected for each reserved ball. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), even the type of the variation pattern selected (short deviation, long deviation, reach, super reach, or special reach) can be discriminated. Has been done.

In the example in which the reserved balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth reserved ball is stored. In this case, the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, shows a state in which the continuous chance effect is set. The details will be described later, but if the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a reserved ball is generated is super reach or special reach, whether or not to execute continuous chance production by lottery. Is determined. When it is decided to execute the continuous chance effect, the number of times to execute the continuous chance effect is determined within the range of the reserved balls already stored. This number of times is determined by the number of times including the reserved ball determined to execute the continuous chance (in this example, the sixth reserved ball). For example, if the number of reserved balls is six as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of reserved balls is determined by lottery up to six times.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 159 (a), an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. In FIG. 158 (a), the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), and the continuous chance effect is produced from the variable display of the special symbol for the first reserved ball. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variation display of the 1st special symbol when the execution of is set.

In the effect in which the execution of the continuous Chan effect is set, the effect in which the symbol trembles is executed while the special symbol is still stopped at the previous variation display at the start of the change of the special symbol. After that, as a background image, the characters "Continuous chance !!" are displayed at the same time as the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbol ha indicated by the five "black circles" displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the number of reserved balls currently stored. Here, the reserved symbol ha1 is the second reserved ball held as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is the third reserved ball, the reserved symbol ha3 is the fourth reserved ball, and the reserved symbol ha4 is reserved. The fifth ball and the reserved symbol ha5 correspond to the sixth reserved ball.

In FIG. 158 (b), the special symbol is stopped after the fluctuation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (the variation corresponding to the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) has elapsed. The display mode when displayed is shown. In this continuous chance effect, when the continuous chance effect is set for the fluctuation with respect to the next reserved ball, in the previous continuous chance effect, a combination of a specific main symbol called a chance eye (in this control example, "341". ") Is configured to be displayed. The chance eye is set with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the jackpot (displayed in doublets), and notifies that it is out of order. By displaying this chance eye, the player can recognize not only that the lottery result is out of order, but also that the continuous chance effect is continuously executed for the next fluctuation. Then, the characters "Continuous chance effect !!" displayed on the background image are continuously displayed even when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and are displayed over the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol.

FIG. 159 (a) is an example of a variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) to 158), which is the second variation of the reserved symbol shown in FIG. 157 (a). It is a figure shown. In FIG. 159 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is a reserved ball (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157 (a)) from which the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a). The display mode when the reach state is reached after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation is shown. Here, since the result of determining whether or not this fluctuation is correct is out of order, the stop display is made with the out of place combination as in the combination of the special symbols shown in FIG. 159 (b).

Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As already described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be super reach or special reach are stored based on the winning information of the first to fifth reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or special reach is stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball is the super reach), the continuous chance production ends once with the reserved ball. One or more consecutive holding balls among the holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball) after executing the setting to make the effect look like It is set for the reserved ball that executes the latent effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the latent effect is an effect that is displayed so as to tremble in a state where the symbol in the stopped state of the previous special symbol is stopped at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. .. Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance effect, after the stop symbol is displayed by shaking it, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance effect is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation, but in this latent effect, the stop symbol is displayed by shaking. After that, even if the fluctuation is started, the background display indicating that it is a continuous chance effect is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this way, the player can expect that the continuous chance effect will be started by displaying the stop symbol tremblingly. It should be noted that the same effect as the latent effect may be selected and executed even when the execution of the continuous chance effect is not decided or when the normal special symbol is changed. Therefore, even if the latent effect is displayed, the player also recognizes that the continuous chance effect is not always executed by the effect of the special symbol corresponding to the subsequent hold, and the continuous chance effect is produced by the latent effect. It is possible to play a game in anticipation of the execution of.

In FIG. 157 (a), among the third to fifth reserved balls, the fifth reserved ball is processed by S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Up to (third to fifth reserved balls), the execution of the latent effect is decided (assumed to be decided). As a result, in the variation of the special symbol with respect to the third to fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player may have missed the final fluctuation in the continuous chance production with the second reserved ball, but the continuous chance production may be started again, or in fact, the continuous chance production is hidden. You can expect that it will continue just by doing it. Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is executed again in the change of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball.

In this control example, no matter how many times the latent effect is continuously executed, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect will be executed thereafter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the latent effect is continuously executed three or more times. In that case, it may be configured so that the continuous chance effect is always executed after that. With such a configuration, when the latent effect is executed, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive times, and there is an effect that the interest can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (b), the number of reserved balls to be established after the reserved balls that triggered the decision to execute the continuous chance effect is determined, and the number of the reserved balls is set to the maximum. , The case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six reserved balls are established, and a continuous chance effect is produced from the third reserved ball by the winning information command output when the sixth reserved ball is established. It shows the case when the execution is decided. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case where the digestion of the reserved ball progresses from the state of FIG. 157 (b) and the third reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first reserved ball. It is the state shown. In this state, the holding ball (FIG. 157 (c)) in which the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined at the timing when the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to fluctuate. In), the number of times the latent effect is executed is determined by maximizing the number of reserved balls established after the fourth reserved ball). Here, the latent effect is executed a continuous number of times in which the above-mentioned latent effect is determined for the change of the reserved ball that changes after the change for the fourth reserved ball is completed.

As a result, the player continues the continuous chance effect because the latent effect is executed even after the final change in the continuous chance effect (in this control example, the change of the special symbol for the fourth reserved ball) is completed. You can expect that you are doing it. Furthermore, since the latent effect is configured to be executed within the range of the reserved ball established at the start of the first continuous chance effect, the super reach or special reach that is a big hit to the established reserved ball. It can be expected that the fluctuation is memorized and the continuous chance effect or the latent effect is executed.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the super reach or special reach to the reserved ball established at the time of the start change of the continuous chance effect (the reserved ball stored after the reserved ball of the final change of the continuous chance effect). If there is, the reserved ball before the change is set to execute the latent effect, and the continuous chance effect is executed again by the change of the super reach or the special reach, so that the player can perform the hidden effect more. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance production when displayed. Further, in this case, the continuous chance effect may be started with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball that becomes the special reach or the super reach.

Regarding the continuous chance effect, in this control example, the notification mode is configured to be displayed in the background, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific character may be displayed and the background color is different from the normal time. It may be varied to a different color, or it may be configured to output a type of BGM or a special sound effect. Further, the chances displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be other combinations, and are variably displayed as, for example, a symbol of the character "continuation" which is not a normal symbol. It may be configured as such, or it may be variably displayed on a symbol such as a character, and as appropriate, a special mode of deviation different from the symbol indicating the deviation in normal time (doublet). It may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from the display of).

Next, the electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only the differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in this control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c), and first, with reference to FIG. 160, the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of 113 will be described. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the continuous chance number table 222d and the latency number table 222e are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous chance number table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. The continuous chance number table 222d is different from the winning continuous chance number table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)), which is referred to when the winning / failing judgment result indicated by the received winning information command is a hit. It is composed of a continuous chance number table 222d (see FIG. 162 (b)) for the number of consecutive chances for deviation referred to in a certain case. The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining the execution or non-execution of the continuous chance effect, and determining the number of times when the continuous chance effect is executed.

FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous chance number table 222d for winning. In the continuous chance number table 222d for this hit, the continuous chance effect is not executed according to the current number of reserved balls, and the number of times determination counter 223n (0 to 198) described later is used for each execution number with the current number of reserved balls as the maximum value. ) Is set respectively. When the number of reserved balls is stored, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of "0 to 160" is set as a judgment value of the determination content for not executing the continuous chance effect. Therefore, a determination value of "161 to 198" is set as a determination value for one continuous chance effect. Here, based on the acquired value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, the determination content set to the matching determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the continuous chance number-of-times table 222d. Here, if non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. Further, when the number of consecutive chance effects is determined, the continuous chance effect is set for the execution of the first reserved ball. The number of executions set in the continuous chance number table 222d is the reserved ball that triggered whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the sixth reserved ball). Shows the number of reserved balls stored consecutively before it, including. For example, when a lottery for continuous chance production is executed for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) and the number of executions of four times is selected by the continuous chance number table 222d, three balls are executed. The continuous chance effect is started from the reserved ball of the eye, and the continuous chance effect is continuously executed until the sixth reserved ball.

Similarly, the determined value to be referred to is set from the continuous chance number table 222d according to the number of reserved balls when the winning information command is received. In this control example, the larger the number of reserved balls when the winning command is received, the easier it is to execute the continuous chance effect. Further, as is clear from the comparison with the continuous chance number table 222d for deviation shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the continuous chance effect is produced for all the reserved balls. Is set to a high probability of being executed. As a result, the execution of the continuous chance effect is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach for which the winning / failing determination result is a hit. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be easier to determine as the number of reserved balls increases, the continuous chance effect is more likely to be executed for fluctuations in more consecutive reserved balls, and the player can easily execute the continuous chance effect even in the case of deviation fluctuations. Can play games with high expectations for big hits.

As shown in the consecutive chance number table 222d for losing, even if the number of reserved balls is 6 or more, if the winning / failing judgment result is wrong, a maximum of 6 consecutive chances can be produced. The judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth continuous chance production is started, the player can recognize at an early stage that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit by continuing the continuous chance production once more. Therefore, it is possible to make people interested in the number of consecutive chance productions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the latent number lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent number lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the above-mentioned continuous chance number table 222d, the latent number lottery table 222e is a lottery opportunity for the continuous chance effect among the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of consecutive chance effects. It is determined whether the reserved ball to be super reach or special reach is stored in the other reserved balls other than the reserved ball (super reach or special reach reserved ball), and the super reach or special reach is obtained. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times to execute the latent effect with the reserved ball up to the reserved ball which became the lottery trigger of the reserved ball and the continuous chance effect when the reserved ball is stored.

Explaining with the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the sixth reserved ball is established, the continuous chance production of 6 times of execution is determined, and the continuous chance is determined by the first to sixth reserved balls. It is decided that the production will be executed. Therefore, when it is determined whether or not the first to fifth reserved balls have a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second reserved ball is a super reach or a special reach. Since it is a reserved ball, it is possible to execute a latent effect up to three times for the fifth reserved ball from the third reserved ball. Here, with reference to the latent number lottery table 222e, the table contents to be selected are set for each of the hit / fail determination results for the sixth reserved ball, and the latent number to be described later is set for each maximum latent number. A determination value corresponding to the determination counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), assuming that the hit / fail judgment result of the sixth reserved ball is a hit, the judgment value of the maximum number of latent times of 3 times is referred to in the contents of the hit table. Here, if the value of the acquired latency determination counter 223o is "0 to 50", the latency is 1 time, if it is "51 to 149", the latency is 2 times, and if it is "150 to 198", the latency is 3 Times are set. Here, when the number of latent times of two times is determined, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is not executed for the third and fourth reserved balls, and the above-mentioned latent effect is executed. Will be done. The continuous chance production is started again with the 5th reserved ball, and is continuously executed until the 6th reserved ball. The number of latent effects after the continuous chance effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) is also determined by the latent number lottery table 222e in the same manner. It should be noted that the reserved balls after the reserved balls (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) that triggered the determination of the continuous chance production (five in the example of FIG. 157 (c)). If there is no reserved ball to be super reach or special reach in the 7th to 7th reserved balls), the table contents corresponding to the deviation of the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

In the latent number lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the latent effect is limited to a maximum of 3 times regardless of the number of reserved balls that can be produced. There is. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that when the latent effect is executed on the next reserved ball, the player will win a big hit in the subsequent continuous chance effect. Therefore, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive latent effects, and can improve the interest of the game.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number determination counter 223n, a latent number determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of the continuous chance effect. The number of times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to each predetermined cycle and updates the result. It should be noted that the effect counter 223f and the latent number determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set so that the update cycles are different from each other, and are configured not to be synchronized. The number of times determination counter 223n is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The latent number determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times the latent effect is executed in the continuous chance effect from the latent number lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly added and updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and is performed every predetermined cycle by the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is added and updated one by one. The latency number determination counter 223o is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be executed for each reserved ball when the continuous chance effect is executed. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, the data indicating the determined effect content is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is digested. The reserved ball that starts to fluctuate is shifted to the execution area. As a result, continuous chance production can be reliably executed.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up at the time of power failure, and is restored to the state at the time of power failure when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, continuous chance production can be continuously executed.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 161. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and the deviation (see FIG. 161 (b)). The probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is at least specified. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving gaming state is set in addition to this.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal). The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0 to 149" for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds) and "150-197" for various out-of-super reach (60 seconds) are out of special reach. "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

In this control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and the timing variation type counter CS1 in which the game ball wins is acquired in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even the fluctuation type selected at the time of winning can be determined before the fluctuation starts. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, when the variation type selected is different depending on the number of reserved balls at the start of variation as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach or the like is also used. By allocating the value of the counter CS1 to a constant value even when the number of reserved balls is variable, the variation type can be determined at the time of winning.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. In the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example, the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) with respect to the first control example. The difference is that the start-in process (FIGS. 66, S105) is changed to the start-win process (FIG. 165, S105). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example, the processing of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 is S250 to S252 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed to the processing of. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls having the holding order of 1 are stored by referring to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S251). The details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, when the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is won, the change of the special symbol is started in the winning order in which both are combined. There is. The maximum number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, which is the same as in the first control example. When a reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. As the winning order, the order in which 1 is added to the total number of winnings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, based on the fact that one reserved ball is digested (starts to fluctuate), the winning order is also subtracted by 1 and updated.

In the process of S251, it is determined whether the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the holding area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order in which the change starts next. To. When it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next by the process of S251 is the second special symbol (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. Since the processes of S205 to S207 are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S251, when it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the order in which the fluctuation starts next is the first special symbol (S252). When it is determined that the winning order in which the variation starts next is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processing of S210 to S212 is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is terminated. For other processes, the first control example will be omitted.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of this start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIGS. 165 and S105) in the seventh control example, the process of S406 becomes the process of S420 and the process of S412 becomes the process of S430 with respect to the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example. The difference is that the look-ahead process (S413) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (S450). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the total of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added. The difference is that the information in the order of winning is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, in this control example, the variation type (short deviation, long) selected by the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of winning. It is configured to be able to discriminate between off, normal reach, super reach, and special reach) and notify the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command.

When No is determined in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the look-ahead process 2 is executed (S450). After executing the look-ahead process 2 (S450), this process ends.

The read-ahead process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S450). The look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) in the seventh control example is different from the look-ahead process (FIG. 67, S413) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S503 or S504 is executed, the process of S510 is executed. In the processing of S510, the fluctuation pattern is based on the lottery result (win / fail determination) based on the winning information (counter value) acquired in S503 or S504, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired. The variation type to be selected is determined from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result determined in S510 and the variation type is set.

As described above, in this control example, the selected variation type can also be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command. Therefore, in this control example, the continuous chance effect, which is a special effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations, can be executed when the hold ball on which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed is stored by the voice lamp control device 113. .. In this embodiment, the main control device 110 pre-reads and determines the variation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning information command indicating the information of each acquired counter value is set by the voice lamp control device 113. Each data that can be discriminated may be set so as to discriminate the variation type and the like.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
With reference to FIGS. 167 to 170, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) is in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540), and the variation display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) is in variation display with respect to the first control example. The difference is that they are changed to the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example differs from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes S1650 to S1651 are added. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), the processing of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1650). When the winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), the winning information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

Here, the prize information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information processing (S1651). In this prize-winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). Whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set is determined when it is determined that the continuous chance effect for determining whether the information about the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is set (S1721: Yes). , End this process. In this way, while the continuous chance effect is set, it is configured so that a new continuous chance effect is not set, so that it is possible to suppress problems such as the effect being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. ..

If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). .. If the received winning information command is not a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number of times determination counter 223n and the latent number of times determination counter 223o are set. Acquire (S1724).

Based on the acquired number of times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of reserved balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to the received winning information command), the continuous chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (b)). (Refer to) Acquires (determines) information (number of executions or non-execution) regarding execution of continuous chance production. The information acquired in S1724 determines the number of times the continuous chance effect is executed, that is, whether the continuous chance effect is executed (S1725). If the execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined (S1725: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1726 that the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the reserved ball corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects becomes super reach or special reach. It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether or not the holding ball (excluding the holding ball that has received the winning information command (the holding ball that is the final fluctuation of the continuous chance effect)) is stored (S1726). Although not shown, when the winning information command is received, the data corresponding to the information indicated by the winning information command received in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball is stored as in the first control example. Will be done. With the digestion of the reserved ball, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and when the fluctuation starts, the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten.

If it is determined in the process of S1726 that the reserved ball to be the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the process of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball to be super reach or special reach (S1726: Yes), the winning / failing determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent number lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726. The number of hidden balls, which is the number of reserved balls stored before the reserved ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the reserved ball that is the super reach or special reach determined in, and the processing of S1723. The number of latency is determined from the acquired value of the number of latency determination counter 223o (S1727). After that, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed for each Ryukyu ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each reserved ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set corresponding to each of eight reserved balls, and for each reserved ball, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect, and the continuous effect. Data that can identify the re-entry of the chance effect is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to the area corresponding to the corresponding reserved ball each time the reserved ball is digested. When the continuous chance effect is completed, all the stored data will be cleared, so it can be determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is set depending on whether or not the data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, the post-latent setting process (S1750) is added to the variation display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1709 is executed, the post-latent setting process is executed (S1750). The subsequent latency setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the subsequent latency setting process (S1750).

In the post-latent setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined whether or not it is the earliest variation of the continuous chance effect based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1751). Here, it is determined whether the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the reserved ball that starts to fluctuate is the data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1751 that the start variation of the continuous chance effect is not (S1751: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect is (S1751: Yes), the information of the currently reserved ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). Regarding the acquired information on the reserved ball, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach is stored for the reserved ball that is stored after the final change of the continuous chance effect (S1753). If it is determined that the reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the reserved ball that is stored next to the reserved ball corresponding to the final fluctuation of the continuous chance production is super. The number of holdings up to the holding ball stored up to one before the holding ball that becomes the reach or special reach is determined as the maximum value (number of times that can be hidden) (S1754). The number of latent times is obtained from the latent number lottery table 222e based on the value obtained from the latent number determination counter 223o, the result of determining whether or not the reserved ball is a super reach or a special reach, and the number of possible latent times determined in S1754. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of latent times determined in S1755, the continuous chance production is determined. Here, from the reserved ball stored after the reserved ball for the number of latent times to the reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is set as the reserved ball for executing the continuous chance effect. After the processing of S1756, the processing of S1758 is executed.

In the process of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball to be super reach or special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latency number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final change of the value and the continuous chance effect. The number of latent balls is determined from the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of latent balls that can be held (S1757). After that, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of latent times is determined based on the data in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order.

In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755 to S1756 and S1757 (S1758). After that, this process ends.

In this way, even at the start of the continuous chance production, the latent effect and the new continuous chance production are set for the reserved balls that have been established from the time it is decided until the start, so that the player can have various continuous chances. You can entertain the production. Further, the continuous chance effect is an effect performed on the variable display of a plurality of consecutive reserved balls by pre-reading the determination result of the established reserved balls. As a result, when the continuous chance production is started, the player has a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach among the reserved balls that are established at that time, and the lottery result is not a hit. I have the expectation. Here, in this control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the reserved balls established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is expected to have more reserved balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to maintain expectations for the latent effect on the reserved ball after the end of the continuous chance effect.

In this control example, the latent effect is an effect that causes the symbol to quiver, but the effect is not limited to this, and a sound effect, a character display, or the like may be executed at the start of fluctuation or the like. Further, the pattern of the special pattern or the like may be changed to a pattern different from the usual one and displayed.

<8th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. The eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal board 261 has a accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a jackpot 1 terminal for indicating the state and type of the jackpot. Is provided.

Then, when the jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off at the time when the jackpot game is started. When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, when a jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery, no time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the jackpot game is started. Further, when a jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery / time saving no jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Further, regardless of these jackpot types, when the jackpot game is executed, the bonus continuous operation terminal is controlled to be turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the jackpot is obtained by comparing the timing at which the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on. The type can be determined. As a result, the hall computer 262 can determine the jackpot type without providing the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (big hit F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Can be done.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is added to the first control example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples. In the following description, the differences from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it is clearly shown that the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is provided with the external output terminal board 261. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

An external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 in this control example. The external output terminal board 261 is provided with at least an accessory continuous operation terminal, a jackpot 1 terminal, and a jackpot 2 terminal.

The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the continuous accessory actuating device is operated and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed, that is, the period during which the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, it indicates a period other than that (big hit game). Is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game has started in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177), and in the process. It is set to off when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress. However, unlike the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time reduction available jackpot), and the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. It is set to on when passing through.

Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress in the process. If it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), it is further determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. In some cases (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal indicating whether the state of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for the player, a jackpot gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. If it is, it indicates that it is in an advantageous state for the player described above, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, it is not set to on at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time saving available jackpot), but is set to on when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Is to be done.

Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminals are determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). Further, in the processing, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), further. When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the probabilistic state or the time saving state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has ended (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

The external output terminal board 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal), and outputs signals from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. It is possible to receive. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262, and since they are already known configurations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a jackpot type for the first control example described above. Is different in that it is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

In this control example, unlike the first control example described above, the jackpot F, the jackpot G, and the jackpot H are provided as the types of jackpots. These jackpot types are the first hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that the jackpot F and the jackpot G jackpot H can be selected respectively, and the first hit type counter value C2. It is selected based on.

The details of the first type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value "0 to 33" of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value of the jackpot F, and "34 to 66" is used as the judgment value of the jackpot G as the judgment value of the jackpot H. "67-99" is set. In the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 65) executed by the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first type selection table 202f is displayed. , The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time saving jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a becomes a jackpot that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. ing. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game is given after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery, short time available jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a enters the probability variation switch 65e3. It is a big hit that has never happened. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game will be granted. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery, time saving no jackpot), the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability variation switch 65e3, as in the above-mentioned jackpot G. Is. Further, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the time-saving game is not given, and the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot when the fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol variation processing of the main control device 110 (S216: Yes in FIG. 176), and the jackpot type is referred to. The opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on (see S217 in FIG. 176), is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and is referred to in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. It will be.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different in that the jackpot type storage area 203α is provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type related to the executed jackpot game, and stores the values corresponding to the jackpot types (big hit F, G, H). The jackpot type storage area 203α is set when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed by the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 176). See S260 in FIG. 176).

Then, when it is referred to in the external output process executed in the main process of the main control device 110 and it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and not the jackpot G (S7003: No in FIG. 177), the probability variation setting flag 203h When is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), the outputs of the V winning terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process that the jackpot type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 176), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). See S7004). Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot G, as in the case where the jackpot type is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3, and the probability variation setting flag 203h is not turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177). The two terminals are never set on.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, if both the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G, while the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or a jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F, while if there is no V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can. It should be noted that the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may be compared to determine the jackpot type of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the game state of the game machine, the passing state of the game ball of the probability change switch 65e3, and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261.

FIG. 174 (a) shows a gaming state of the gaming machine, an output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and a passing state of the gaming ball of the probability change switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. , Is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals of the external output terminal board 261.

Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the off state. Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G in the gaming state of the gaming machine is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. .. After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the time saving state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off in the external output processing described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). Then, when the time-saving game is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, with reference to FIG. 174 (b), the gaming state of the gaming machine when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and the probability change switch 65e3. It is a timing chart which showed the passing state of a game ball, and the output of 1 jackpot terminal and 2 jackpot terminals of an external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started, as compared with the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed. The difference is that the signals of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when the V prize is won).

Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are in the off state. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output processing described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON based on the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (see S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, as in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation given after the jackpot game is completed. When the game is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

When the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Since there is no such thing, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal remain off. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time-saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to remain off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

Next, a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 shows the game state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the passing state of the game ball of the probability change switch 65e3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. It is a timing chart which showed the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the terminal board 261.

FIG. 175 (a) is a timing chart when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F. It is a timing chart when a game is executed continuously.

First, a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (a). In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot of the jackpot G and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7002 and S7004). After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game is given, and the continuous operation terminal of the accessory and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game ends. Later, the time-saving game is given, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the jackpot 2 terminals are not set to off, and the on signal is continuously output.

Then, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot G becomes a jackpot again, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminals also continue. It will be set to on (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the big hit game to be executed again is completed, the time saving game is given, and the continuous operation terminal of the accessory and the big hit 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the big hit 2 terminal is set. It is not set to off, and the signal of on is continuously output. Then, the jackpot does not occur during the execution of the time-saving game, and when the time-saving game ends, the game shifts to the normal game state and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is continuously executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F will be described. In the normal game state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot of the jackpot H and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). (See), on the other hand, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not set to on and remain off (S7005: No in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time-saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to remain off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot G and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is output. It is set to on (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game is given, and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is the time-saving gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to off, and the output remains on. After that, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot F becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot 2 terminal continues. Will be set to on.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game is completed. When the jackpot game ends, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (S7007 in FIG. 177), while the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot 2 terminal is assigned. Output is not turned off and remains on. After that, when the probabilistic game is completed, the game shifts to the normal game and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off.

As described above, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. This makes it possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, if both the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G, while the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or a jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F, while if there is no V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can.

Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game.

When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game, the output is continuously turned on (the period during which the output is on) without being turned off. Therefore, it can be determined that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that a part of the special symbol variation processing and the external output processing is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 176, the details of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing (S104). In the eighth control example, as compared with the first control example described above, when the lottery result is determined to be a big hit after the lapse of the fluctuation time (S216: Yes), the big hit type related to the lottery result is set to the big hit type storage area 203α. The difference is that it is configured to be stored in, and the other parts are the same, so a detailed description of that part will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation processing, first, the processing of S201 to S216 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S217) based on the big hit type, and the start of the big hit is set (S218). .. After that, the value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

When the processing of S260 is completed, the main processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed as in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is a process of transmitting to an audio lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to a value of each area of the RAM 203, or the like.

In the external output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001). In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (S7002). , S7003. The accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 is detected by the hall computer 262. As a result, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the processing of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on (S7003: Yes). S7004), the process proceeds to S7010. By the processing of S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, and the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot G has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating jackpot F or jackpot H and is not a value indicating jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the probability change switch 65e3, and it is confirmed that the probability change game is given after the jackpot game is completed. .. In this case, the process proceeds to S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010.

Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k operates during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262 is delayed from the continuous operation terminal of the accessory whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the jackpot based on the jackpot F is turned on. It can be determined that the game has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

On the other hand, if the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the game ball does not pass to the probability change switch 65e3 is executed. It can be determined that it was.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7005 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7010.

In the processing of S7001, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are sent. The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

After finishing the process of S7007, it is nextly determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined to be in the probability variation gaming state, and when the time reduction / medium counter is larger than 0, it is determined to be in the time reduction gaming state. In the process of S7008, if it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminal. On the other hand, in the process of S7008, if it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to the process of S7010.

By the process of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the probability variation game or the time saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probability variation game state or the time saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off. The output of the jackpot 2 terminals is continuously turned on. On the other hand, when the probabilistic game or the time-saving game is not given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off.

In the process of S7010, another external output process is executed (S7010), and this process is terminated. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as a hold ball number command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 described above to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. .. As a result, the information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111.

As described above, in the eighth control example, if the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type of the lottery result. It is configured so that it can be used. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and then when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on, and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned off.

As a result, three types of hall computers 262 that detect the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are provided by detecting the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. It is possible to determine which jackpot type the jackpot game is being executed among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game.

When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game, the output is continuously turned on (the period during which the output is on) without being turned off. Therefore, it can be determined that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

In this control example, the jackpot type is discriminated by the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type can be discriminated by the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal. May be good. Further, either one of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may not be provided, or a terminal for outputting the jackpot may be separately provided on the external output terminal board 261.

Further, this control example is not limited to the one described above, and a terminal of an external output terminal board 261 for outputting information related to other jackpot games may be provided. For example, the external output terminal board 261 may be provided with a V winning terminal that outputs an on signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent acts such as passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even during the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot H without the probability variation lottery. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The output of the terminal does not turn on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects the fraudulent act as if the game ball was inserted into the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fraudulent act when the output of the V winning terminal is turned on but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on. And can be notified.

Further, in the above-mentioned eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal is not provided and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type depending on the time difference.

Specifically, when the jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the time for the jackpot game (for example, 120 seconds). When the jackpot game of jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Turns off the output of the jackpot 1 terminal at the end. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time for the jackpot game, which is the time from the period in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). .. Further, when the jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, but is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

With this configuration, if the hall computer 262 determines that the output of the jackpot 1 terminal has been on for 120 seconds, it can determine that the jackpot game by the jackpot G has been executed. can. Further, if the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot F has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot H has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. In addition, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is set for each jackpot type, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on only for the on time specified at a predetermined trigger (for example, at the start of the jackpot). May be good.

Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to be turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. As a result, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but if the game ball is not entered into the specific winning opening 65a due to the fact that the game ball is not launched, the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, it cannot be detected that the jackpot is F. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability change switch 65e3 is performed even though the game ball is entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has not passed (in the case of jackpot H).

<9th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In the ninth control example, the above-mentioned eighth control example is provided with an external output terminal board 261 that outputs a signal according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, and continuous winning is performed to the specific winning opening 65a. The difference is that it is configured so that it can be detected.

Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a prize is won in the gaming machine. Will be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs, and the output is continuously turned on when the continuous winning is performed.

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated winning is continuously won by acquiring the signal of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal. Can be determined. Further, in the hall computer 262, the process that needs to be executed when the continuous winning is generated without calculating the acquisition result of the signal of the winning terminal and determining whether or not the continuous winning is generated. Is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is added to the eighth control example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples. For example, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal may be controlled according to the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, the differences from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those of the eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the 9th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 178, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different in that the winning period counter 203β and the continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the eighth control example described above. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting the period for outputting a signal to the winning terminal (winning output period). The winning period counter 203β is determined when it is determined that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, and the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more each time the external output process is executed (FIG. FIG. 180 S8008: Yes), subtracted one by one (see S8009 in FIG. 180). Then, when the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004: Yes in FIG. 180), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

As a result, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) based on the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting the period for outputting a signal to the continuous winning terminal. The continuous winning period counter 203γ is determined when it is determined that the game ball has been entered (winning) in the specific winning opening 65a in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 180). S8001: Yes), set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, and when the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more each time the external output process is executed. (S8010: Yes in FIG. 180) is subtracted by 1 (see S8011 in FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output of the external output terminal board 261 to the continuous winning terminal is set to off. If a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) again (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

As a result, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (2 seconds in this control example), while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a, the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 You can keep the output to on. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has elapsed, the output of the external output terminal board 261 to the continuous winning terminal is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the game state of the gaming machine and the signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when the jackpot game is executed. ..

A case where the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (a). FIG. 179 (a) shows the game state of the gaming machine when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and the continuous operation terminal, winning terminal, and continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261. It is a timing chart which showed the signal output from.

First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operating device is not operating, the accessory continuous operating terminal is off, and the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, the big hit game is started, and when the bonus continuous actuating device is activated, the bonus continuous actuating terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened / closed, and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a after the operation of the accessory continuous operating device, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is output for a predetermined time (in this control example). It is controlled to be on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the lapse of the winning output period (100 milliseconds) (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses, and turns off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the bonus continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to off, and the game shifts to the normal game (or the probabilistic game or the time-saving game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new winning ball during the continuous winning output period based on the winning ball will be described. FIG. 179 (b) shows the game state of the gaming machine and the outside when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new winning ball during the continuous winning output period based on the winning ball. It is a timing chart which showed the signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the output terminal board 261.

First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, and when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

Then, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the entry of the game ball, and the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) Is controlled to be on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the lapse of the winning output period (100 milliseconds) (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until the lapse of the continuous winning output period (2 seconds). (S8006: Yes in FIG. 180).

When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a game ball has newly entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). (See S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Further, the output of the winning continuation terminal is also reset (updated) so that the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) is turned on (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to off after the lapse of the winning output period based on the new ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and then continued after the lapse of the updated continuous winning period. The output of the winning terminal is set to off (S8007 in FIG. 180). If a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the updated (reset) continuous winning period, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal is continuously used. The output will be set to turn on.

When the jackpot game is completed, the bonus continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to off, and the game shifts to the normal game (or the probabilistic game or the time-saving game).

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously winning (winning) into the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. .. As a result, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without performing the calculation based on the previous winning information. This can reduce the processing load of the hall computer 262.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 9th control example>
Next, the control process of the main control device in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 180. The ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that a part of the processing is changed from the external output processing. Since the other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

The details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This is a process of transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the detection switch 65c1, it depends on whether or not the switch of the detection switch 65c1 is turned on in the switch reading process of the main control device 110. Determine.

In the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (S8002). 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) is set in the winning period counter 203β, and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the continuous winning period counter 203γ (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), when the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off, and the process proceeds to S8008.

If it is determined in the process of S8004 that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). If it is determined in the processing of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a. Since the game ball does not newly enter the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off (S8007), and the output of the continuous winning terminal is set to off (S8007). Move to processing.

If it is determined in the process of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8008 as it is.

Here, even when the ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, such as when the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a state other than the jackpot gaming state, the processing of S8005 is performed. Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is already turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off as it is. Since the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a only during the big hit game, the processes S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

As a result, it is not necessary to execute the processes of S8001 to S8007 in the game state other than during the big hit game, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, if the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, fraudulent activity or abnormality may occur. Therefore, an error terminal is separately provided in the external output terminal 261 for the error. By turning on the output of the terminal, it may be configured to detect fraudulent activity or error occurrence. It is not necessary to use the error terminal to detect fraudulent activity or abnormality occurrence, and a notification sound for notifying the error may be output, or a display suggesting the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may try to do it.

After finishing the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008). If it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the winning output period (100 milliseconds), the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is subtracted by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 in the processing of S8008 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the winning output period, not the winning output period, so the processing of S8009 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010). If it is determined in the processing of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) is set, the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is subtracted by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

If it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 in the processing of S8010 (S801: No), it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, not the continuous winning output period, so the processing of S8011 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

In the process of S8012, other external output processes are executed (S8012). The other external output processing is, for example, the external output terminal indicating that the period during which the accessory continuous operation device is operated, that is, the period during which the jackpot game is executed, as in the case of the external output processing in the eighth control example described above. A process of turning on the continuous operation terminal of the accessory of the plate 261 at a predetermined trigger is executed. When the processing of S8012 is completed, the main processing is terminated and the process returns to the main processing.

As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined that the game ball is continuously entered (winning) into the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a prize is won in the gaming machine. Will be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs, and the output is continuously turned on when the continuous winning is performed.

As a result, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning by the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without performing the calculation based on the previous winning information. This can reduce the processing load of the hall computer 262.

Note that this control example is not limited to the one described above, and may be configured so that the output of the continuous winning terminal is continued only at the time of a specific jackpot type. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal, thereby determining the jackpot type that has become a jackpot. Can be made possible.

Further, the period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (winning output period) may be different for each jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. For example, if the jackpot type is jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, if the jackpot G is, the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, and if the jackpot H is, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (winning output period), thereby performing the jackpot of the jackpot game. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of discriminating the jackpot type, it is possible to make a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal board 261, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the ninth control example, the game ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the ball entry interval. If a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 will be continuously turned on, and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected on the hall computer 262 side. Is. Further, as the winning output period becomes shorter, it is necessary to shorten the detection interval of the winning terminals by the hall computer 262 accordingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal will be turned off and the number of winnings cannot be detected accurately.

Therefore, when the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is very short (10 milliseconds, etc.), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. , There is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, a period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (winning output stop period). ), And after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entered into the specific winning opening 65a. You may do it.

As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to be ON is longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the ball-balled game ball can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect (do not miss) the winning. Further, in the hall computer 262, it is not necessary to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at an interval shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 5 milliseconds), and the processing load of the hall computer 262 is reduced. Can be mitigated.

Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot game. The jackpot game is configured so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the state (round) in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). There is. This round ends with the lapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) or the entry of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the specific winning opening 65a, and then the interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round is about to begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set longer than the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. The winning terminal of the board 261 can be output.

Specifically, when 10 game balls continuously enter the specific winning opening 65a at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). It is necessary to set the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 to be on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds) 10 times in total based on the minute). Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds) after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, It is assumed that the next winning output period is configured to start. In this case, the time required to output the signal based on all the winning balls to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the output of the winning terminal is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) And the number of times the winning output period required after the output of the winning terminal (9 times) multiplied by the winning output period (50 milliseconds) is added to obtain 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is completed based on all the incoming balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. Is possible.

Therefore, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to be ON is longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since all the output based on the game ball can be executed during the subsequent round-to-round interval, the hall computer 262 can detect (do not miss) the winning. In addition, even if all the outputs based on the newly entered game balls during the prize output period cannot be executed during the interval between rounds, the specific prize is specified from the execution of the jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game. Since there is a period during which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (the interval of the big hit game), the game may be configured to be executed in the interval of the big hit game. The above-mentioned specific example is an example, and the period such as the winning output period, the winning output suspension period, and the interval between rounds may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the ninth control example, for example, a V winning terminal that outputs an on signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) based on the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is provided on the external output terminal board 261. You may do so. As a result, by comparing the output timing between the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the entry into the specific winning opening 65a and the V winning terminal, an illegal V winning (entry of the game ball into the probability change switch 65e3). It becomes possible to determine whether or not the ball) has been performed by the hall computer 262.

Specifically, even though the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is detected, and V If the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that V winning (a game ball is entered into the probability change switch 65e3) is illegally performed. Therefore, when the V winning terminal is on even though the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off, it can be detected as invalid or abnormal.

Further, a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a predetermined passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the time (1 second) required for passing through the period when the continuous winning terminal is on (continuous winning output period), the V winning terminal is set to the period when the continuous winning terminal is off (other than the continuous winning output period). When it is turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect it as an illegal V prize.

Specifically, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 after a predetermined passage time (1 second) has elapsed. It does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the lapse of a predetermined passing time (1 second). Therefore, if the continuous winning terminal, which is turned on based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and then turned off after the lapse of a predetermined passing time (1 second), is turned off, the probability change switch. The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on during the period when the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that the V winning terminal is an illegal V winning.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of the technical idea of a moving member that is moved only by urging force>
The display area of the liquid crystal display device from the retracted position located outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the urging device that generates elastic urging force in one direction and the urging force generated by the urging device. A moving member that is movably formed to a predetermined position located on the front side of the A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising a device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor for generating a driving force for moving the moving member are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the moving member is moved by the motor drive, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member formed so as to be movable from the retracted position to a predetermined position by the urging force in one direction is restricted (stopped) by the position regulating device at the retracted position. ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is arranged in the retracted position and starts moving by the accumulated urging force.

Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed at the target value from the start when the moving member is started to move from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

Examples of the urging device include a device using the repulsive force of a magnet, a device using spring elasticity, and the like, and examples of the releasing device include a driving device that gives a driving force to mechanically move the position regulating device. , A device for releasing the electromagnetic adsorption of the position regulating device and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is provided with a drive device having a function of generating at least a driving force for moving the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the release device is configured by the driving device. Gaming machine A2.

Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is required in order to repeatedly perform the effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device for generating a driving force is required. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device inside the gaming machine is limited, there is a possibility that the space for arranging the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the release device is configured by the drive device, so that the drive device is released from the regulation of the moving member and the moving member is retracted from the predetermined position. It can also be used for returning to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive device is separately prepared, the space for disposing the release device and the drive device can be suppressed.

Further, after the moving member has moved from the retracted position to a predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect of the moving member can be repeated.

Examples of the drive device include a motor and an air cylinder.

In the game machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the proximal end side, and the position regulating device is projected from a first rotating body rotated about the first axis and the first rotating body thereof. The pin member is provided with a pin member eccentrically located on the first axis, the pin member is connected to the moving member on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis formed on the proximal end side of the moving member and the pin member. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is formed so as to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis and the pin member formed on the proximal end side of the moving member.

Therefore, by moving the moving member to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held in the retracted position. can. This eliminates the need for, for example, a structure that detects that the moving member is placed in the retracted position and operates the position regulating device to regulate the moving member.

Further, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position even if there is no driving force such as a drive motor. It is possible to secure a large amount of regulatory power. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large amount of urging force accumulated in the urging device, and it is possible to make the effect of starting the moving member at high speed remarkable.

In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion for guiding the pin member, and is a straight line connecting the pin member of the position regulating device and the first axis at at least one of the retracted position or the predetermined position. The direction orthogonal to the guide portion and the extending direction of the guide portion are arranged so as to coincide with each other, the position regulating device is engaged with the driving device, and the driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the pin member is formed so as to be movable along a guide portion by being rotated by the above.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when the moving member starts to rotate from the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are provided. Since the directions match, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion at the start of rotation of the first rotating body.

Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position regulating device on the moving member, it is necessary to shift the positional relationship between the first axis, the rotation axis on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member (rotate the position regulating device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engaged state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are engaged with each other and a non-engaging state in which the positioning device and the driving device are disengaged are formed. The gaming machine A5 is possible, and the non-engaged state is formed at least when the moving member is started from the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, so that the resistance applied to the position regulating device is applied. As a result, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engaging state between the driving device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counter the urging force of the urging device, the high speed at the start of the moving member can be ensured, so that the degree of freedom in designing the urging device can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

As an embodiment in which the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position regulating device, and the gear meshed with the gear is partially. The second rotating body formed in the above is arranged in the driving device, and the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, or the position regulating device is the first. A magnetic body is formed on the side surface of the first rotating body, and a second rotating body in which the magnetic body adsorbed by the magnetic body is partially formed is arranged in the drive device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged. An example is the case where the drive device is transmitted by the adsorption with.

More specifically, when the first rotating state and the second rotating body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulating device and the driving device form an engaged state in the region where the gears are meshed, and the position regulating device and the driving device are driven in the region where the gear meshing is released (the region where the gears are not formed). The device and the device form a non-engaged state.

In the game machines A1 to A5, the moving member includes an effect member that is swingably supported by the moving member and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least in a predetermined position. The member extends from the proximal end side to the swinging end side which is the opposite end of the proximal end side, and is formed in such an manner that the extending direction is the longitudinal direction, and the proximal end side is the liquid crystal. The effect member is pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. It is formed, and in the retracted position, the first direction is taken along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and in the predetermined position, the first direction is the tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that one end in the first direction projects toward the opposite side of the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effecting member is arranged at the retracted position, the effecting member moves its first direction toward the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is said to be in line with it. Therefore, even when it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be made easier to install.

Further, when the effect member is arranged at a predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction serves as the effect end. Since it is sandwiched and projected to the opposite side of the retracted position, the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used to produce an effect.

As a case where it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member on the outside of the liquid crystal display device, for example, a case where a retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device is exemplified. Will be done.

The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first protruding portion, wherein a change in the posture of the effect member occurs when the first protruding portion is guided by the first guide portion.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the change in the posture of the effecting member is caused by the protruding portion of the effecting member being guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

That is, for example, when the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted by the ascending movement of the moving member, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of the moving member being ascended and moved. Depending on the design of the first guide portion, it is possible to arbitrarily select whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending moving end.

As the first guide portion, an elongated hole formed through and having an elongated direction, a groove formed as a recess having an elongated direction, and the like are exemplified and guided. Examples include a mode in which the first protruding portion is slid on the first guide portion, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the first protruding portion, and a mode in which the rotating body is rolled to the first guide portion. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and the swing axis of the moving member. A concentric circle portion extending along the above-mentioned circle is provided, and the concentric circle portion is formed on the predetermined position side and the posture changing portion is formed on the retracted position side. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its posture with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member do not change their posture with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as a unit can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture change portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided by the posture change portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric circles are extended along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first protruding portion of the effecting member is guided through the concentric circles, the first projecting portion of the effecting member and the effecting portion are produced. The effect member is moved while the relative positional relationship between the member and the axial support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the concentric circles are formed on the predetermined position side, the effect member and the moving member can be made visible to the player as a unit for a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and the swing axis of the moving member. The gaming machine A9 is provided with concentric circle portions extending along the circles, and the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its posture with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member do not change their posture with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as a unit can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture change portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided by the posture change portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric circles are extended along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first protruding portion of the effecting member is guided to the first guide portion, it becomes the first protruding portion of the effecting member. , The effect member is moved while the relative positional relationship with the axial support position of the effect member and the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the effecting member can be quickly changed while the effecting member is visually recognized by the player.

In any of the game machines A6 to A9, the movement is provided with a second guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extending along the rotation locus of the moving member. The member includes at least one second protruding portion guided by the second guide portion, the second protruding portion thereof is integrally formed with the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. In this case, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the second protruding portion is in contact with one end of the second guide portion.

Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, it is not possible to stop the motor to reduce the momentum of the moving member as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. It is necessary to form a mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second protruding portion hits the end portion of the second guide portion. By being in contact with each other, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

Further, since the second protruding portion is guided to the second guide portion extending along the rotation locus of the moving member, the second guide portion and the second protruding portion optimize the rotation of the moving member at the same time. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member in the direction of the swing axis.

Here, the first protruding portion and the first guide portion of the effecting member may be brought into contact with each other to serve as a stopper, but since the effecting member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion. There is a problem with strength. On the other hand, since the second protruding portion is integrally projected from the moving member, the problem of strength is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

By forming a plurality of sets of the second protruding portion and the second guide portion, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches a predetermined position. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the second protrusion. Further, as the second guide portion, an elongated hole formed through and having an elongated direction, a groove formed as a recess having an elongated direction, and the like are exemplified and guided. Examples include a mode in which the second protruding portion is slid on the second guide portion, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the second protruding portion, and a mode in which the rotating body is rolled on the second guide portion. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction, in which one end thereof is larger than the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of the one end portion. The gaming machine A11, characterized in that the width is reduced.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that the groove width of one end portion is smaller than that of the other end portion. That is, since a large gap formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position is secured, resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be suppressed. Further, the gap formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position can be reduced, and the wobbling of the second protruding portion can be suppressed.

Here, as an embodiment in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end of the second guide portion toward the other end, or the second guide portion is reduced. An example is a case where the groove width is sharply reduced in a part of the above (a groove width is reduced in at least two types).

In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through hole, the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide portion, and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide portion is pierced. Similar effects can be obtained even if the thickness in the setting direction is formed in such a manner that one end is reduced as compared with the other end. In this case, further, when the moving member is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling, especially in the direction in which the second guide portion is formed.

In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the side surface on the small diameter side of the second guide portion is formed from the one end portion to the other end portion. The gap with the second protruding portion is reduced up to the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second protruding portion is increased at the other end portion as compared with the gap, so that the side surface on the large diameter side is formed. The gap between the one end and the second protrusion is reduced, and the gap between the two ends and the second protrusion is reduced from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. A game machine A12 characterized by a large gap.

According to the gaming machine A12, the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position by ascending movement. Therefore, when the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member swings. When the second protrusion is slightly moved in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the shaft, the second protrusion is likely to come into contact with the small diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the small diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap between the moving member and the second projecting portion is reduced at the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. This makes it possible to smoothly swing the moving member from the retracted position to a predetermined position.

Further, when the second protruding portion is swung from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the large diameter side of the second guide portion, the moving member is swung to a predetermined position, and finally the gap with the second projecting portion is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a gap between the main body extending from the base end side to the swinging end side and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. It is provided with a decorative portion disposed apart from the front side, and when the effect member changes its posture, at least one of one end in the first direction or the other end on the opposite side of the one end is the main body portion and the said. A game machine A13 characterized in that it is stored between it and a decorative part.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effecting member changes its posture, at least one of both ends of the effecting member in the first direction is the main body portion and the decorative portion. It is stored with a slight gap between it and. Therefore, when the effect member changes its posture and, for some reason, the effect member can move significantly in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body portion, the main body portion and the decorative portion serve as a guide to prevent the movement. , It is possible to limit a large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction.

According to this, when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a laminated relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

In the gaming machine A13, the movement locus of any part of the effect member and the movement locus of any part of the decorative member are the shaking of the effect member in the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that it overlaps in the direction of the moving axis.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably stored between the main body portion and the decorative portion in the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. As a result, as compared with the case where the effect member is stored between the main body portion and the decorative portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case where the fixing plate prevents the displacement in the front-rear direction, It is possible to exert a guide function that regulates the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction from an earlier stage.

As a result, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, not only the interference between the moving members of the moving unit outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device but also the moving unit inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to prevent interference between moving members.

<Example of technical idea to suppress wobbling of moving members>
A moving member formed so as to be slidable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, an effect member arranged on the moving member, and the effect member thereof. In a gaming machine including a second driving device that generates a driving force for driving the gaming machine, the retracting position is a position separated from the predetermined position in the lateral direction of the gaming machine by a predetermined distance and from the predetermined position. The effect member is at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position is the movement end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being driven.

Here, a moving member formed so as to be slidable and an effect member arranged on the moving member and driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slid and moved in the horizontal direction. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-085811). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving member receives a force due to the reaction of the drive of the effecting member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member in a predetermined position, the effecting member is required. There is a problem that it is necessary to continue to apply a force that resists the force due to the reaction of the drive of the moving member to the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position, which is the end of movement of the moving member, is formed diagonally downward of the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second driving device at a predetermined position and the moving member receives the force due to the reaction, the force due to the own weight of the moving member works toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is placed in the predetermined position. Since it can be maintained (to push it back), the moving member can be maintained at a predetermined position even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is unnecessary.

The vertical direction of the gaming machine means the direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the horizontal direction of the gaming machine means the direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction of the gaming machine. do.

As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method, a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of a moving member, and a method of winding the belt.

The game machine B1 includes an auxiliary member arranged at a distance of a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is displayed on a liquid crystal display at least in a state of being arranged at the predetermined position. The overhanging portion is provided inside the display area of the device, and the overhanging portion is in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, at least in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. The gaming machine B2, which is characterized in that it comes into contact with the auxiliary member when it swings.

Here, the overhanging portion of the moving member is formed so as to project inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that interference with other accessories is prevented. Therefore, it is required to suppress the shaking in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane of the moving member, and the moving member is placed at a predetermined position. In the arranged state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides and moves, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the overhanging portion and prevent the overhanging portion from colliding with other accessories.

In the gaming machine B2, the overhanging portion is characterized in that the rigidity on the root side is weakened as compared with the tip side.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the rigidity of the root side is weakened as compared with the tip side of the overhanging portion, so that the wobbling that occurs at the tip of the overhanging portion is caused by the overhanging portion. The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

Here, as a method of weakening the rigidity, a case where the overhanging portion is formed of a resin material having a partially different rigidity by two-color molding, a case where the thickness of the overhanging portion is partially changed, and the like are exemplified. ..

When the overhanging portion is formed in a thin thickness in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding moving direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

Further, when the root side of the overhanging portion is formed thinner than the tip end side, the wobbling on the tip end side of the overhanging portion is converted into a bending deformation with the root side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being horizontally moved in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides on the root side of the overhanging portion.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is axially supported by the outside of the liquid crystal display device and is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is arranged in the retracted position, the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

As a result, another moving member is arranged on the same layer as the layer on which the moving member is arranged, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the other moving member projects inward of the liquid crystal display device. It becomes possible to perform various productions in a limited space.

In addition, as a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by a rotating shaft, or a mode in which a protruding portion inserted into the elongated hole is provided and the protruding portion is guided through the elongated hole. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion is provided along the direction from the shaft support portion of the one end portion of the auxiliary member toward the other end portion in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5 characterized by having an extended contact portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member is provided with a contact portion, and the contact portion is a state in which the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the shaft branch of one end to the other end. Therefore, in a state where the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, it is possible to secure an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact with each other at the contact portion.

In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip portion of the hand portion, and the movement thereof is performed. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that as the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position between the overhanging portion and the auxiliary member moves toward the tip end side of the hand portion.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, an effect member is arranged at the hand portion of the overhanging portion, and as the moving member slides to the retracted position, the overhanging portion and the auxiliary member are connected. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand part. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the protrusion (extending distance) of the overhanging portion extending to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference. As a result, even if the tip end side of the overhanging portion wobbles due to the driving of the effecting member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobbling is small. As a result, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the moving member from wobbling in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkable.

In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is arranged below the moving member, and one end thereof is oscillatedly supported by the moving member, and the other end thereof is opposite to the moving member. The case where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is formed at the longitudinal direction and the direction connecting the other end of the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. However, the gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the longitudinal direction of the effect member is tilted in the horizontal direction.

Since the moving member is moved diagonally downward toward a predetermined position, the moving member is required to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. When placed in the retracted position, it is necessary to arrange the lower end of the effect member at a position raised from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the distance that the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward a predetermined position. rice field. Therefore, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, the lower part of the effecting member is wasted as a dead space.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is arranged below the moving member and the moving member is arranged in the retracted position as compared with the case where the effect member is arranged below the moving member. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effecting member is formed to be smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effecting member is formed. Take a horizontal tilted posture.

Therefore, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, even if the lower end of the effect member is placed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. The distance to be evacuated can be absorbed by the change in posture of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the effecting member from being wasted as a dead space when the moving member is arranged in the retracted position, and to form the effecting member as a large member longer in the longitudinal direction.

The gaming machine B7 includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member is said to move as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the members are arranged at the predetermined positions, the members take a posture tilted in the horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is in the horizontal direction when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connecting member while taking a tilted posture, the effect member is tilted horizontally as the auxiliary member is tilted horizontally. Can be made to.

Further, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member pivotally supported by the moving member, it is supported by a plurality of members, so that the force generated by driving the effect member can be exerted. It is possible to disperse and make the effect of suppressing wobbling of the effect member and the moving member remarkable.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the other end side of the effecting member.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the other end side of the effecting member, so that the weight of the effecting member effectively acts on the connecting member. Can be made to. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, a force is effectively applied to the auxiliary member in a direction in which the auxiliary member is tilted more, so that wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member and the effecting member connected to the auxiliary member.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine at a position where the effecting member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine at the position where the effecting member is pivotally supported by the moving member, so that the weight of the effecting member is heavy. It can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with the axial support position between the moving member and the effect member as a boundary.

Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be easily transmitted. It can cause wobbling. As a result, by driving the effect member, it is possible to perform an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member.

<Example of technical idea to suppress assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions overhanging in the same direction, a lid member abutting on an overhanging end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of reflective members whose portions are rotatably supported, and a light source that irradiates light toward at least one of the plurality of reflective members, and at least one of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of shaft support grooves are formed on the end surface of the overhanging end of the wall portion, and the reflective member is pivotally supported by being projected from the main body portion and the main body portion and fitted into the shaft support groove. The rotary shaft portion, which is composed of at least one rotary shaft portion and is fitted into the shaft support groove, is fitted from the open end of the plurality of shaft support grooves, and the open end of the shaft support groove is fitted into the lid member. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is pivotally supported by being closed.

Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable body that is axially supported at both ends and is formed so as to be able to change its posture in order to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are arranged, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the work of inserting the movable body into the hole in order to pivotally support the movable body and the subsequent work It is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body from the hole so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole as many as the number of movable bodies, and there is a problem that the assembly man-hours increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft support grooves are formed on the wall portion of the base member, the rotating shaft portion of the reflective member is fitted into the shaft support groove, and the open end of the shaft support groove is the lid member. By being closed by, a plurality of reflective members can be rotatably supported. By rotating these reflective members, the direction of the light emitted from the light source toward the reflective member can be changed.

Therefore, it is not necessary to insert the reflective member into the hole to support the shaft, and then attach parts (screws, retaining stoppers, etc.) to fix the reflective member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole. It is possible to prevent the assembly man-hours from increasing in proportion to the number of.

In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only on one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is formed in the other on the opposite side of the one, and the shaft portion of the reflective member is diagonally inserted into the hole. Later, when the reflective member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other side on one side is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other side on the other side, and the shaft thereof. An example is a case where the reflective member is fitted onto the pin and then the reflective member is tilted so that the shaft portion formed on the other side of the pin is fitted into the shaft support groove.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion.

Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member be formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end surface of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw becomes the thinness of the wall portion. It becomes the lower limit and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, so that the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is not limited and the wall portion is formed thin. can do.

In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflective member are combined to produce an effect. The effect of the production can be improved.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that pivotally support the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member is inserted into the shaft support hole formed in the lid member, so that the area for pivotally supporting the rotation shaft portion is set to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently secured by the area corresponding to the thickness corresponding to the shaft support of the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the formation length of the shaft support hole.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extension portion extending from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member is the extension portion. In a state where the fitting portion to be fitted to the setting portion is provided and the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is attached to the extension portion at least in a direction adjacent to the shaft support groove and the rotation. The gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is in contact with the axial direction of the shaft portion.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove. It is possible to easily align the wall portion in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove with the lid member.

Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, and the wall is formed. The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced by the lid member.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the axis of each of the pair of wall portions and the adjacent reflective member is closed by the main body portion of the pair of reflective members. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflective members are brought into contact with each other in the direction of rotation.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axes of the adjacent pair of reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Since it can be blocked by the main body of the slingshot, the light emitted from the light source can be shielded by a plurality of reflective members.

Further, in the closed state, since the surfaces of the pair of reflective members in the rotational direction are in contact with each other, the gap formed between the main bodies of the adjacent reflective members can be closed, and the gap between the reflective members can be closed. It is possible to suppress light leakage.

Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is completely opened, the player can visually recognize the entire emitted light. However, while the shutter member slides from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping with the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, it takes a long time for the player to visually recognize the entire light.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflective member suppresses the leakage of light in the closed state, and allows the light emitted to the player to pass by the rotation of the reflective member from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflective member can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the player can visually recognize the entire light in the case of rotating the reflective member as compared with the case of sliding the shutter member.

Further, since the ends of the reflective surface portions of the adjacent reflective members are formed so as to be in contact with each other, the deviation of the posture of the reflective members can be corrected by another reflective member. Therefore, even if there is a reflective member having a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflective members, the posture of the reflective member after rotation is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflective member. Therefore, the quality of the effect of the reflective member can be guaranteed.

In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member is characterized in that the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other are chamfered.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the contact portions of the facing surfaces of the reflective members are chamfered, so that the reflective members can be tilted more toward the adjacent reflective members. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflective members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces of a plurality of reflective members in the rotational direction, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the pattern at the boundary of the reflective members.

Examples of the chamfering method include a method of shaving on a curved surface (with an R) and a method of shaving on a flat surface.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflective members and a transmission member slidably moved by the drive device are provided, and the transmission member is the rotation. The plurality of reflective members are formed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and each of the plurality of reflective members has a transmitted portion abutted on the transmission member on at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the transmitted portion and the reflecting member are rotatably formed by sliding the transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in such a manner that the transmission member is slid and moved in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. The transmitted portion formed on each of the rotation shaft portions of the plurality of reflective members is brought into contact with the transmitted member. Here, by sliding the transmission member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflecting member is rotated in conjunction with the rotation, so that a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated by the sliding movement of one transmission member. ..

Examples of the transmission member include a belt and a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a columnar portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion.

In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion in which teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can be meshed with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion, and teeth formed in the rack gear portion of the transmission member so as to be meshable are formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid and moved, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflective members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, so that slippage between the transmission member and the reflective member can be prevented. Can be done. Therefore, a plurality of reflective members can be rotated synchronously.

In the gaming machine C8, it is formed on at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member with a width larger than the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that expanding teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmitting member is larger than the distance between the adjacent teeth. Since the expanding teeth formed with a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expanding teeth are engaged.

As a result, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even if the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member causes an abnormality, it is possible to prevent the reflection member rotated by the transmission member from over-rotating.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member with its own drive device>
It is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed so that the outer side and the inner side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be slid back and forth, and the inner side surface formed in the inner side of the display area in the moving direction. A pair of moving members formed in a positional relationship in which they can come into contact with each other, and a driving device for driving the pair of moving members, and a movable range of one of the pair of moving members. Interferes with the movable range of the other moving member, which is the opposite moving member of the one moving member, and by moving the one moving member, the other moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that by moving one moving member in the same direction, the other moving member is pushed forward and formed so as to be movable.

Here, a pair of accessories are moved from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and come into contact with each other to make the liquid crystal display device invisible. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-040413). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the movement of a pair of accessories is monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member, and the other moving member moves, so that the other moving member is movably formed. It is possible to form unexpected movements that are difficult to form only with a driving device that drives a moving member.

For example, when the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay due to the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, which causes monotony of the moving member. Therefore, as the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction. As a result, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form only by the driving device that drives the other moving member.

Further, since the pair of moving members can be moved without synchronizing the drive device for driving the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the drive device can be suppressed and the control load of the drive device can be reduced. ..

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction.

Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one of the moving members changes direction becomes larger by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when the moving member changes direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction, so that one of the moving members abuts in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. When the direction of the member is changed, the other moving member that moves upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction to change the direction of the one moving member. The required period can be shortened. The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and means a direction in which a slight horizontal component is allowed.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction.

When one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member in the process of moving and the other moving member moves in the same direction, the driving device of one moving member is a pair. Since the moving members are moved together, the burden on the drive device becomes large.

Here, when the pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the load on the drive device for driving the moving members arranged below becomes the burden on the driving device for driving the moving members arranged above. Compared to this, it becomes larger and there is a difference in the life of the drive device. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, and it becomes difficult to schedule maintenance as compared with the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable in a substantially horizontal direction, so that the difference in the load on the pair of driving devices is reduced. be able to.

That is, when the moving member is formed so as to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member is not subjected to the force due to gravity in the movable direction, so that the load on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, it is possible to match the replacement time for each drive device.

The direction of slide movement of the moving member does not have to match the horizontal direction, and the moving member can be tilted from the horizontal direction to the extent that it can stand still due to the frictional force with the driving device.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a base member on which the moving member is arranged is provided, and a shaft rod for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

Thereby, the shaft rod can be used as both a member for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable and a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

The gaming machine D4 includes a bogie portion that is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod and has a pair of wheel portions that are rotatably formed with respect to the shaft rod at at least both ends. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that it is fixed to at least one end of a moving member.

According to the gaming machine D5, the bogie portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the bogie portion has a wheel portion that can be rolled on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

Further, since a pair of wheel portions are arranged so as to sandwich the shaft rod and they are arranged at at least both ends of the bogie portion, the posture of the shaft rod and the bogie portion can be maintained constant.

In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other, the wheel portions arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other. As a result, the resistance applied to the wheel portion when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other can be increased, so that the impact when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other can be alleviated.

The pair of wheels to be abutted may be formed to have different diameters from each other. In this case, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased by sandwiching the wheel portion having a small diameter between the wheel portion having a large diameter and the shaft rod.

In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmission unit to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted, and is formed long in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft rod, and is formed in one of the longitudinal directions of the moving member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the transmission portion and the carriage portion are arranged at the end portion of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted is formed at one end of the trolley portion. Since the bogie portion is guided by the shaft rod and slid to move, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the drive device can be optimized.

That is, since the moving member is formed to be long, bending is likely to occur, and the bending occurs with one end on which the carriage portion guided by the shaft rod is arranged as a fulcrum. When the transmission portion is formed at the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of one end portion where the carriage portion is arranged, the position of the transmission portion is likely to change due to the bending of the moving member, and the transmission portion is easily moved. The engagement relationship between the transmission part of the member and the drive device is likely to be displaced. If the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device is deviated, the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides and moves becomes large, which is a problem.

On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end of the carriage portion, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at one end, and the moving member is formed. Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmission part of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides and moves can be suppressed.

As an embodiment of the transmission unit, for example, when a rotary gear is formed from the drive device side, a rack gear portion formed at one end thereof is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that contact between the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission portion side.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the deviation due to the bending of the moving members in the calculation of the contact positions of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D9 is characterized in that a contact between the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side of the transmission portion side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end on the opposite side of the transmitting portion, so that the transmitting portion is contacted when the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other. The impact on the side can be mitigated. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device due to the contact between the pair of moving members.

In the game machines D7 to D9, the moving member is extended in parallel with the direction in which the moving member slides, and the shaft rod is attached to the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end of the moving member. A pair of guide wall portions that are abutted from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the head, and the moving member is rotatably supported by the other end portion and is abutted against the guide wall portion. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, wherein the pair of rotating bodies is attached in a sliding direction of the moving member, and is rotated as the moving member is slid and moved.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion is extended parallel to the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported at the other end of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

Here, when the moving member bends and vibrates greatly with one end as a fulcrum due to a sudden stop of the moving member, among the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member, the moving member The rotating body on the opposite side of the bending direction is pressed against the guide wall portion. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the bending vibration of the moving member, it is possible to easily suppress the bending vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed by a free end. ..

Further, since the rotating body and the guide wall portion are smoothly in contact with each other when the moving member is started, the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall portion and the moving member when the moving member is started can be suppressed.

As an example of the mode of contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion, and a gear meshed with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on the side surface of the rotating body. Will be done.

In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes a gear-shaped tooth portion engraved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion. ..

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

A gaming machine provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members in any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined by the detection result of the detection device. D12.

Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by an electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the instability of the voltage of the electric motor. As a result, the pair of moving members may collide at an unexpected speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members is provided, and the detection result of the detection device is used. Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding with each other at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted by the detection result of the detection device that can detect the position and speed of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other, and most of the pair of moving members are in the event of a collision. A constant velocity state can be formed. This makes it possible to soften the impact of a pair of moving members at the time of collision.

<Characteristic E group> (Distracts attention from V-certain attacker when V-probable operation)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. In a gaming machine having a variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter, the variable winning means is a predetermined condition. An opening / closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which a game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, a ball entry detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, and a ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area. And, when the privilege state giving means which grants the privilege state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection means, and at least the opening and closing means are operated, it is predetermined. The gaming machine E1 characterized by having an effect executing means for producing the effect of the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the identification information indicating that the lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. In the variable winning means, the opening / closing means opens and closes a specific area in which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the detection by the ball entry detection means that the game ball has entered the specific area, the privilege state granting means grants the privilege state that is advantageous to the player. Further, at least when the opening / closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. As a result, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of incongruity of the game can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the effect executing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the player's attention can be distracted from the opening / closing means.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect executing means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, a notification mode indicating that the hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as an effect is notified by the effect executing means, so that the opening / closing means can be used. There is an effect that the movement can be made difficult for the player to discriminate.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the effect executing means is executed at least over a period from before a predetermined period during which the opening / closing means is operated to a period during which the opening / closing means is operated.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the effect executing means is executed over a period from before the predetermined period in which the opening / closing means is operated to the period in which the opening / closing means is operated. There is an effect that the operation of the opening / closing means can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means has an opening through which the gaming ball can enter, a state in which the opening is closed and the gaming ball is difficult to enter, and an opening in the open state. The opening / closing means has a regulating member that can be changed to a possible state, and the opening / closing means has a short opening time shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to flow down from the opening to the specific region, and the opening to the opening. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that either one of a long opening time longer than the time required for the gaming ball to flow down to a specific area is executed based on a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, the variable winning means is provided with an opening through which the game ball can enter, and a regulating member that changes the opening between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball can enter. Then, either a short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or a long opening time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The opening / closing means is executed based on a predetermined condition on either side. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not the game ball is inserted into the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

In the gaming machine E5, a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state based on the lottery as the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the lottery means. It has a type determining means for determining the type of the special game when it is drawn as a specific lottery result, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it determines either the short opening time or the long opening time.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state is executed by the special game executing means based on the fact that the lottery means has drawn a specific lottery result, the special game is performed by the type determining means. The type is determined. Then, in the opening / closing means, either the short opening time or the long opening time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be easily changed depending on the type of privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic F group> (One attacker forms a V-probable route)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a specific lottery result. When is displayed, the variable winning means that can be changed from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter, and the probability that the lottery means draws the predetermined lottery result are normally set. In a gaming machine having a probability setting means for setting either a normal probability or a special probability which is a higher probability than the normal probability, the variable winning means enters a ball when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass, a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific area. The probability setting means has a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the opening to either one of the regions, and the probability setting means is subject to the condition that the game balls have passed through the first specific region. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it sets a probability.

According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When the display means displays identification information indicating that the result is a specific lottery, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. Then, either the normal probability at the normal time or the special probability which is a higher probability than the normal probability is set for the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means by the probability setting means. In the variable winning means, the game ball is distributed to either the first specific area through which the game ball that has been opened and entered into the opening can pass or the second specific area different from the first specific area. Is sorted. Further, in the probability setting means, a special probability is set on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special probability is set by the variable winning means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the gaming machine F1, a special game that facilitates the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has a special game executing means to be executed, and a type determining means for determining the type of the special game to be executed by the special game executing means when a lottery is performed with the specific lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means in either the first state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2 characterized by having a distribution setting means set within the period of the special game of 1 above.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game execution means executes a special game that makes it easy for the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. To. Then, when a lottery result is drawn with a specific lottery result by the lottery means, the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means is determined by the type determination means. Further, either the first state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second specific area is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of 1 special game. As a result, the distribution means can be controlled according to the type of the special game determined by the type determination means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be controlled more simply.

In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time, which is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, as the second state from the open state. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that a second time, which is longer than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific region from the opening, is set as the first state from the open state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, in the distribution setting means, the first time, which is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is the second state. The second time, which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not to set a special probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the sorting means is The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which a gaming ball is distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined opening state among the plurality of open states.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distribution means is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which the game ball is distributed to the second specific area in the predetermined open state among the plurality of open states. This makes it possible for the player to expect the game ball to be distributed to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the passage of the gaming balls through the first specific area or the second specific area. The gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the fact that the gaming balls pass through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since it is paid out by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic G group> (long press production)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation thereof. A signal output means for outputting an operation signal based on the operation of the means, a determination means for determining whether or not the operation signal output by the signal output means is received, and the operation signal by the determination means. It is characterized by having an effect variable means for varying the effect executed by the effect executing means based on a release timing in which it is determined that the operation signal has not been received after it is determined to have been received. The gaming machine G1.

According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the lottery means to be executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, it is determined that the operation signal output by the signal output means has not received the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been received by the determination means. Based on the release timing, the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed by the effect variable means. As a result, the effect can be varied in various ways by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the effect variable means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and if it is within the allowable period, it is more than if it is outside the allowable period. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it can be varied to produce an effect that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, when the effect variable means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period, it is more than when it is out of the allowable period. Since it is variable to the effect that is advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the gaming machine G1 or G2 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the permissible period when it is determined by the discriminating means that the operation signal is received. ..

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined by the discriminating means that the operation signal is being received, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notifying means. It has the effect of allowing a person to play a game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies in a special notification mode that the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characterized gaming machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, in the notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the lottery result and play the game according to the notification mode.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect variable means receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determination means receives the operation signal. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the effect is changed when it disappears.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, in the effect variable means, the operation signal is continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the discriminating means receives the operation signal. After that, when it is determined that the operation signal is no longer received, the effect is changed, so that there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed more.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
The effect is based on a display means for displaying the effect of the game, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and a determination result by the operation determination means. It is advantageous for the player based on the effect variable means for varying the effect, the effect setting means for setting the effect content variable by the effect variable means according to the timing of operating the operation means, and the operation of the operation means. A period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect content is set and a second period in which the effect content that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set, and the first period and the first period. The first notification mode for discriminatingly notifying the two periods and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode are at least the same. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying during a period.

According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect variable means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect content variable by the effect variable means is set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. Is set by at least the period setting means. The first notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. Is notified by the notification means at least in the same period. As a result, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period setting means sets a plurality of the first period within an effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effective.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, a plurality of first periods are set in the period setting means within the valid period in which the operation of the operating means is effective, so that the operation is performed in the first period. It has the effect of being easy to configure.

In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode is characterized in that the symbol is variably displayed for the transition of the period according to a predetermined rule, and the current period set is notified. H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with a variable symbol according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode is to change and notify the transition of the period based on a randomly set rule.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified by changing the symbol based on the randomly set rule. It has the effect of being able to provide a wide variety of effects to people.

<Feature I group> (Overflow control)
Based on the entry port where the game ball can enter, the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. A lottery means for drawing when the lottery conditions are satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the like. A player when the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result are displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, a storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a ball entrance. A ball entry variable means that changes between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a ball entry variable means in which the ball entry variable means is normally in the first state. In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state which is more easily changed than a state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the dynamic display mode determining means is stored in the storage means. Based on the number of the information, the dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed, and when the special state is set, at least in the storage means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period when the stored information is not more than a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are obtained. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means in which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Further, the first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are changed by the ball entry variable means. Then, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a special state that is more likely to be changed to the first state than the normal state at the normal time is set by the state setting means. Further, in the dynamic display mode determining means, the dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed based on the number of information stored in the storage means, and the special state is determined. When set, at least when the amount of information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number or less, the establishment of the lottery condition is delayed by the delay means for a predetermined period. As a result, since it is delayed by the delay means, it can be configured so that the dynamic display period is determined in a state where a large amount of information is stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine I1, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number, the dynamic display mode determining means sets a dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period from the set number. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than when many are stored.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means stores more information than the set number when the number of information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number. Since it is easier to determine the dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display period is longer than in the case of the above, there is an effect that the period in which the dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delaying means delays a period longer than the period in which the ball entry variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. ..

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means is delayed for a longer period than the period in which the ball entry variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined with a large amount of information stored.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball entry variable means is changed to the first state, a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls in which the information is stored in the storage means can be entered. The gaming machine I4, which is maintained in the first state below.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, in the ball-entry variable means, when the ball is changed to the first state, information is stored in the storage means in a predetermined number or less. Since the ball is maintained in the first state within the period during which the ball can enter, there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

<Characteristic J group> (Hidden shaking fluctuation)
The lottery means for executing the lottery, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result are displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is dynamically determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The display mode includes, as the dynamic display of the lottery result, a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again, and the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode is included. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a static symbol display means for displaying a static symbol on the front side of the identification symbol when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped.

According to the gaming machine J1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means in which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Then, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The identification information indicates the lottery result by the lottery means by the combination of a plurality of identification symbols. Further, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, as the dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, there is a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. When the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode, the static symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means. As a result, the temporarily stopped identification symbol can be made to appear as if it has been fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by changing the display position slightly periodically.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed, so that the identification symbol is temporarily stopped. It has the effect of being able to inform you in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machines J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the identification symbol starts dynamic display again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the identification symbol can be easily seen by the player.

A gaming machine J4, wherein in any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, so that there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of 1 based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the pseudo continuous display mode is the pseudo-continuous display mode. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is set so as to be easily determined when it is the specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are played. That is, in the dynamic display mode determining means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Further, in the pseudo continuous display mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is set so as to be easily determined when it is a specific lottery result, so that the player can expect a specific lottery result by the pseudo continuous display mode. effective.

<Characteristic K group> (If the winning rate of the Fuden chucker and the attacker is the same and the attackers are narrowed down, the Fuden winning will be higher)
A ball entry variable means that can be changed into a ball entry port where a game can enter, a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game ball at the entrance, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a lottery means thereof. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the result is a specific lottery, the opening through which the game ball can enter. And an opening variable means for changing the opening into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game executing means determines the variable means in the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the ball entry port enter the opening when the opening is in the closed state and the ball entry port is in the first state. The game machine K1 is characterized in that the game balls are arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter the ball entrance.

According to the game machine K1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the information of the acquisition means acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. The first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are varied by the ball entry variable means. The opening is varied by the opening variable means that changes the open state in which the game ball can enter and the difficult closed state, and in the privilege game execution means, the variable means is changed to the open state for a predetermined period. Further, when the opening is closed and the entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening is likely to enter the entrance. Placed in each position. As a result, the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the gaming ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and the game is played toward the entrance side. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that it is configured to guide a ball.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the gaming ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and entered. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, the game ball can be easily configured to enter the ball, which has the effect of improving the efficiency of the game.

The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine K2 is provided with a guiding means for guiding the gaming ball from the wall member to the entrance.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be more efficiently entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a launching means for launching the gaming ball into the gaming area, and
It has a launching force adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the gaming ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the gaming area has the gaming ball launched by the launching means. At least a first region in which the ball can flow down and a second region different from the first region are formed, and the opening is a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down in the second region can enter. The ball entry port is characterized in that the game ball flowing down either the first region and the second region is arranged at a position where the ball can enter in common. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the firing force adjusting means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine K4, a special entrance for the game ball that has flowed down the second area and a privilege for giving a privilege to the player when the game ball enters the special entrance. The means and the first setting state in which the game ball flowing down the second region is easily guided to the opening and is difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and the first setting state is difficult to be guided to the opening and is difficult to be guided to the special entrance. The gaming machine K5 is characterized by having a setting means that can be set to either a second setting state that is easy to be guided.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the state of the game can be changed, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the setting means is configured to be able to be set from the outside of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, the setting can be changed by the setting means, and there is an effect that the taste of the game can be adjusted.

In any of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second region is likely to be guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the entrance side, and is difficult to be guided to the opening. The gaming machine K7 is characterized by having an adjusting means capable of being adjusted to a second adjusting state that is easily guided to the ball entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that the gambling of the game can be adjusted by adjusting by the adjusting means.

<Characteristic L group> (loop twice with V attacker)
A first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a second ball entry means that can be changed from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and a first entry means thereof. Based on the first determination means that makes a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the means and the determination result of the first determination means as the first determination result, the second entry means is the second. The special state setting means for setting a special state that is easily changed to the state, the second determination means for making a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, and the determination result of the second determination means. In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entry means capable of entering the ball, the specific area through which the game ball entered into the third entry means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above, and a right storage means capable of memorizing at least two rights for the determination to be executed by the second determination means by the special state setting means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a determination means for determining whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the determination result of the second determination means.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player.

Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game.

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that it hits twice once it rushes into a certain change, and other game characteristics are the same as those of the conventional gaming machine, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. rice field.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a predetermined first determination result is selected by the first determination means, thereby providing a special state in which the determination by the second determination means is easily received, and further, the second determination means. After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by, the judgment by the second judgment means is executed after having an interesting game property that a big hit is given for the first time by passing the game ball through a specific area. By memorizing the right to do so, even if the special state is once changed to the normal state, the memorized second determination means can execute the determination. Therefore, when the game state is far from the big hit (shift from the special state to the normal state), at least the chance of the big hit is given again, so that the player can enjoy while expecting the big hit until the end. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the second ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means, and during at least a part of the period during which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means. , The gaming machine L2 characterized in that it is variable to the first state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine L1, in order to ensure that the determination by the second determination means is performed in the special state, the control is performed to put the second ball entry means into the second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. The problem that the second ball-entry means in the state hinders the entry into the third ball-entry means has emerged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second entering means is closed (retracted) during the period when the third entering means can enter the ball. , The effect is that the ball can be smoothly entered into the third ball entry means without being hindered.

In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entry means to the second state and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means can be dynamically displayed. The display means has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is set to the special state. Based on this, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is easily determined until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The above-mentioned gaming machine L2 has made it possible to smoothly enter the gaming ball into the third entry means, but in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, in addition to that, the second special during the special state. At the same time, a configuration for securing the reserved memory of the symbol had to be achieved.

On the other hand, the gaming machine L3 has a control for setting the period of dynamic display for changing the second ball entry means to the second state to be shorter than the normal state in the special state.

By this control, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, opening of the third ball entry means, elapse of a predetermined time, entry of a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entry means, reaching the upper limit of the reserved memory, etc.). Until is satisfied, the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be prioritized, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the entry of the game ball into the third entry means can be prioritized. Therefore, it has the effect of being able to play the game smoothly.

In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entry means to the second state and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means can be dynamically displayed. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the means, the dynamic display period determining means, and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means have elapsed, and the above-mentioned When the identification information indicating the determination result of changing to the second state is displayed, the variable control means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state is provided, and the variable control means is said to have the same. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the second ball entry means is changed to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

In the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for changing the second ball entry means as the second state for a long period of time until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as that of the machine L3 can be obtained.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied before the third ball entering means can enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to surely satisfy a predetermined condition before the third entering means can enter the ball, so that the third entry means can be achieved. The ball can be smoothly entered into the means.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means thereof. It has a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and the second dynamic display period determining means is at least the first time since the special state is set. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set for the dynamic display of the machine.

The above-mentioned gaming machine L5 enables smooth gaming for entering the third ball entry means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determination means can be stored in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determination means in the special state can be stored. Depending on the timing, a new problem has emerged in which at least two rights to execute the judgment by the second judgment means cannot be memorized. That is, if a jackpot based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second entry means is set to the second state as the determination result of the third determination means in the special state, the special game is the first. 2 There arises a problem that the ball entry means is terminated before the second state is reached, and the right to newly execute the determination by the second determination means cannot be stored.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first second dynamic display (second dynamic display) after the special game (short-time game) is started. 2 Since the period of the special symbol variation display) is set longer than the dynamic display (normal symbol variation display) time, the dynamic display is completed by the end of the first second dynamic display, and the second dynamic display is completed. 2 The ball entry means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problem and secure the characteristic playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

In the game machines L1 to L6, the third ball entry means is a game machine L7, wherein the game ball passes through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of the game balls enter.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by the immediate end of the third ball entry means and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine L7, the third ball entry means is such that when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter in the state of 1 in which the ball can be entered, the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine L8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by the immediate end of the third ball entry means and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball-entry means has a regulating means for restricting the passage of the gaming ball to the specific area and the restricting means for restricting the ball from entering the predetermined number of gaming balls. The gaming machine L9 is characterized by having a variable means for varying the release state so that the gaming ball can pass through a specific area.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number of gaming balls entered into the third entering means reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the situation where the player is awakened because it ends immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the gaming ball is restricted from entering the specific area. Based on the variable control means for varying the variable member and the determination result of the first determination means, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means, and the first determination means makes it possible to enter the ball. When it is determined as the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member so as to change the variable member to the restricted state for a period during which the ball can enter the third ball entry means. When the second determination means determines that the second determination result is obtained, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the gaming ball can enter the specific region. The gaming machine L10 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means even when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determination means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the ball is entered into the third ball entry means by any of the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. Characterized gaming machine L11.

According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, it is determined whether or not to set a special state when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the previous game by understanding that the third ball entry means can enter the ball and that there is a possibility of a special state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the second determination result or the determination result that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state in which the determination by the second determination means is performed is itself advantageous to the player, and is therefore very interesting. A gaming machine can be provided.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the gaming machine L13 is characterized in that the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game even based on the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the privileged game is executed even in the first determination result, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in interest.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means allows the game ball to enter a fourth ball entry means different from the third entry means as the privilege game. Characterized gaming machine L14.

According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, and the gaming toward the four ball-entry means. Since the game of firing a ball is performed, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball-entry means has a ball-entry portion where the game ball can enter and a guidance position where the game ball can be guided to enter the ball-entry portion. The gaming machine L15 is characterized by having a guiding member that can be changed to a non-inducing position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry portion.

In order to utilize the playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a problem that the first state is difficult to enter and the second state is easy to enter in the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, a guiding member is provided in the second ball entry means, and the guiding member can be changed between a guided position and a non-guided position. By doing so, the first state makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the second state makes it easy to enter the ball, which has the effect of making it possible to utilize the playability of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine L15, the guiding member has a first region in which a falling gaming ball can be received and a second region in which a gaming ball rolling from the first region can roll to the entry portion. The gaming machine L16 having the above, wherein the gaming ball rolled into the second region is configured to be able to enter the entry portion.

According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is composed of a first region and a second region, and the guiding member can enter the ball entering portion from the second region. Even if the ball entry section is provided at a position where it is difficult for the gaming ball falling from the gaming board to enter the ball in the non-guidance position, the ball entry section is allowed to enter the ball entry section when the guiding member is in the guidance position. It can be facilitated and has the effect that the playability of this gaming machine can be utilized.

In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guiding member is in the second state for a period longer than the rolling period required for the gaming ball received in the first region to enter the ball entry portion. The gaming machine L17 is characterized in that it is variable to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period when the special state is not set.

According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L16, the game ball on the guiding member enters the period during which the guiding member is changed from the non-inducing position to the guiding position when a special state is set. Since it is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the ball and a period during which it is difficult for the gaming ball on the guiding member to enter the ball entry section when a special state is not set. It has the effect of making it possible to utilize the playability.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the second identification means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second identification means by the second dynamic display means. A privilege from the determination result of the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period in which the information is dynamically displayed and the determination result of the second determination means to the execution of the privilege game. The second dynamic display period determining means includes a privileged pre-game executing means for executing the pre-game, and the second dynamic display period determining means is the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. And the total of the period of the pre-privilege game is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. It is something to do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by this.

In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not immediately provided, but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through a specific area. .. In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, there is a problem that the player wants to have expectations as much as possible just before the jackpot game is provided. Ascended. That is, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means is displayed before the privilege pre-game based on the second determination result is executed. There was a problem that the player would recognize it and the interest in the game would be poor while the pre-privilege game was being executed.

According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, and before the privilege. The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result to the provision of the jackpot game, and the determination result of the second determination means are the second determination results. The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result (other than the second determination result) of the second determination means. By making the above equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing when the pre-privilege game ends, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means is provided, and the predetermined determination result is the said. The gaming machine L19, characterized in that the determination result of the second determination means is the determination result of executing the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L18, it is possible to display the jackpot based on the determination by the second determination means at the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display until the end. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By differentiating the privilege given to the player between the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L19 includes an effect executing means for executing an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying an effect executed by the effect executing means. The effect executing means displays the second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result and the privilege pre-game effect corresponding to the privilege pre-game on the display body, and the second privilege game is executed. When displaying an effect corresponding to the determination result to be performed on the display body, the gaming machine L20 is characterized in that at least a part of the second determination result effect is used.

Generally, in a gaming machine, an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations is executed by using a display body (for example, a liquid crystal display) so that the player can grasp it. Then, the player is happy and depressed while grasping the content of the effect display displayed on the display body. Even in a gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a demand for an effect display suitable for playability.

According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L19, a part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game is executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. By using it for the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed only by a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content displayed to the player. It has the effect of making it possible to make people interested in all of the games and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L20, in the second determination result effect, the corresponding second determination result dynamic display effect and the second identification information are confirmed and displayed while the second identification information is dynamically displayed. It is composed of a second determination result dynamic display confirmation effect corresponding to the above, and when the effect execution means executes an effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second privilege game is executed, it is part of the effect. At least, the gaming machine L21 characterized in that the effect during dynamic display of the second determination result is used.

According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L20, when the effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second privilege game is executed is executed, the effect during the dynamic display of the second determination result is partially displayed. By using this, a common effect will be performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player can use only the start part of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether the privileged game will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all the production contents displayed to the player, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. be. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege gaming effect includes a pre-privilege gaming effect corresponding to while the pre-privilege game is being performed, and a privileged game confirmation effect corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the specific area. When the effect corresponding to the determination result of executing the second privilege game is executed by the effect execution means, at least the effect during the pre-game game is used as a part of the effect. Gaming machine L22.

According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L21, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the effect during the pre-privilege game is used as a part of the effect. As a result, a common effect is performed at the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can play either privilege game only in the final stage part of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether or not it will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all the production contents displayed to the player, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect executing means has the first notification effect for notifying that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means. The second notification effect for notifying that the second privilege game is the determination result to be executed is executed, and after the effect execution means executes the effect, the first notification effect or the second notification effect is executed. The gaming machine L23 characterized in that the timings for executing and are the same.

According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timing at which the effect of notifying the determination result of the second determination means is displayed is the same, so that the player grasps the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being played and to improve the interest of the game.

By providing two or all of the configurations of the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be achieved.

<Characteristic M group> (Performs a latent effect during Let's Mambo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination is executed based on the acquisition means for acquiring information, the information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the information storage means. The determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when is displayed, a pre-determination means for determining information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means, and the specific effect determining means thereof. From the discriminating means for determining whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied for the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, and the information determined by the discriminating means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Also has a specific effect regulating means for restricting the execution of the specific effect with respect to the information stored later and stored before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine M1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only makes the player interested in the jackpot, and has a problem that the interest of the game is lowered for the variable display which is out of the question. There was a need to further improve the interest in games.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute a specific effect by dynamically displaying the information already stored in the information storage means. With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, it is determined by the determining means whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specific to the information stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied and before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect. The execution of the production is regulated by the specific production regulation means.

As a result, among the information for which a specific effect is determined, the execution of the specific effect is restricted for the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the specific effect is continuous. After making the effect to be executed seem to be finished, the specific effect can be executed again. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode of 1 is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. It is determined that the discriminating means has means, and when it is determined that the information is such that a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When it is determined that the information is such that a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, it is determined by the determining means that a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, by displaying a specific dynamic display mode, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that a specific effect has been completed.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determining means determines the execution of the specific effect based on the determination that the information is the information for which the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior determination means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the execution of a specific effect is a specific effect based on the fact that the information is determined by the pre-determination means to determine a specific dynamic display mode. Since it is determined by the deciding means, the player is made to recognize at an early stage that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by any fluctuation of the continuous hold when the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

When it is determined by the specific effect determining means to execute the specific effect in any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the execution of the specific effect is started with respect to the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 having a start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when it is determined by the specific effect determining means to execute a specific effect, the information already stored is stored. Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed can be randomized to provide the player with various effects. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect is determined. Among the information stored before the trigger information, the information stored continuously a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, the gaming machine M5, which regulates the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Of the information stored before the information that triggered the decision to execute a specific effect, the information stored after the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is continuously stored a predetermined number of times. Since the specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means for the information stored in the machine, the specific effect is regulated a number of times in a row, and the player can expect that the specific effect is executed again. There is an effect.

The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine M5, the specific effect regulating means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, a predetermined number of times is determined by a specific regulating means by lottery, so that the number of times that a specific effect is regulated can be randomized, and the interest of the player is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

One of the gaming machines M1 to M6 is characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect with respect to the dynamic display for the information whose specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means. Gaming machine M7.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggestion effect suggests a dynamic display for information whose specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means. Since it is executed by the execution means, there is an effect that the player can have the expectation that the specific effect is continued by the suggestion effect.

<Characteristic N group> (The number of latent times after Let's Mambo is determined by the number of holdings at the start of Let's Mambo execution)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination is executed based on the acquisition means for acquiring information, the information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the information storage means. The determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed, and
Before the second condition is satisfied, the information is already stored in the information storage means based on the pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the information storage means and the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. When the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means that determines the execution of the continuous effect that executes a specific effect each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed with respect to the information being performed, and the effect determining means. Suggested for the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information. A gaming machine N1 having a suggestion effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only makes the player interested in the jackpot, and has a problem that the interest of the game is lowered for the variable display which is out of the question. There was a need to further improve the interest in games.

According to the gaming machine N1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect each time the dynamic display of identification information is executed for the information already stored in the information storage means based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. Is determined by the production determining means. The movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous effect by the effect determining means. Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect for the target display is determined by the suggestion effect determination means. As a result, since the suggestion effect is executed even after the continuous effect is completed, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous production seem to be more than the actual number of consecutive times, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. The effect determining means has the determining means, and when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the continuous The gaming machine N2 characterized in that it is determined to execute the production.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the prior determination means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the specific motion is performed. The target display mode is performed, and there is an effect that it is possible to recognize at an early stage that a specific dynamic display mode is executed by starting the continuous effect.

The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is an effect that is executed even during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is executed even during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect. There is an effect that the player can expect.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3 has a number-of-number determination means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery when the suggestion effect-determining means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed. N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion effect determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestion effect is performed can be randomized, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
65 First variable winning means (variable winning means)
81 Display means S1520 Operation determination means S3030 Part of effect setting means S3032 Part of period setting means and notification means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

On a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine , a lottery is executed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and a symbol showing the lottery result is dynamically displayed on the display means. In the dynamic display showing the lottery result of 1, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the symbol is temporarily stopped and the dynamic display is started again.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-39747

However, such a gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the production is lowered when the pachinko machine is temporarily stopped.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a determination means for executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means, and the identification on the display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a display means for showing a specific determination result. When the identification information is displayed, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the identification information is the determination means in a combination display mode by combining a plurality of identification symbols. In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the identification symbol is swung by the combination display mode as the dynamic display of the determination result of 1. It includes a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the pachinko machine is temporarily stopped in a state of being temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. When stopped, a predetermined stationary symbol having no identification information is placed in the dynamic display of the determination result of 1 above so as to overlap the front side of each of the identification symbols temporarily stopped in the combination display mode. It has a stationary symbol display means for displaying in a mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. The dynamic display means for determining the dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result to the display means are displayed. The identification information has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the identification information indicates a determination result by the determination means in a combination display mode by combining a plurality of identification symbols. In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in a state of being swung by the combination display mode as the dynamic display of the determination result of 1. This includes a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the pachinko and pachislot machines are dynamically displayed again, and the gaming machine is such that when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination display mode in the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode. , The pseudo-continuous motion of a predetermined stationary symbol having no identification information so as to overlap the front side of each of the identification symbols temporarily stopped in the combination display mode within the dynamic display of the determination result of the above 1. It has a stationary symbol display means for displaying in a mode corresponding to the number of times the target display mode is executed.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that reduces the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the swinging operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the rocking operation unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swinging operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st slide operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. 26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a reversing operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of FIG. 31 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 32 (b). ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit on the XXXIIc-XXXIIc line, and FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit on the XXXIId-XXXIId line of FIG. 32 (b). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear, the transmission device and the L-shaped lever in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device and an L-shaped lever. (A) and (b) are front views of the rocking operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is the inside of the main control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of ROM of, and (c) is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of RAM in the main control device in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. (A) to (b) are examples of the notification modes displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are examples of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are examples of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the long press effect process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the capture effect lottery table. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes of the capture effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes of the temporary stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process executed by the MPU in the display apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the 5th control example. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the V winning apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a jackpot determination in the first random number counter C1 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the value, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the fifth control example and the jackpot determination value in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the fifth control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the jackpot type in the above, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the jackpot type in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the small hit type counter C5 in the fifth control example and the small in the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the hit type, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in the second special symbol. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of disconnection (normal) in the fifth control example. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in the time saving in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the 5th control example. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of the jackpot based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control. It is a time chart showing from the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening in the example to the occurrence of a big hit by a special symbol. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 2 unvariable state among the special figure 2 gaming states, (b). Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 variable state among the special figure 2 gaming states. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a small hit game state in the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is the second. 5 A schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example, in which a jackpot based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch is generated in the special figure 2 game state. Is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state at the start of a big hit among the special figure 2 gaming states, (b). Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that the time-saving game is given after the big hit in the special figure 2 game state. c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, of the special figure 2 gaming states, the state shifts to the special figure 1 gaming state after the big hit. It is a figure. (A) is a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125 (b), and is a schematic diagram showing that the jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the state where the jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is the timing of FIG. 125 (b). It is a display screen which is displayed, and is the schematic diagram which showed the state departure with a jackpot C in hold. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a 3V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2V effect command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display device in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the modification example in the 5th control example. It is a perspective enlarged view of the detour member in the sixth control example. It is a rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which made the flow path opening device in the sixth control example perspective perspective. FIGS. (A) to (C) in the seventh control example are schematic views schematically showing an execution system of continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the seventh control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram at the time of deviation (normal) in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in the above, and (c) is the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous chance number table at the time of hit in the seventh control example, and (b) shows the contents of the continuous chance number table at the time of loss in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the latent number lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 8th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the first type table in the eighth control example schematically. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 8th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. It is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the external output processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 9th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a wind turbine (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown). (Not shown), rail 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start It is configured by assembling a mouth (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball that flows down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is used. Since it is easy to win a prize, a ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and a normal symbol start opening (through gate). ) 67 is passed to open the electric accessory, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340,464,560 and drive motors 441,771,772,773,774.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200 with the disassembled operating unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is open on one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 200, a swing operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reverse operation unit 500, a decorative operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, respectively. It is configured as a unit.

Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in a manner surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the second slide operation unit 700, a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversal operation unit 500, and the decorative unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. It is disposed and housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, another operating unit (for example, the first slide operating unit 400) is laminated on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the second slide operating unit 700). Since it is arranged, the predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit in the front view.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light transmissive material and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation mode of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 8, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 are arranged at the overhanging positions, and in FIG. 9, the tilt member 460 and the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 (FIG. 22). (See) is shown in the overhanging position, and FIG. 10 shows the state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are placed in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swinging operation unit 300 swings to an arm member 320 whose base end side is pivotally supported so as to swing, and to the swinging end side which is the opposite side of the base end side of the arm member 320. It is provided with an upright member 330 that can be pivotally supported, and these arm members 320 and the upright member 330 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted and the standing member 330 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ..

As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 is shaken by a hanging member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slid diagonally downward and a bending arm portion 433 (see FIG. 22) of the hanging member 430. It is provided with a tilting member 460 that is movably supported by an axis, and these suspension members 430 and tilting member 460 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspending member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhanging position shown in FIG. 9, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the end in the sliding direction (left), and the tilting member 460 is located in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of each slide member 720, 740 formed so as to be slidable, and the slide members 720, 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It is operated between the position and the overhang position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right outside the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are vertically and vertically the opening 211a of the rear case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhanging position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the "heart" can be visually recognized from the front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging.

As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflective member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the reflective member 520 is formed so that the surface visible to the player can be inverted (turned over). Rectangle. The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member that projects to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400, 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated on the left side (see FIG. 5) of the opening 211a of the rear case 210.

Since each of these operating units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and is arranged in a stacked state as described above, the operating units 300 to 700 are among the operating units 300 to 700. With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operating units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operating units 300 to 600 and the second slide operating unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

FIG. 11 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are displayed. There is a gap of 700 minutes between the second slide operation unit and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging positions, so that the player The gaps seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the rocking operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the rocking operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 There is a gap of 700 minutes for the second slide operation unit. Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging positions, so that the player can play. The gaps seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

The swinging operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are front perspective views of the swinging operation unit 300. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 is swung around the swinging shaft 312, and the posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swinging (tension). The more you go to the position, the more you stand up). Next, the overall configuration of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swinging operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 whose base end side is pivotally supported by the base member 310, and an arm member 320 thereof. The upright member 330 internally fitted and pivotally supported on the swinging end side, which is the opposite end on the base end side, and the drive device arranged on the back surface of the lower right portion of the base member 310 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14). The 340, the transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and connected to the arm member 320, the torsion spring 360 that applies a urging force to the arm member 320, and the lower right front view of the base member 310. It is mainly provided with a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the.

The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swinging operation unit 300, and is fixed to a fitting hole 311 formed in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311 thereof. A cylindrical swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311 and a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole. A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with 311, is formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14), and is bent to the left and right opposite to the guide hole 315. It is provided with an upright hole 316, which is an elongated hole that is extended, and a hook portion 317 that is projected in a hook shape on the front side on the right side of the front view of the fitting hole 311.

The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swinging operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and has a main body portion 321 formed in the shape of a long plate and a main body portion 321 thereof. A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321 and a sliding ring portion 323 opened on the swinging end side of the main body portion 321 in the same direction as the tubular portion 322. A plate-shaped front portion 324 that is raised and arranged on the front side of the main body portion 321 and an elongated hole-shaped release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322, and the main body. A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back surface side of the portion 321 and projecting toward the base member 310, and projecting toward the front side on the left side of the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14). It is provided with a projecting portion 327.

The tubular portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung around the tubular portion 322 pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that internally supports the upright member 330. It is formed with a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the upright member 330.

The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in a state where a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321 and the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the portion on the overhanging end side of the upright member 330 is the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion. It is housed in the gap between it and 321 (see FIG. 16).

The release hole 325 is a long hole connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and has an action of restricting the swing of the arm member 320 by the positional relationship between the transmission device 350, the tubular portion 322, and the release hole 325. This is a hole that causes the above, but the details will be described later.

Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 are slid into the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. It suppresses rattling of the arm member 320 and stabilizes the swing of the arm member 320. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off from the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made to.

The projecting portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and is a portion to which the urging force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

The upright member 330 is a member arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the ascending direction, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 331 and its main body portion. An overhanging ring portion 332 protruding from the back surface side of the 331 in a large diameter ring shape, a changing sliding portion 333 projecting to the back surface side at the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the overhanging ring portion 332. It is provided with a retaining portion 334 which is formed in the shape of a disk and is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

The main body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

The overhanging ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, in the upright member 330, the outer surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding ring portion 323 over a wide area (large area) and is pivotally supported so as to be swingable. Therefore, even when the large upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the upright member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320.

The changing sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the standing hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the standing member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, and the details will be described later. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, it is possible to prevent the changing sliding portion 333 from falling off from the upright hole 316 and to swing the arm member 320. Can be stabilized.

The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330, and is the back surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. It is abutted to the side. Therefore, the erecting member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

The drive device 340 is a motor that is arranged on the back surface side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven. The drive gear 341 is for inserting the drive gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the driving device 340 is first transmitted, and is pivotally supported by the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 on the proximal end side and meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340. Tooth. Further, a regulated sliding portion 351 projecting toward the front side is provided at a swinging end which is an end on the opposite side of the base end side.

The regulated sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the regulated sliding portion 351 is slid into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. Further, particularly when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmitting device 350.

The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source in the swinging motion of the arm member 320, particularly when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and is attached to the hook portion 317 of the base member 310. It includes a base end side arm portion 361 that is supported (pressed downward) and a moving end side arm portion 362 that is supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

Next, the rocking operation of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the rocking operation unit 300 showing the swinging motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. 16 (b), 17 (b), and 18 (b) are rear views of the rocking motion unit 300 showing the swinging motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 16 shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 17 shows a state in which the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at a point where the curvature of the standing hole 316 changes. In 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, the standing member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion of the upright member 330 on the overhanging end side is housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324.

That is, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by utilizing the space required for shielding the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space can be effectively used outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, a pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and a changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at the lower end of the upright hole 316. As a result, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the overhanging position, the standing member 330 changes its posture to a posture in which the major axis direction D1 faces the vertical direction (standing posture).

The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (the wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) is larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. To. Then, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the size of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. In this embodiment, the gaps formed are formed in such a manner that the gaps are gradually changed.

The gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 when starting from the retracted position, and it is possible to secure the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320.

Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is based on the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with slightly shorter dimensions (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed to be substantially the same). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 arranged near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

In the present embodiment, the upright member 330 is arranged above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 tilts forward due to the weight of the upright member 330 (tilts toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum for the forward tilting. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into contact with the base member 310 on a surface, and the resistance to the forward tilt of the arm member 320 can be improved.

Here, the upright hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture change portion 316a, the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the size of the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323.

As a result, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed in a short period of time from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually recognizing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as a unit at the overhanging position while suppressing the shielding space in the vertical direction of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance of the standing member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the upright member 330 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the tubular portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work of the rotational force around the tubular portion 322 on the changing sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 when starting from the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320.

The concentric circle portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in the direction along the circle centered on the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the concentric circle portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 does not change. , The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. As a result, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one unit, and the effect of integrally performing the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 can be easily realized.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, a pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the upper end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion of the standing member 330 is arranged. 333 is arranged at the upper end of the upright hole 316. As a result, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as a stopper. In particular, as will be described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 360, the need for a stopper at the end is greater than when it is driven by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portions 326 are formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portions 326 function as a stopper can be dispersed. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the sliding portion 326.

Although the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can function as a stopper, since the upright member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem arises. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are integrally formed with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the overhanging end side (upper side of FIG. 18) of the standing member 330 overhangs above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Is formed. Therefore, even if the swing angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, the action of projecting the standing member 330 toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be ensured, and the swing of the arm member 320 can be ensured. The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

Further, since the moving distance of the standing member 330 on the overhanging end side can be secured while keeping the swing angle of the arm member 320 small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. can. This effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) where the degree of the posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is large, so that the effect of increasing the speed at the start of the arm member 320 is remarkable. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the state immediately before the upright member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front portion 324 will be described. 19 (a) is a front view of the rocking operation unit 300, FIG. 19 (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 19 (c) is a bottom surface of the rocking operation unit 300. It is a figure. It should be noted that FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (c) show a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an intermediate position between the overhang position and the retracted position, and in detail, the arm member is in the overhang position. The state in which the overhanging end side of the upright member 330 begins to be housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 when the evacuation member 330 is swung toward the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the front portion 324 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 19 (c)) of the upright member 330. As a result, even when the upright member 330 wobbles around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum (swings in the vertical direction in FIG. 19C) when the arm member 320 swings, the upright member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. , The wobbling of the upright member 330 can be suppressed.

Here, the position A where the upright member 330 and the front portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in the front view is above the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed in. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the wobbling of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage where the arm member 320 is arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, the movement loci of the upright member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the upright member 330 can be brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the wobbling of the upright member 330. can.

20 (a) to 20 (d) are diagrams for explaining the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the overhanging position in chronological order, and is a basis of the arm member 320. It is a partial front enlargement view of the rocking operation unit 300 on the end side. 20 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20 (c) shows the state of FIG. 20 (b). The state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the overhanging position is shown, and the cover member 370 is omitted from FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

First, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position (posture change from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. From the overhanging position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20 (d), the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14), and transmission is performed. When the regulated sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved via the states of FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (b), so that the retracted position (FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the drive device 340 can be suppressed. For example, in the case of an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 are extended vertically downward (see FIG. 18 (b)). As a result, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 at the start of swinging from the overhanging position.

Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position (posture change from FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (d)) will be described. The urging force of the torsion spring 360 is applied to the arm member 320. In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the base end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from above by the hook portion 317 of the base member 310, and the moving end side end portion. The 362 is pressed in the lower right direction by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

As a result, the torsion spring 360 has a reduced distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and has elasticity in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction). The force is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is regulated by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the tubular portion 322 as the rotation axis of the arm member 320 and the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is , Is orthogonal to the direction Y connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 that swingably supports the transmission device 350 and the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

In this case, the regulated sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, the regulated sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the overhanging position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

The operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulated sliding portion 351 from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated (ON state) by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view. Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the proximal end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 shortened with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the arm. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

From this state, when the regulated sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. As a result, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

For example, in a mode such as a drive motor in which the driving force is gradually increased, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the start of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the start, a large acceleration at the start of the arm member 320 can be secured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is made idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20 (c)).

When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the overhang position (see FIG. 20 (c)), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is rotated (ON state) again clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the regulated sliding portion 351 is moved to the arm. It is located at the dead center in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the driving force of the constant driving device 340 is not generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is near the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven only when it is arranged in (ON state), and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the overhang position. As a result, the period for driving the drive device 340 can be reduced as compared with the case where the drive force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, so that the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), when the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position, the regulated sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 320 from the state of being arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position, the rotation direction of the regulated sliding portion 351 and the extension direction of the release hole 325 coincide with each other, so that the movement starts. Occasionally, the resistance that the regulated sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of operation, which requires the largest force.

Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. 21 (a) and 21 (b) are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIG. 21A, the state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged in the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position. The state of being evacuated is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid diagonally downward (from the upper right to the lower left in the front view) from the retracted position, and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed in the process of the slide movement. It changes (it tilts toward the overhanging position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L-shape in front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and the cover member thereof. A front-viewing substantially T-shaped suspension member 430 that is sandwiched between the 420 and the base member 410 and slides along the front side surface of the base member 410, and a drive that slides the suspension member 430. A drive device 440 that generates force, a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 whose one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and whose other end is connected to the base member 410. It mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported on the overhanging end side, which is the opposite end of the hanging member 430 on the base end side, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. It is composed of.

The base member 410 is a member that is formed in the shape of an L-shaped plate when viewed from the front and forms the skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400. A plate-shaped main body vertically elongated portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body and a guide rib portion extending vertically and slightly inclined in the left-right direction on the front side of the main body horizontally elongated portion 411 and projecting in a straight rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 drilled in the substantially central portion of the horizontally long portion of the main body and through which the drive shaft of the drive device 441 is inserted, and the lower portion of the vertically elongated portion 412 of the main body from the lower right to the upper left in the front view. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in an elongated long hole shape and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the drive device 440 are pivotally supported.

The horizontally long portion 411 of the main body includes an outer frame 411a projecting from the upper side and the left and right edges in a wall shape toward the front side. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length in the thickness direction (vertical direction of the slide plane of the hanging member 430) of the slide main body portion 431 of the hanging member 430. Formed long.

The slide plane of the hanging member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410, and is formed in a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the horizontally elongated portion 411 of the main body when viewed from the front. A portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 are mainly provided.

Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body horizontally elongated portion 411 of the base member 410, the hanging member 430 is in the front-rear direction even if the hanging member 430 is slid and moved in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, it is possible to evenly secure the contact area between the horizontally long portion 411 of the main body of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420.

The suspension member 430 is a member that is arranged in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and has a rack gear on the upper side surface. A horizontally long plate-shaped slide main body 431 to be engraved, a recessed groove 432 that is recessed in a groove shape on the back side of the slide main body 431 and abuts on the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and a slide. A plate-shaped bending arm 433 that hangs down from the substantially central part of the main body 431 and is bent toward the overhanging position in the middle, and a slide main body 431 at a part where the bending arm 433 of the slide main body 431 begins to hang down. Mainly includes a swing shaft 434 projecting from the front side toward the front side, and a tubular hanging cylinder 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (overhanging end) of the bending arm portion 433. ..

The slide main body portion 431 is formed to be slightly thinner than the gap formed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the hanging member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the direction in which the cover member 420 is fastened to the base member 410).

The recessed groove 432 is a recessed groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides the guide rib portion 413 diagonally downward due to the sliding of the recessed groove 432. Will be moved.

The bending arm portion 433 is extended along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the overhanging position, and the base member 410 is in a state where the suspending member 430 is arranged in the retracted position. A thickened portion 433a formed by increasing the wall thickness is provided on the front side in a portion formed below the horizontally long portion 411 of the main body. The thickness of the bending arm portion 433 on the slide main body portion 431 side of the thickened portion 433a is formed to be thinner than that of the slide main body portion 431 and the thickened portion 433a. As a result, the bending arm portion 433 is formed in such a manner that the deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs in the bending arm portion 433 on the slide main body portion 431 side of the thickening portion 433a. Further, the thickness direction of the bending arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (sliding direction).

The swing shaft 434 is a shaft formed by penetrating the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projecting to the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

The hanging cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIGS. 21 (a) and 25 (a)), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

The drive device 440 is a device in which each member is formed by sandwiching the base member 410 from the front and rear and generates a driving force required for the movement of the suspension member 430. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft to be penetrated, a drive gear 442 pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and arranged in front of the base member 410, and being meshed with the drive gear 442 thereof. It mainly includes a pair of transmission gears 443 that are pivotally supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416, respectively.

One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper side surface of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshed with the transmission gear 443 is slid and moved.

The auxiliary member 450 is a member arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, and one end thereof is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end slides into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body portion 451 that is possibly connected and formed in the shape of a long plate, a swing hole 452 drilled at one end, and a slide shaft 453 projecting toward the back at the other end. It mainly includes a hanging shaft 454 projecting from an intermediate position of the main body portion 451 toward the rear surface.

The auxiliary member 450 is axially supported by the suspension member 430 and its other end is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that it cannot move in the thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 25). Is formed in. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed in such a manner that the auxiliary member 450 approaches (swings) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 so that the hanging member 430 slides to the retracted position. As a result, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the hanging member 430 abuts on the auxiliary member 450, so that the wobbling of the hanging member 430 can be suppressed.

The swing hole 452 is externally fitted to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. As a result, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be swingable around the swing shaft 434. That is, as the suspension member 430 is slid and moved, the auxiliary member 450 is oscillated (tilted) around the oscillating shaft 434.

The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower right end in the front view) is slid and moved along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is arranged at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the hanging member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415.

The tilting member 460 is a member that is pivotally supported by the hanging cylinder 435 of the hanging member 430 and has an independent drive source (drive device 464), and is pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 and has a long plate shape. The first cover member 462, which is fastened to the lower part of the base member 461 from the front side and forms a gap between the base member 461 and the base member 461, and the first cover member 462 and the base member thereof. A transmission device 463 arranged in a gap formed between the transmission device 461, a drive device 464 for generating a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a length of the base member 461 connected to the transmission device 463. It mainly includes a moving base member 465 that is slidably formed in a direction, and a second cover member 466 that is arranged on the front side of the moving base member 465 and is fastened and fixed to the moving base member 465.

The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and has a suspension shaft 461a that is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side and is internally fitted and supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430. , A connecting shaft 461b adjacent to the hanging shaft 461a, a box-shaped storage portion 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the back side, and a front surface above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d projecting to the side, and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e provided along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

The accommodating portion 461c forms a space for accommodating the drive device 464, and a hole is formed in the bottom portion thereof to allow the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 to pass through.

The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a pivotally supported by the drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and pivotally supported by the pair of rotary shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears thereof. Of the 463b, the crank pin 463c is mainly provided at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b arranged on the moving base member 465 side.

The crank pin 463c is rotated around the rotation shaft 461d by rotating the drive gear 463a and the transmission gear 463b.

The moving base member 465 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and a plurality of posture maintenance pins 465a are projected from the back surface side (three locations in the present embodiment) and inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. A long hole-shaped slide hole 465b extending and drilling in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a pair of bulky portions 465c projecting to the front side are mainly provided.

Since the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b is connected to the slide hole 465b, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed. The slide is moved.

The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid and moved as the moving base member 465 is slid and moved.

The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. It is provided with a hanging hole 471 to be supported, and a tubular portion 472 which is formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end portion and is swingably externally supported by a connecting shaft 461b of a tilting member 460.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. The state in which the first cover member 466 is slid diagonally upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

The tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23), so that the second cover member 466 is slid and moved, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in the front view (see FIG. 24). Can be produced to change.

Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, vibration and wobbling are likely to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. Since the present embodiment has a plurality of configurations for suppressing the vibration and wobbling, it will be described below.

With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. 25 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the upper end position (evacuation position) of the movement path in which the suspension member 430 slides is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially shown. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 by arranging the suspension member 430 in the retracted position are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. 2) is moved to the outer right of the display area P.

At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is housed at a position on the front side of the hanging member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are laminated and arranged in the thickness direction (FIG. 25 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can be arranged more compactly than the total area of each member in. Therefore, the space on the right outer side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and the display area P can be largely secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and the base is on the back surface on the overhanging end side (tip side). A vertically elongated portion 412 of the main body of the member 410 is arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction at the retracted position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by a swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity where the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is suspended, and the suspension member 430 is arranged at an overhanging position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases the bending arm portion 433 so that the hanging member 430 slides from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is formed in a manner approaching (swinging) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

Therefore, when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position, the allowance (overhanging length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm portion 433 is obtained when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position. S) is shortened. As a result, even when the hanging member 430 wobbles due to the driving of the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed short. Therefore, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction (wobble of the tip of the bent arm portion 433) at the retracted position.

Here, the slide movement of the hanging member 430 will be described. Since the suspension member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 in the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back surface side, the suspension member 430 is slid and moved along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends in a straight line in the diagonally downward direction (from the upper right of FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left of FIG. 25 (a)).

The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is caused by the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 441 from the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise in front view, and the rotation causes the pair of transmission gears 443 to rotate, and the rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (left side in FIG. 25A) is moved. , The hanging member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the overhanging position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (overhanging position) of the movement path in which the suspension member 430 slides is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially shown. Is abbreviated to.

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the lower end in the moving direction of the slide main body portion 431 (the lower left end in FIG. 26A) is the outer frame of the base member 410. It comes into contact with 411a. Further, as described above, since the hanging member 430 moves downward toward the overhanging position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the hanging member 430 is canceled, the position of the hanging member 430 is changed. It can be reliably maintained in the overhanging position.

For example, when the slide movement direction of the suspension member 430 is the horizontal direction, gravity is not applied to the slide movement direction even if the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, so that the suspension member 430 is extended. It is necessary to add another force to keep it in position.

On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the component force of gravity is applied in the direction of the slide movement, so that the suspension member 430 is suspended. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the overhanging position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 440 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the hanging member 430 retracts from the portion where the bending arm portion 433 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. It is smaller than when it is placed at the position (see FIG. 25 (b)). Therefore, it is difficult for the base member 410 and the cover member 420 to suppress the wobbling of the bending arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430.

On the other hand, the root side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended toward the extension direction (lower left direction of FIG. 26B) of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the overlapping area between the auxiliary member 450 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 and the bending arm portion 433 is formed widely.

As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be separated from the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420, and the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. It is formed so that it can be contacted with. Since the thin portion of the bending arm portion 433 (the portion on the slide main body portion 431 side from the thickening portion 433a) is formed so as to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (the wobbling in the thickness direction is dominant). As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the sliding direction.

Further, the thin portion of the bending arm portion 433 (the portion on the slide main body portion 431 side from the thickening portion 433a) is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid and moved in the lateral direction (slide) of the slide main body portion 431. It is formed adjacent to the direction perpendicular to the direction). As a result, the wobbling caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm portion 433, and the wobbling of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 26) can be suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide main body portion 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and to suppress wear of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction.

For example, it is conceivable that an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 is extended toward the lateral side of the slide main body portion 431, and the tip end side of the arm portion is formed thinly. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the deflection, the wobbling of the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 causes the wobbling of the arm portion to be transmitted to the slide main body portion 431. There is a risk that the slide body 431 will wobble.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness is made thin from the root of the bending arm portion 433 extending from the slide main body portion 431, the wobbling generated at the tip of the bending arm portion 433 is used for bending the thin portion, and the slide main body is used. The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 in the line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26 (a). As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm portion 433 includes a thickening portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450 side, the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. It is possible to easily bring the bent arm portion 433 into contact with the auxiliary member 450 even when the amplitude of the bending arm portion 433 is small.

It will be described back to FIG. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, the movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 serves as a stopper that prevents the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 from moving toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is larger than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is placed slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid and slid toward the overhanging position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be arranged at a position offset upward by the distance L1 for the descending tilt.

Therefore, an extra space on the right outer side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, or it becomes a factor that reduces the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460.

However, in the present embodiment, as the hanging member 430 moves toward the overhanging position, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture so as to be lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. Lifted against member 430. As a result, when the hanging member 430 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 25 (a)), the lower end position of the tilting member 460 and when the hanging member 430 is placed in the overhanging position (FIG. 26 (a)). )) The lower end position of the tilting member 460 is located at substantially the same height (vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

Therefore, when the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, it is not necessary to arrange the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 for the descending inclination, and the right side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

Here, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the drive device 464 is arranged. Therefore, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, so that the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is the fulcrum of the wobbling of the hanging member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. It is possible to suppress the wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the 430.

Further, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the drive device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the rotational direction around the suspension cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. This force R pulls the auxiliary member 450 to the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in the direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the slide movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that the wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. can.

As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, the resistance to the wobbling that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that the wobbling of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the hanging member 430, all the vibrations and wobbling generated in the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the hanging member 430, but in the present embodiment, the vibration and wobbling of the tilting member 460 are transmitted. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be separately transmitted. As a result, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 excessively, and the degree of freedom in designing the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be improved.

Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. Note that FIG. 28 shows a closed state in which the reflective members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33 (b)) by rotating the reflective member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 forming a skeleton, a reflective member 520 pivotally supported by the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and reflection thereof. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 in which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is internally fitted, and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the drive portion side of the reflection member 520. , A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 meshed with a rotary gear 523 of a reflection member 520 is engraved, a drive device 560 that generates a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and a transmission of the drive device 560. It mainly includes a cover member 570 that is arranged on the back surface side of the gear group 562 and is fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

The base member 510 has a bottom surface portion 511 having a rectangular opening in the center and formed in a flat frame shape, and is vertically extended from the right end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side and the back surface side of the bottom surface portion 511. A first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511 are mainly provided. The opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for arranging a substrate (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflective member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). Ru.

The bottom surface portion 511 is vertically extended in the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in the rear view (see FIG. 30), and includes a long hole-shaped slide hole 511a for guiding the transmission member 550.

A plurality of slide holes 511a (4 locations in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 so that the extending directions coincide with each other in a straight line, and the slide holes 511a are formed at both upper and lower ends. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a from the lower end thereof, is a long hole narrower than the slide hole 511a, and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. The rib portion slide hole 511b is formed.

Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotating shaft 511c in which a plurality of the bottom surface portions 511 are projected toward the rear surface side below the opening and the transmission gear group 562 of the drive device 560 is pivotally supported.

The first wall portion 512 is a groove cut in a U shape from the front side to the back side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft portion of the reflective member are formed. The arrangement intervals of the shaft support grooves 512a are evenly spaced, and are formed at intervals shorter than the width dimension (longitudinal dimension in the rotation axis direction) of the reflective member 520.

The second wall portion 513 is arranged so as to face the shaft support groove 512a and is formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a. It is provided with an extension portion 513b formed between the grooves 513a and extended from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (front side in FIG. 29).

The extension portion 513b is formed in a stepped shape in which the width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) becomes smaller toward the front side, and the positioning protrusion portion 543 of the second lid member 540 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). Fitted in.

The reflective member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source, and is a long plate-shaped main body portion 521 formed of an opaque resin material and a straight line from the left and right ends of the main body portion 521. A pair of rotary shafts 522 projecting from each other and a rotary gear 523 that is fastened and fixed to the rotary shaft 522 on the side of the pair of rotary shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is arranged so as to be aligned with each other. Be prepared.

The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) chamfered and formed on the end face in the width direction.

The rotation shaft 522 is formed at the center position in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 521. Further, of the pair of rotary shafts 522, the rotary shaft 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is arranged is extended longer, so that the second wall portion is between the rotary gear 523 and the main body portion 521. The 513 is formed so that it can be disposed.

The rotary gear 523 includes an expansion tooth 523a in which adjacently engraved teeth are connected and the diameter from the center of rotation is longer than the other teeth. The expansion teeth 523a can prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating.

The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29) of the first wall portion 512, and is a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. A portion extending vertically toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (front surface in FIG. 29) of the support hole 531 and the first lid member 530, and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531. A extending lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end face extending to the edge of the lid is provided.

Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, if the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the portion 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one.

On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (left-right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflective member 520 does not depend on the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not get in the way, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one. The effect can be improved.

Regarding the method of assembling the base member 510, the reflective member 520, and the first lid member 530, at least two assembling methods can be performed. For example, first, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the base member 510 in a state where the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is fitted into the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflective member 520 can be inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

Secondly, with the first lid member 530 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotary shaft 522 on the side opposite to the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 is connected to the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530. There is a method of fitting the rotary shaft 522 on the drive portion side into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall portion 512 after inserting the rotary shaft in the diagonal direction (direction from the front side to the back diagonally to the right).

With reference to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. 31 (a) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of FIG. 31 (a). In addition, FIG. 31A shows the side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520. Therefore, for example, even when the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first lid member 530, the reflective member 520 has the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530. It is positioned between and and is pivotally supported.

Further, in the present embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, as described above, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is pivotally supported between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530, and the first lid. It is also pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for supporting the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to secure a sufficient area of the shaft support groove 512a that pivotally supports the reflective member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is bored in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 531 as well. As a result, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflective member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for supporting the reflective member 520 can be sufficiently secured.

It will be described back to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for axially supporting the drive portion side of the reflective member 520 to the base member 510, and is a long plate-shaped base member 541 arranged on the most front side and a base member 541 thereof. The extension shaft support portion 542 that is projected toward the back surface side and is extended in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30), and the extension shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541 are connected to each other. A positioning protrusion 543 and a positioning protrusion 543 are provided.

The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (b), and FIG. 32 (d) is a portion of the reversing operation unit 500 in the line XXXIId-XXXIId of FIG. 32 (b). It is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning protrusions 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extension portions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. As a result, the second lid member 540 can be accurately aligned with respect to the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32 (b)).

Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in the shape of a long plate, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 bends in the thickness direction to the reflective member 520 in the axial direction. The force is applied, and the rotation of the reflective member 520 may be hindered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 is hit from the thickness direction (left-right direction of FIG. 32 (c)) of the extended portion 513b of the base member 510. Be touched. As a result, the rigidity of the second wall portion 513 in the thickness direction can be improved.

The end of the extension shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 in the extension direction and the end portion of the base member 510 on which the shaft support groove 513a is formed are brought into contact with each other, and the open end of the shaft support groove 513a is closed ( See FIG. 32 (d)). As a result, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflective member 520 is pivotally supported by the holes formed by the shaft support groove 513a and the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

It will be described back to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflecting member 520, and is formed in the shape of a long plate and has a main body portion that is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. The 551 and the long plate-shaped extended wall portion 552 extending from the end surface of the main body portion 551 (the left end surface of FIG. 29) to the front side, and the end surface of the extended wall portion 552 on the front side intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520, and a plurality of (four locations in this embodiment) are arranged on the front side of the main body portion 551 and a slide of the base member 510. From the width dimension of the slide shaft 554 connected to the hole 511a and the rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) of the rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) extending downward from the slide shaft 554 at the upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 554. Also includes a rib portion 555 projecting with a slightly smaller width dimension, and a second rack gear 556 engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551 and meshed with the transmission gear group of the drive device 560.

In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously provided are arranged at intervals slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. The space spaced apart from this space can prevent the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 from over-rotating, which will be described in detail later.

The drive device 560 is a device that generates a drive force, and is meshed with a drive gear 561 pivotally supported by a drive shaft, a gear meshed with the drive gear 561, and a second rack gear 556 of a transmission member 550. It includes a transmission gear group 562, which is a plurality of gears including the gears, each of which is meshed with a plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

When the drive gear 561 of the drive device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the driving force of the drive device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid and moved in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated around the rotation shaft 522 by the sliding movement of the transmission member 550.

33 (a), 33 (b), and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotational operation of the reflective member 520 is illustrated in chronological order, with FIGS. 33 (d) and 33 (c). (E) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotational operation of the reflective member 520 is illustrated in chronological order, and FIG. 34 shows the reflective member 520 and the reflective member 520 in the posture of FIG. 33 (d). It is a partial side view of the transmission member 550.

In addition, in FIG. 33, the illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), a state (closed state) in which the main body portions 521 of the reflective member 520 are in contact with each other is shown. 33 (b) and 33 (e) show a state (open state) in which the reflective member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the states of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), and FIG. 33 (c). ) And FIG. 33 (f), the surface opposite to the surface on which the reflective member 520 is directed to the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is directed to the front side, and the main body of the reflective member 520. The state in which the 521s are in contact with each other (closed state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 33 (d), in the closed state, the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 is meshed with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 to regulate the rotation.

The rotational operation of the reflective member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33 (d)) by the drive device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 The main body portion 521 of the reflective member 520 is rotated as the reflection member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33 (e)). Further, by sliding the first rack gear 553 to the left, the reflective member 520 is rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction of each other are brought into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33 (f)).

Here, at the end position of the slide movement of the transmission member 550, the reflection member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion and the posture is corrected (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not accurately meshed with each other, the posture of the reflection member 520 in a state where the transmission member 550 is arranged at the end position of the slide movement. Can be stabilized.

In the closed state of the reflective member 520, the end portion of the main body portion 521 is abutted in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the above-mentioned light source can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. can.

Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, once the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, while the shutter member slides from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping with the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, it takes a long time for the player to visually recognize the entire light.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflective member 520 makes it possible to pass the light emitted to the player by rotating the reflective member 520 from the closed state while suppressing the leakage of light in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members 520 can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflective member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, the time required for the player to visually recognize the entire light can be shortened in the case of rotating the reflective member 520 as compared with the case of sliding the shutter member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the reflective member 520 reduces the area occupied by the reflective member 520 in the front view (see FIG. 32 (a)), so that the light source formed on the back surface side of the reflective member is reduced. The light of is visible. Therefore, the space for arranging the reflection operation unit 500 can be saved.

In the reflective member 520, the chamfered portions 521a are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). As a result, the distance between the reflective members 520 in the thickness direction in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflective members 520 can be made flatter.

For example, when a pattern recognized as one on the thickness direction surface of the plurality of reflection members 520 is formed on the thickness direction surface of the plurality of reflection members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflection members 520 is made inconspicuous and the pattern is formed. It is possible to suppress the deviation of. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more clearly.

The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523a is formed to be longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body portion 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotary gear 523 is to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the expansion tooth 523a is dammed by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating, and it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged due to excessive pressure generated at the contact surface of the reflective member 520.

Further, as described above, since the first rack gear 553 is arranged at a space slightly shorter than the space when the tooth group in which the four teeth are connected is omitted from one tooth, FIG. 33 (f). ) When the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 is to be rotated clockwise in FIG. 33 (f), the interval at which the teeth of the rotary gear 523 are formed between the tooth groups of the first rack gear 555 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotary gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged by the chamfered portion 521a which is the contact surface due to the over-rotation of the reflective member 520.

Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. 35 (b) shows the pair of first slide members 720. The state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the overhanging position (front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is shown.

The second slide operation unit 700 has a display area in which a pair of first slide members 720 and a pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. P is formed so as to be divisible in a grid pattern. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

36 and 37 are an exploded front perspective view of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are an exploded rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit 700. It should be noted that FIGS. 36 and 38 show the disassembled state of the base member 710 and the members arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and FIGS. 37 and 39 show the back surface of the base member 710 and the base member 710. The state in which the member arranged on the side is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming a display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 in the center. A first slide shaft rod S1 that is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the 710 and its base member 710 and whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction, and a slide along the first slide shaft rod S1. Mainly a pair of first slide members 720 to be moved and a front side cover member 730 formed in a pair of upper and lower parts while being fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720. Be prepared.

Further, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft rod S2 whose longitudinal direction coincides with the vertical direction, and a second slide shaft thereof. A pair of second slide members 740 that are slid and moved along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears meshed with the second slide member 740 are arranged, and a pair of second slide members 740. And the back side cover member 760 formed on the left and right and the upper part while being fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the back side of the transmission device 750, and arranged on the back side cover member 760 and the first slide member 720 and the first slide member 720. It mainly includes a driving device 770 that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740.

As shown in FIG. 36, since the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (left side of FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

The first slide member 720 extends downward from the lower end of the main body portion 721 formed in an L-shaped front view, the bogie portion 722 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 721, and the bogie portion 722. It is provided with a decoration unit 723.

The main body portion 721 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the left-right direction, and has a rack portion 721a on which a rack gear is engraved on the upper surface, and a rack portion 721a connected below the rack portion 721a and the rack portion 721a. It is provided with a plate-shaped bogie receiving portion 721b arranged on the left side of the front view.

The trolley portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the trolley receiving portion 721b so that the left end coincides with the left end of the trolley receiving portion 721b. The bogie portion 722 is arranged inside the bogie main body portion 722a formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting wall portions from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, respectively, and inside the bogie main body portion 722a. Also provided are a group of rotating bodies 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed having a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged in pairs on the left and right.

In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft rod S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to project slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surface of FIG. 36) of the bogie main body portion 722a.

The first slide shaft rod S1 is provided with a pair of fastening plate portions S1a to be fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends, and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

An aspect of arranging the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft rod S1 is inserted between the rotating body group 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. As a result, the bogie portion 722a is arranged between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft rod S1. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft rod S1.

Next, the bogie receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the bogie portion 722 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the first slide member 720 is pivotally supported by the first slide shaft rod S1 so as to be slidable.

In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with the transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the drive device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

When the first slide member 720 slides and moves, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft rod S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft rod S1 can be reduced and friction is reduced. Further, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in pairs on the left and right and they are in contact with the first slide shaft rod S1, the wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft rod S1 can be stabilized.

The front side cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is arranged on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is arranged on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. As a result, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (left front direction in FIG. 36) about the first slide shaft rod S1, the wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710 on the left side of the rear view with the transmission cylinders 711 and 712 which are arranged so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are formed so as to be axially rotatable. The fixed gear portion 713 is extended along the vertical direction and the gear is engraved on the wall surface facing inward (to the right in FIG. 38), and the fixed gear portion 713 is meshed with the rack gear 754 (FIG. 38). The rolling gear 714 pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of 39) and the guide wall portion 715 projecting from the back surface of the base member 710 and extending in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view. And mainly prepare.

The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are provided with drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on the wall surface facing inward (to the left in FIG. 38).

As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (upper part of FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other will be omitted.

The second slide member 740 extends from the left end of the front view of the main body portion 741 formed in the shape of a long plate, the bogie portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and the bogie portion 742 to the left. It is provided with a decorative portion 743.

The main body portion 741 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

The bogie portion 742 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the main body portion 741 so that the upper end thereof coincides with the upper end of the main body portion 741. The dolly portion 742 is formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting wall portions from the left and right ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, respectively, and the trolley body portion 742a is perpendicular to the bottom surface inward. 742b is provided with a group of rotating bodies 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with various rotating axes are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts.

In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged vertically in parallel, and the length of the left-right spacing is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft rod S2.

The decorative portion 743 is provided with a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a pivotally supported by a shaft projecting toward the back surface at the left end of the front view.

The second slide shaft rod S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

An embodiment of the arrangement of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft rod S2 is inserted between the rotating body group 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the bogie portion 742. As a result, the second slide member 740 is pivotally supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 so as to be slidable. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft rod S2.

Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft rod S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. As a result, the main body portion 741 is arranged between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft rod S2.

Here, the rack gear engraved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

Since the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft rod S2 when the second slide member 740 slides, the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft rod S2 can be reduced and friction is reduced. Further, since a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged vertically in pairs and they are brought into contact with the second slide shaft rod S2, the wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft rod S2 can be stabilized.

Here, the main body portion 741 having the rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the bogie portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft rod S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the ends. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 with the second slide shaft rod S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state of the rack gear and the rolling gear 714. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the deviation of the meshing state.

As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device that transmits the driving force of the drive device 770 to the second slide member 740, and is on the long plate-shaped main body portion 751 and the back side of the main body portion 751. It has a drive gear 752 to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and teeth meshed with the transmission gear. It mainly includes a rack gear 754 which is a long plate-shaped member extending in the direction and is slid up and down along the slide elongated hole 751a of the main body portion 751.

In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) portion of the pair of upper and lower portions (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

The main body portion 751 includes a slide elongated hole 751a formed in an elongated hole shape in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

The rack gear 754 is provided with a columnar shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) that projects vertically from the front and penetrates the slide slot 751a of the main body portion 751. The shaft support portion 754a is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

Here, the mode of transmitting the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is moved via the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide slot 751a.

Since the shaft support portion 754a of the rack gear 754 (see FIG. 37) is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down by sliding the rack gear 754 up and down. ..

At this time, the rolling gear 714 is meshed with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and is also meshed with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, a double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

The back side cover member 760 includes a back drive part cover member 761 arranged on the drive part side of the second slide member 740, a back upper cover member 762 arranged on the upper part, and a back drive part cover member 761 on the left and right sides. It mainly includes a back cover member 763 that is arranged so as to face each other in the direction.

The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the transmission device 750, and the drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

The rear upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and the drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface of the decorative portion 743 on the extended end side, and prevents the second slide member 740 from being rotated toward the back surface side with the second slide shaft rod S2 as a fulcrum and coming out.

The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, 774 include drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

An example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 40 (a), the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged in the retracted positions, respectively, and in FIG. 40 (b), the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged. 40 (c) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position in FIG. 40 (b) by a predetermined amount to the right in the front view. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the upper front side cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front side cover members 730 is not shown.

Here, the transmission of the driving force to the driving gears 711a and 712a when the pair of first slide members 720 slides is described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in the front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in the front view) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a), the pair of first slide members 720. Are each slid toward the overhanging position and abutted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 40 (b)).

The drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720 is in the state of FIG. 40 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force just before reaching. In the present embodiment, the contact between the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722, so that it is not necessary to consider the bending of the decorative portion 723 in the slide direction. Therefore, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

In the pair of first slide members 720, the rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to project slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the bogie main body portion 722a, so that the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other. At that time, the rotating bodies protruding outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are pressed against each other. Will be. That is, while the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b that project outward from the contact surface side. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact of the pair of first slide members 720 at the time of contact can be alleviated.

After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, the drive motor 771 generates a driving force for sliding and moving the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pushing the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side of the front view to the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side of the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40 (c)).

That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid and moved without coordinating the drive motors 771 and 772. As a result, the power consumption of the entire drive motor 771,772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases as compared with driving only one of the first slide members 720. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravitational load as in the case where the first slide member 720 is moved in the vertical direction, and the amount of increase in the motor load is the drive motor 771,772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs evenly in each.

Therefore, it is easy to adjust the motor life of the drive motors 771,772 (see FIG. 35), and it is possible to easily adjust the replacement time of the drive motors 771,772. As a result, the number of maintenance of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

An example of the movement mode of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 which shows an example of the change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 41 (a), the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged in the retracted positions, and in FIG. 41 (b), the main bodies 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the overhanging positions. In FIG. 41 (c), a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are moved by a predetermined amount from the position in FIG. 41 (b) upward in the front view is shown.

Here, the transmission of the driving force to the driving gear 752 (see FIG. 39) when the pair of second slide members 740 slides is described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a), the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motor 7743, 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise in the front view, and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise in the front view). The pair of second slide members 740 are slid and moved toward the overhanging position, and are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position (see FIG. 41 (b)).

Of the pair of second slide members 740, the drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740 arranged above the front view reaches the state of FIG. 41 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before.

After the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the drive motor 774 (which generates a driving force for sliding and moving the second slide member 740 arranged below the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 ( The pair of second slide members 740 are pressed by the driving force (see FIG. 35) (by pushing the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view to the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view). It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid and moved without coordinating the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35). As a result, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the entire drive motors 773 and 774.

Here, when the member moving downward changes the moving direction upward, the load on the drive motor may increase due to the influence of gravity, and the motor life may be shortened. In addition, since the deceleration time for changing the direction is long, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of the production is reduced.

However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the moving direction from the descending movement to the upward movement, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. You can take advantage of the momentum of movement. As a result, the motor load generated when the direction of the second slide member 740 is changed due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. Further, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of the effect can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. The back cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back cover member 760 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 hits the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppressing gear 743a. Be touched.

Here, at the time of starting the second slide member 740, the meshing relationship between the bending suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized, and the bending suppressing gear 743a rotates smoothly, so that the second slide member 740 and the receiving gear are rotated smoothly. The resistance generated between the portion 715a and the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the start of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other by the bogie portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decorative portion 743, and the side on which the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the decorative portion 743 is arranged. The end of the is tilted with respect to the guide wall portion 715. As a result, the load from the deflection suppressing gear 743a on the receiving gear portion 715 increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper bending suppressing gear 743a of the pair of bending suppressing gears 743a is the receiving gear. It is pressed against the part 715.

As a result, a force in the direction of returning the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact between the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

Further, the contact surface between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 can be increased by forming the contact between the gears. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. The effect of sliding can be improved.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning apparatus 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, and is first variable. To light the base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 and the LED on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c arranged on the back side of the base member 65c. Opening and closing for opening and closing the LED substrate 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, the back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. A flow path formed by an opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that projects to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back cover thereof. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is composed of.

FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 50 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line Lb-Lb of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined downward to the left so as to be guided to the left in FIG. 50 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (the inside of the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the short-time game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second winning opening 640 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left-handed immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 51A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning opening 65 during the big hit game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the big hit game. Can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variation grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure it so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (for one ball winning in this embodiment). You can pay out 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the probability change switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for imparting a probabilistic gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the gaming board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. An opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A taxiway leading to the general winning opening 65b1 is formed. When a game ball enters the general prize opening 65b1, 10 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate. Here, when the game is played by right-handed hitting, which is a game method in which the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, the game ball does not roll on the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 pass through this opening and are configured to win a prize in the general winning opening 65b1. A plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided on the upper portion of the first variable winning device 65.

Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angles of the game nails K2 and K3 are adjusted as a means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. It is configured so that it can be widened or widened. Here, the game store will increase the profit by reducing the number of game balls that win the specific winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit so that 10 balls can be entered in one round and the number of game balls to be fired increases. Is conceivable. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted so that it is difficult to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, the distance between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Further, when the game nail K1 is narrowed in order to narrow the distance between the game nails K1 and K2, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, even if the jackpot game is not in progress, the ratio of winning the general winning opening 65b1 will be high, and the damage on the game store side will be large. It is possible to prevent the nail from being adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the taste of the game is significantly lowered by the adjustment on the side of the game store.

Further, when the game nail K1 is tilted to the right to narrow the distance between the game nails K2 and K3 and the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a is adjusted to be lowered, the game ball is moved to the second winning opening 640 side. Is easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning opening 640 becomes high, the ratio of winning to the second winning opening 640 during the time-saving game or the probabilistic game state becomes high, and the damage on the game store side becomes large. , It is possible to suppress that the winning rate of the specific winning opening 65a is set low. A plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640, and a game ball flowing down to the left on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The game nails placed between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 are arranged so that all the game balls are guided to the second winning opening 640 even if adjusted.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed with each other has been described, but the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment is the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. It is possible to form a state in which the drive gear 2341 is engaged (engaged state) and a state in which the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are disengaged (non-engaged state). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

43 and 44 show the front surfaces of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in which the swinging operations of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in the second embodiment are illustrated in chronological order. It is a figure.

The main body portion 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 43 (a), the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 43 (b), the arm member The state in which the 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the overhanging position to the retracted position is shown in FIG. 43 (c), the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position in FIG. 43 (c), and FIG. 43 (a) in FIG. The state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c) is shown in FIG. 44 (b), and the state in which the arm member 320 is extended to the front of the overhanging position is shown in FIG. 44 (c). ), The state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position by pulling the transmission device 2350 to the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are meshably formed.

The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed by the drive shaft and is formed in the shape of a front view fan, and an extrusion pin 2341b that is projected toward the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 projecting toward the front side at an end portion of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side of the front view.

The base member 2310 includes a swing shaft 2318 projecting toward the front side at the lower right side of the front view of the shaft support position of the drive gear 2341.

The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in the shape of a long rod, and one end of the first main body portion 2381 is swingably supported by the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310, and one end of the first main body portion 2381. The second main body 2382, which is swingably supported by the other end on the opposite side and is formed in the shape of a long rod, and the second main body 2382 are bored in a long hole shape along the extending direction. It also includes a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be swingable on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and to be in contact with the extrusion pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position will be described. In the arm member 320, the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c) by the rotation of the drive gear 2341, so that the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350 with the pull slide hole 2383 and tilted toward the transmission device side.

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the meshing between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 43 (c)), the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center, so that the transmission device 2350 The arm member 320 is maintained in the retracted position even when the meshing with the drive gear 2341 is released.

From the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the drive gear 2341 is further rotated, and when the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (to the right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pull slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled and the transmitter 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in front view.

By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead center formed by the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 has a torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) Is oscillated toward the overhanging position (see FIG. 44 (b)).

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged to the right of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. As a result, the regulated sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the overhanging position (see FIG. 44 (c)).

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the mesh between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It is possible to reduce the resistance applied to the teeth. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the urging force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of swinging the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be remarkable.

Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are meshed only when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance that occurs between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 Does not affect the swing of the arm member 320 when it swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

Therefore, by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when swinging the arm member 320 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and even if a large capacity of the drive device 2340 is selected. , It is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a), and 46 (b) show the second embodiment in which the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position in chronological order. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit 2300 in the form. It should be noted that FIG. 45 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 45 (b) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. In 46 (a), a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 45 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an overhang position is shown. Will be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the upright member 330 is gently upright has been described, but in the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the upright member 330 is suddenly upright.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the upright hole 2316 of the base member 2310 includes a posture changing portion 2316a formed at the upper part of the bending point and a concentric circular portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

The posture changing portion 2316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture change portion 2316a, the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45B and 46). (A)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in the direction along the circle centered on the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is slid on the concentric circle portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. , The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

In the present embodiment, since the concentric circle portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the upright hole 2316, the arm member 320 stands upright with respect to the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. 45 (b). The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

Since the posture changing portion 2316a is formed above the bending point of the standing hole 2316 (that is, near the upper portion of the concentric circle portion 2316b), it is shown in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung in such an arrangement, the upright member 320 is abruptly upright.

As a result, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made abrupt. Therefore, the high speed of the operation of the rocking operation unit 2300 felt by the player can be further improved.

The first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is formed of a resin material has been described, but in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is formed of an elastic rubber material. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

47 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. In FIG. 47, the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position is shown, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466 m disposed at the upper end portion.

The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

The connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the hanging shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed to be stretchable by swinging the tilting member 2460.

Here, in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a, so that the tilting member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts while the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the suspension shaft 461a. Be moved.

In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force opposite to the swing direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time until the tilting member 2460 swings back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the swinging operation of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven, and the effect of the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and abuts on the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment has a second slide operation unit 2700. The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and one of the first slide members 2720 is controlled to run in the reverse direction according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment in which an example of the operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 48, the illustration of the upper front side cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 are arranged in the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. 48 (b) shows. The state in which the first slide member 2720 on the right side of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid and moved by a predetermined amount is illustrated, and in FIG. 48 (c), the first slide on the left side from the state of FIG. 48 (b). The state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is formed in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 48) and extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). It is provided with a hole-shaped detection hole 2721c.

The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor disposed on the front side, and is a detection device disposed at a position where transmitted light can penetrate the detection hole 2721c by sliding the first slide member 2720. It is equipped with 2716. The detection device 2716 is arranged substantially in the center of the base member 2710 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid and moved from the state of FIG. 48 (a) and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position through the detection hole 2721c, the right side is shown. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the first slide member 2720 on the left side is slid and moved and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position through the detection hole 2721c, the slide member 2720 on the right side is the slide member on the left side. It is controlled to feed backward (slide to the right) at a speed that allows contact with the 2720 at a constant speed.

That is, while the first slide member 2720 on the left side slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is shielded from the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When the penetrating position is reached, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected and the position information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. Ru.

Based on the position information and velocity information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side, the backward acceleration required for the first slide member 2720 on the right side to come into contact with the first slide member 2720 on the left side at a constant velocity is obtained. It is calculated, and the acceleration is controlled so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side does.

As a result, the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 2720 can be softened, and the durability of the first slide member 2720 can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid in the upright holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be disposed in the changing sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll the upright holes 316, 2316. This makes it possible to suppress the resistance generated when the posture of the standing member 330 changes.

In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315. The case where it is formed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be abruptly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of changes in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (rapidly or loosely).

In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315. The case where it is formed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330 and the collar member and the base member 310 is formed so as to gradually decrease from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the upright hole 316. good. In this case, the resistance applied to the standing member 330 when the arm member 320 starts from the retracted position to the overhanging position is suppressed, and the wobbling of the standing member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position. can do.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end to the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction in diameter orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be formed differently on the left and right with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326.

That is, the right side surface of the guide hole 315 (right side in FIG. 18A) is a portion formed on the upper side of the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position. When the arm member 320 is slightly moved in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft, the arm member 320 is positively abutted. By greatly reducing the degree of reduction of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, it is possible to smooth the swing of the arm member 320 in the overhanging direction.

On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (left side in FIG. 18A) is a place where the arm member 320 comes into contact with the arm member 320 when the arm member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 tilts forward. Therefore, the degree of reduction of the groove is made gentle up to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, and the arm member 320 is rapidly formed near the upper end to receive resistance when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position. It can be suppressed. That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 is tilted forward, it is possible to prevent the sliding portion 326 from coming into contact with the left side surface of the guide hole 315, and the arm can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the overhanging position to the retracting position. As a result, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced, and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the upper end, the arm member 320 can be swung from the retracted position to the overhanging position from the start. The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. As a result, the swing of the arm member 320 can be smoothed.

Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the lower end, the arm from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhanging position. A downward force acts toward the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. As a result, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the overhanging position to the retracting position.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflective members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are rotated at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing of rotation may be staggered or the speed of rotation may be staggered for each reflective member 520. As a result, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 to rotate the reflective member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotary belt and the rotary gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotary belt rotates further while the reflective members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotary belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflective member 520 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflective member 520 from being damaged.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the expansion teeth 523a are formed on the rotary gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed at intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth spacing may be formed on the rotary gear 523.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reflective member 520 may be formed of a transparent resin material. In this case, the light emitted from the light source can be visually recognized by the player regardless of whether the reflective member 520 is in the closed state or the open state. Therefore, the player is allowed to visually recognize the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long period of time. Can be done.

In each of the above embodiments, of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700, the case where one slide member 720 is pushed by the other slide member 720 and slides is described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to be always driven by independent drive motors.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly bring the main body portions 741 into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, elastic members such as rubber and coil springs may be arranged on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be softened as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the "heart" can be visually recognized from the front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, the shape that can be visually recognized is not limited to the "heart", and may be, for example, a "star", a "fish", or a "car". Further, different shapes may be visually formed when the degree of overhang of each of the slide members 720 and 740 is different. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where one of the second slide members 740 among the pair of second slide members 740 pushes in and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact point of the second slide member 740, it can be moved in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides and moves one of the second slide members 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, it is possible to switch the motor to be driven according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 774 and 774 can be adjusted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, a pair of first slide members 720 may be brought into contact with each other on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, on the lower end side of both ends of the decorative portion 723 in the longitudinal direction, which is the opposite side of the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted. .. In this case, since the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other can be softened, the load on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with each other on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area at the time of contact of the pair of first slide members 720 can be reduced.

Further, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is surely transmitted to the other, the pair of slide members 720 are moved when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other. The effect of making it visible as a unit can be remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front side cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 separated from each other are visually recognized in a coordinated operation, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the bogie portion 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the rotating body group 722b having a small diameter can be sandwiched between the rotating body group 722b having a large diameter and the first slide shaft rod S1. As a result, the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b can be improved by bringing the rotating body groups 722b into contact with each other.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the first slide member 2720 at one place has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first slide member 2720 is stopped by drilling the detection holes 2721c at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the center and the other end of the main body 2721 of the first slide member 2720). Multiple positions can be formed. At this time, by differentiating the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction, the positions of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of locations depending on the detection period of the detection device 2716.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the shape of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be drilled in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously bored along the slide direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is being moved while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined from the time interval for blocking the transmitted light of the first slide member 2720. Further, by making the number of circular detection holes 2721c perforated different for each position in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the central portion), the detection device 2716 is transmitted while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected by the number of times the light is blocked.

In the second embodiment, after one slide member 2720 is stopped at an overhanging position, the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, when detecting only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by running the at least one first slide member 2720 in the reverse direction. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of contact.

In the second embodiment, the case where one detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be arranged corresponding to a pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of one second slide member 740.

In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is arranged on the base member 2710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be arranged on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<About the first control processing example>
Next, an example of the first control process in the control process of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is used as a trigger on the first symbol display device 37. Fluctuation display is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It should be noted that the third symbol is commonly displayed in a variable manner with respect to the variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variablely displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variablely displayed at the same time. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of numbers from "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is displayed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol string having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol column is displayed as a left symbol column displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol column displayed on the right side of the left symbol column, and a right symbol column displayed on the right side of the middle symbol column.

In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle portion of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, is the reserved ball. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of "black circle" is displayed for one, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls from the number of reserved symbols.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is the same. It is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided in each of these areas, and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set according to the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1 per unit, the type counter C2 per first, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number table per one, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "9" is as described above. It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the value "0-9" is the first random number for the high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time loss, long-time loss, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 72) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 55 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponds to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the time of low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 63). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 72) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 71) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 15) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability change effective flag 203p, a probability change effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time reduction / medium counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has one. , Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning the first winning opening 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N in the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. 66). See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the display itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c). S703: No in FIG. 69).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates a low probability gaming state (including a time-saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51 (a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag has been set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1241 in FIG. 77). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j determines the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65). It is a counter for counting. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) After it is determined whether or not they match (S1267 in FIG. 78), the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243: Yes in FIG. 77). The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal display") for attracting the attention of the player. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the first variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated by 1 by the processing of S1224 in the notification processing (FIG. 76, S1111) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal display" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal display. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, the girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The word "attention" is displayed, which is a notification that prompts the player to see. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51 (a)) in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game. The production is being performed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first step is performed before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the variable winning device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the player to read the code with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to do.

The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 81 to be ejected is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot B is used. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51 (a)) based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON is the probability change switch 65e3. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, the period during which the probability change effective flag 203p is on indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probabilistic valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3 can be determined (measured). In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51 (a)) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game. There is.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The long-press effect lottery table 222b has a frame button 22 as one of the fluctuation patterns described later, when a SW fluctuation pattern in which a display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is selected. It is a selection table for selecting the notification mode for notifying the operation timing and the like. FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In the long-press effect lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long-press operation in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a certain period or longer is set as a long-press navigation type. As the long-press navigation type, three types of long-press navigation A, long-press navigation B, and long-press navigation C are set.

Here, each long press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (b) are views showing an example of the display mode of the long press navigation B. When the SW fluctuation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, the characters "Get a big hit with a long press !!" are displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the player presses and holds it. By executing the above, the notification mode in which the jackpot is expected to be given is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters "Predict the start timing of long press in the period meter !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the color changes from the left side to the right side with time below it. An indicator that changes in order is displayed. By this notification, the player predicts the correct long press start period and starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until all the colors of the indicators change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61B, the timing of releasing the long press (timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the characters "Release at count 0 !!" are displayed, and an indicator whose color changes in order from the left side to the right side is displayed below the characters. The characters "3, 2, 1, 0, release !!" are displayed at the upper right end of the indicator, and the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character "0". Navigation to release. Here, a countdown may be displayed by a character, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the character "Release !!" is displayed.

In this way, in the notification mode of the long press navigation B, the player is made to predict the timing of the start of the long press, and the timing of the release of the long press is clearly notified, so that the navigation is composed of medium difficulty. are doing.

When the timing of the long press start coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW fluctuation pattern, the player is notified that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. This allows the player to know early on that it is a big hit.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press navigation A, the player expects that the character "Get the big hit at the long-press timing !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the big hit is given by the long-press timing. The notification mode to be notified is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), an indicator is displayed, and after long-pressing for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator changes, the player's arbitrary period, a preset length. The text "Hit a long press period !!" is displayed to prompt you to apply the press period.

In this way, the long-press navigation A is a notification mode in which the player must predict both the start timing of the long-press and the release timing of the long-press, and is configured with the most difficult navigation notification mode. ing.

FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press navigation C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters "Get the jackpot in the specified long press period !!" are displayed, and the long press is pressed at the specified timing and period. A notification is executed that prompts the player to do so. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, the characters "start" and "end" are displayed below the indicator, and a long press is performed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes until the start. It is notified that the long press is released at the timing of "end" after starting.

In this way, the long-press navigation C is the navigation content with the lowest difficulty level among the long-press navigation types, and as will be described later, it is a notification mode that is selected only when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. ing.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long-press effect lottery table 222b, the value (range of 0 to 198) of the effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long-press navigation type for each hit / fail determination result. There is. When the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is set so that a long-press navigation type with a lower difficulty level can be easily selected than when the result is a hit. This can be configured to change the expectation for a big hit depending on the type of long-press navigation displayed. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel that whether or not the jackpot is given changes depending on the operation method of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game.

If the long press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the long press effect may be terminated in the middle and switched to a predetermined variable effect of the main symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag 223d. At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW effective time storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lottery. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by the long press counter 223h described later, and when the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds, this long press flag 223 g is set to ON. ..

The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or longer, it is regarded as a long press, and it is determined that an operation different from the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed in a normal short time (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured. It is possible to determine whether or not the long press is executed by the long press counter 223h.

The SW effective time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the period for which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the SW fluctuation pattern described above, the frame button 22 set in the fluctuation pattern is determined to be off. The period (time) set to be enabled (S1807: No in FIG. 83) of the button 22 is set in the SW effective time storage area 23i as the SW effective time. When the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i, it is subtracted and updated by 1 based on the passage of the SW effective time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 84) is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the change period of the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed against. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will be more. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of the ordinary symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and it becomes easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 15).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. 15). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 84) (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 59) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 86 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 59) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 59, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 86 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol are displayed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 65. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S216: Yes), set an opening scenario for a specific winning opening based on the big hit type (S217), and then set the start of big hit A (16 rounds, etc.). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON (S302).

When the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of whether or not it is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so that the first acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). A display mode at the time of a jackpot indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

In this process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In this process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. If there is, it is a process to acquire various random number counters and execute the hold process of the value.

When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S502), and the gaming state is determined. If is probable (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the gaming state is not probable (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 68 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 53 (a)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 53 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 68, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 69 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 72, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning process (see FIG. 66) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol change start process (see FIG. 68). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 70 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 64) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read by S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such troubles can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that the operation timing is reached (S1106: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability change flag 203g is set to on (S1213). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 even during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1223, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal display from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1221 that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal display".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1231). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). After that, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

In the process of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1236). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). After that, the process of S1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1239). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1242). After that, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1244). The probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is ON (S1246). If the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), the probability change valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1248). When it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to off (S1249). The probabilistic valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, if it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the details of this exception handling (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1261). If it is outside the round validity period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1265) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) and the number of winning numbers (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1267).

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot B.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1271), and then this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1514. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1514 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1514 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1516. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 80). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1408 is performed via the processing of S1404 to S1406. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S1410, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the processing of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1502 to S1510, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1604). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). Further, in the process of S1608, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1608 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by S1608. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start prize or drawing a special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1607, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, "look at the liquid crystal display") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1610).

Next, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that the broadcast command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed in the display control device 114. The command is set so that it can be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so that this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect has not been started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect has started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is acquired (S1802), and the long press effect is long-pressed from the lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55 (b)). Select a navigation pattern (S1803). Next, the command for displaying the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

In the process of S1805, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time of the SW effective time storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1805). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIGS. 83 and S1507) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is larger than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether or not the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is to subtract the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether or not the long press flag 223g is on (the frame button 22 is pressed). S1809). If it is determined that the long press flag 223g is on (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810).

If it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and a display command indicating that the long press is in progress is set (S1812). Return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1807: No). S1813). If it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 0) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set to off (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 84) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. And S2102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the process of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 84. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. If it is via 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a). FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined by the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to display the S2304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display stop type command for two or more is not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2701). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the backsides A to C according to the backside type of the backside image specified in the display data table, the backside image discrimination flag set by S2702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and there is an error command. If (S2410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2802). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2802. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating a long press among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the length is long. If there is a command indicating a press (S2412: Yes), the long press effect process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401. Here, the command indicating a long press is a display command indicating a long press navigation pattern set in the process of S1804, a display command indicating a long press in progress set in the process of S1812, and a process of S1814. Corresponds to the display command indicating long press off set in.

Here, the details of the long press effect processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a long press effect process. This long press effect process executes a process corresponding to a command indicating a long press received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the long-press effect processing (FIGS. 90 and S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a long-press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901 when it is determined that the long press navigation effect is performed (S2901: Yes), the display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a long press navigation effect (S2901: No), it is determined whether the command is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). If it is determined to be a long press command in the process of S2903 (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if it is not determined as a long press command (S2903: No), display data corresponding to the long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this Ends the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Extract only the stop type command, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 91. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3201, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 91 to continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time (Fig. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3514), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S3518). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. In the second control example, the content of the SW fluctuation pattern is changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of pressing and holding the frame button 22 is described to be executed in the SW fluctuation pattern, but in the second control example, the effect of catching a fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is performed. Is different in that it is executed. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving directions of the fish and the net displayed in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed by the SW fluctuation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98A to 98B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 98A, the fish and the net are displayed, respectively, and the characters "press the button according to the fish !!" are displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish is in the net of the net, a display mode is displayed so that the player can obtain the fish. Further, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of multiple scales is displayed, and the color can be changed by one square up and down at high speed (for example, a speed of one square in 0.5s) (for example, from blue to red). Variable) is displayed. There are 6 scales, and the characters "GET" are displayed on the 3rd and 6th scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed while the color of the scale is variable, the display timing is such that the fish is in the net.

On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move and be displayed in the movement direction set in the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but when the position of the indicator scale "GET" is changed, the display is controlled so that the fish is located in the net.

As a result, the player can more easily understand the timing of pressing the frame button 22 by relying not only on the positional relationship between the fish and the net but also on the timing at which the indicator changes, and participates in the production of the SW fluctuation pattern. This makes it easier to play games. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish is displayed at the position of the net by the indicator. In the present embodiment, the indicator is always displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the indicator may be displayed when the expectation of the big hit is high and not displayed when the expectation is low. With this configuration, by displaying the indicator, the expectation for the big hit can be raised, and further, the big hit can be produced in the state where the player can catch the fish.

FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to the capture effects A to C when the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is off. Has been done. The capture effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing when the fish is in the net, and is set as an effect capable of catching the fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the timing (period) during which the fish enters the net is shorter than the period required for the frame button 22 to be pressed and the frame button 22 to be detected. It is set to be impossible to capture.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the net and the fish coincide with each other, the display is shifted. That is, it is configured so that the effect that the fish was caught is not displayed. However, not limited to this, when the fish and the net match, the frame button 22 is configured to be momentarily excluded from the valid period (for example, the matching display period of 0.2 s) and controlled. It is possible to reduce the load of controlling the display by shifting.

The capture effect A and the capture effect D are set in a display mode in which the fish and the net each move laterally at random positions at high speed and are displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions and are displayed. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net move diagonally to random positions and are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, it is set to be easier to select than when the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out of alignment. Therefore, the player can predict the hit / fail determination result based on the moving direction between the fish and the net (that is, the type of capture effect). Therefore, it can be expected that the player is expected to produce the SW fluctuation pattern.

In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is determined by lottery based on the selection of the SW fluctuation pattern, but the selected SW fluctuation pattern may be set in advance. .. Further, in this control example, the movement direction between the fish and the net is configured to be set according to the type of the capture effect, but the movement direction is not set in advance and the display position is updated every time the display position between the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display position of the fish and the net currently displayed, the movement direction and the movement distance may be determined and displayed by lottery. With this configuration, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and the player can be given a fresh effect.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example differs from the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 54 (b)) in that the long press flag 223 g and the long press counter 223 h are deleted. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing in the second control example>
In the control process in the second control example, the contents of the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed from those in the first control example. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The second control example differs from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 99, S1520). do. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the capture effect, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is the SW variation pattern (variation pattern of the capture effect). When it is determined that the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f obtained from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the selected SW fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 97 (c)). S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). When this display command is output to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW effective time set in the SW fluctuation pattern is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i (S1825). After that, the process of S1826 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1821 that the variation pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the process of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is set (S1826). When it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating that the SW is pressed is set (S1829). The SW effective time is reset to the initial value of 0. As a result, the SW effective time is reset at the same time as the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by changing the plurality of effects. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 in the process of S1826 (S1826: No) or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process. To finish.

In this control example, the frame button 22 can be pressed once in the capture effect, but the setting is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 may be set a plurality of times.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. In the second control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) is the display setting process for the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed to 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (FIGS. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are deleted. Is different in that each is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether or not the command indicating that it is related to the SW effect has been received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to a display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), a display command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like.

When it is determined that the command related to the SW effect is received in the process of S2414 (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect processing (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect processing (S2415). In the SW effect processing, a process of setting the corresponding display data and the like is performed based on the SW effect (capture effect) command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and the command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed. ..

In the SW effect processing (FIGS. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command indicates any of the capture effects A to F, which is the SW effect (S2911). If it is a command indicating any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), the display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2911 when it is determined that the command does not indicate any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the displayed capture effect content is set (S2914). After that, this process ends.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, the position between the net and the fish of the capture effect is fixed at the displayed position and a certain period of time (in this control example, the initially set SW effective time elapses). It will continue to be displayed until the same period as the period up to) has elapsed. After that, if the fish can be stopped at the position inside the net, a display mode (for example, the character "Get !!") indicating that the fish has been caught is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish stops at a position other than the position in the net, a display mode indicating that the fish could not be caught (for example, the characters "catch failed !!") is displayed.

Next, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. It differs in that it is. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the process of S3005 is executed, the SW effect display setting process is executed (S3030). The SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether or not the capture effect is being displayed is the period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW effective time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. Indicates whether it is a period.

If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), the indicator determines whether the color of the scale corresponding to "Get" is variably displayed (S3032). When the indicator is displayed with the Get scale variable (S3032: Yes), display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). After that, this process ends. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set according to the display coordinates of the fish data. With this configuration, the indicator can match the display position of the fish and the net according to the timing when the scale of Get is variable. In this control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed on Get is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button is timely. It is set so that a fish can be caught by pressing 22. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period during which the indicator is displayed on Get is set shorter than the period required for pressing the frame button 22, and capture is performed no matter when the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

In the present embodiment, the capture possible state and the capture impossible state are set by changing the time when the indicator is changed, but the capture effect D to F is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is captured at the timing of capture. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that they cannot be caught.

Further, in this control example, the capture success is configured to notify the jackpot of the success / failure determination result, but the capture is not limited to that, and the player is given points to be used in the game as a game privilege by the capture success. , A URL that can download a standby image used in a mobile phone, a three-dimensional code, or a special background image may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect of succeeding in capturing even if the result of the hit / miss judgment is incorrect. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

In the process of S3032, when the scale other than the position corresponding to Get is variably displayed (S3032: No), the indicator determines whether it is the timing when the next graduation is variably displayed. (S3034). When the indicator determines that it is the timing when the next scale is variably displayed (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data in which the fish is displayed and the coordinate data in which the net is displayed are selected, respectively. It is set by moving each in the movement direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same process as in S3035 is executed again (S3037). As a result, when the indicator is not the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display position of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the process of S3034, if the timing of the indicator scale is not variable (S3034: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3036 that the position data do not match (S3036: No), this process is terminated. ..

In this way, although the movement direction set in the capture effect is determined, the display position of the fish and the net is randomly set by lottery, so that the display of the fish and the net can be irregular. .. On the other hand, the variable indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly variably displayed.

In this control example, the display position of the fish and the net is configured to be determined by lottery every time the display position is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position is set in advance in the display data table like the indicator. You may.

Further, in this control example, the movement direction of the fish is defined by the type of the selected capture effect, but the movement direction is not limited to this, and the positions of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In the first control example, the timing at which the special symbol starts to change when the reserved ball is not stored is fixed regardless of the gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). However, in the second control example, the processing is executed so that the timing of the fluctuation start differs depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, the weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53 (c)) in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The weight counter 203u is for counting the delay time for delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol when the number of reserved balls is 0 in the case of the time reduction (in the case of the probabilistic game state or the time reduction game state). It is a counter.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the weight counter 203u, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). When the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, the weight counter 203u is decremented and updated by 1 each time the time saving / medium fluctuation processing (FIGS. 106, S231) is executed.

In this way, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time reduction and the change of the special symbol is not executed, then the game ball enters the second winning opening 640. Even if it does, the start of the fluctuation is delayed by 1 second. Here, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the game ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640. In this case, it becomes easy to win two or more game balls in the open state once. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter in one opening with 0 reserved balls, if the change start of the second special symbol is set immediately at the timing when the first game ball enters. , The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined as 0, and it becomes easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. As a result, the efficiency of the game is deteriorated even though the time is shortened, which makes the player uncomfortable.

However, in the characteristic configuration of this control example, the timing of the fluctuation start is delayed by 1 second by the weight counter 203u, so that if the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are continuously played. When the ball is entered, the problem that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is determined as 0 and the first fluctuation is started can be suppressed.

In this control example, the delay time of 1 second is set when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the state where the fluctuation is stopped during the time reduction, but the delay time is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and it is possible to delay until the timing when the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. .. Further, the delay time may be set according to the timing at which the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set. In this case, even with a short delay time, it is possible to effectively determine that the number of reserved balls is 0 and suppress the selection of a relatively long fluctuation pattern. Further, it is not limited to the time saving, and is not limited to the second winning opening 640.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying until the number of reserved balls is 3 or more.

Further, in this control example, the change start of the second special symbol is delayed in the time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability change game state may be used, and the timing of delay is determined by lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to delay when the number of reserved balls is a certain number or less (for example, one). Further, it is not limited to the second special symbol, and may be configured to be delayed by the first special symbol. In addition, by delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol at the end timing of the jackpot game, it is configured to suppress the problem that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined to be insufficient and the fluctuation is started. May be good.

In this control example, the timing of the start of fluctuation is configured to be delayed, but the time is not limited to this, and the fixed time of the special symbol during fluctuation (the period from the lapse of the fluctuation time to the determination of the stop of fluctuation). That is, when the period from when the symbol is fixedly stopped until it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 in FIG. 64) is set variably, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored. , The period may be set to be long.

Further, in this control example, it is configured to delay when the time is shortened, but at the time of the start of the change of the second special symbol, the period until the start of the change is set each time (the holding ball is determined and the start of the change is set). It may be configured to set a long period (time until). Further, regardless of the gaming state, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the timing for setting the variation start of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Control processing in the third control example>
Next, the control process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 106. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 105, S111). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIGS. 105, S111) in the third control example, the processes S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 64, S104) in the first control example. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is shortened (S231). It is determined whether the player is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state. If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S231: Yes), the time saving and medium fluctuation processing is executed (S232).

Here, the time-saving and medium-time variation processing (S232) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving / medium fluctuation processing (S232). In the time-saving and medium-time variation processing (FIGS. 106 and S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S311). When the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0, it means that the delay time is already set for the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is subtracted by -1 to set (S312). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 in the process of S311 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, which is the reserved ball number of the second special symbol, is 0. (S313). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 105. After the process of the time-saving medium variation process (FIG. 106, S232) is executed, the process of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u has a value larger than 0 (S233). If a counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

In this way, since the change start of the special symbol is not set until the weight counter 203u is executed, it is suppressed that the change of the second special symbol is determined to be 0 to 2 on hold and executed during the time reduction. can. In this control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is set to 1 second, but the time is not limited to this, and is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction (3 seconds in this control example) 5. It may be configured to set the seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to control so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to 3 or more and then the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected as a state in which the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and the game efficiency is deteriorated during the time reduction.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the fourth control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped by shaking and fluctuating) a plurality of times during the fluctuation period of one special symbol with respect to the first control example, and the special symbol is changed a plurality of times. As if, it differs in that the effect of making it look like a pseudo is set. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect is a change of 1 special symbol, by temporarily stopping the 3rd symbol at least once and displaying the change again, as if the change of 1 is a plurality of changes. It is a production to show to the player.

FIG. 107A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is variablely displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is started, the velocity is variable (dynamic display) at which the symbol can be identified from the start of the variation, and then the variation is difficult to identify the type of symbol. It becomes a high-speed fluctuation which is a fluctuation of the speed (dynamic display), and as shown in FIG. 107 (b), a temporary stop display is suddenly displayed. FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode when the temporary stop is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the third symbol is slightly shaken up and down and fluctuates, and the character is displayed on the front side thereof. The still symbols are displayed so as to overlap each third symbol. This still symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is visibly configured. Further, the stationary symbol is attached and displayed at the timing of the fluctuation display immediately before the temporary stop from the state of high-speed fluctuation before the temporary stop of the third symbol. Specifically, when the display is performed at high speed, the third symbol is displayed semi-transparently and the background image can be seen through. Then, immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically 0.5 seconds before, the semi-transparent display is canceled and the display is displayed in an opaque state. A still symbol is attached and displayed at the display timing. It should be noted that this stationary symbol is not displayed in a swaying manner like the third symbol, but is displayed still, so that the player does not temporarily stop, but whether the third symbol has been fixedly stopped. Can feel like.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is a fixed stop, and it is possible to make it appear that the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

In this control example, the static symbol is the same symbol for each third symbol, but may be a different symbol or shape. Further, the brightness of the third symbol displayed on the back surface may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static symbol. By displaying in this way, the stationary symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to think that the stationary symbol has been fixedly stopped.

In this control example, only the character is displayed as the static symbol, but the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 in the case of 7 symbols) is attached. It may be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the stationary symbol can be made to have the illusion that it is the third symbol, and the player can be made to appear as if the player has stopped.

<Control processing in the 4th control example>
Next, the control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) with respect to the first control example. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. It differs in that it is. Since the same processing as that of the first control example is executed for other configurations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), which is one of the processes in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340), will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying a symbol is executed when a pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing for temporarily stopping the symbol is set in advance in a variable pattern, and is automatically set by defining the display data table.

In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is being performed. When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). If it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the temporary stop of the symbol (S3043: Yes), the still image data is set at the symbol position where the temporary stop is performed (S3043). After that, this process ends.

Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap with the symbol information in the display data table. In this way, by executing the still image data to be superimposed and displayed at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data can be changed by operating the frame button 22 of the player, and other lottery and other lottery can be performed. It can be changed and set according to the notice display, etc., and a wide variety of still images can be created.

In this control example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a number of times preset in the fluctuation pattern, and then the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the super reach display mode is displayed. Will be done. A still symbol is temporarily stopped on the third symbol to be temporarily stopped, and the color of the still image is green in the first temporary stop so that the player can identify the number of times the temporary stop is performed. The third time is set to yellow, the third time is set to red, and the fourth time is set to gold. Actually, when the still image is displayed without shaking and fluctuating, it is easy for the player to recognize it as the number of times the fluctuating display is actually performed instead of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that when a stationary symbol that informs the number of consecutive times is displayed due to the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols, the variation display of the special symbol after that will be a super reach variation display. Can be done. In this control example, the higher the number of temporary stops, the higher the expectation of a big hit (it is easy to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit), and four temporary stops are executed. It consists only of a pseudo-continuous production in which the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. Therefore, when the red still symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that the still image is displayed even in the next fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the still image is set to be hidden at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. As a result, the player can easily set the fluctuation of the third symbol.

The still image is not limited to the character of this control example, and may be a character or may be displayed in a size that hides the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol on the back surface. Since it is actually a temporary stop, the third symbol on the back surface may be configured to be visible through a still image so that the third symbol on the back surface can be slightly seen to be shaken and fluctuated. ..

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, it is determined whether or not the probability-changing gaming state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid (probability-changing solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. It was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the big hit game state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which the game ball can enter during the small hit game. It differs in that it is configured as such. Other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In this control example, for each of the above-mentioned control examples, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower center instead of the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900 is on the right instead of the first variable winning device 65. The difference is that the second winning opening 640 is provided at the lower part, the second winning opening 640 is provided at the upper part of the V winning device 900, and the electric accessory 640a is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Although details will be described later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning opening in each of the above-mentioned control examples. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that the retention member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-mentioned control examples, and the other points are the same structure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the differences between the game boards 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right portion of the game board 13.

A normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is provided at the lower right of the game board 13 in this control example, and a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 enters by free fall. The second winning opening 640 is provided at a position (lower left position) where there is no need to do so. Further, nails are provided from the left portion to the upper right portion of the second winning opening 640, and these nails are provided at a predetermined interval (interval at which the game ball cannot pass) to the above-mentioned normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. It is provided in. Further, the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (another solenoid 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured so that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a is opened. Further, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened, if the opening operation time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the game ball is being guided, so that the game ball becomes the first. 2 The ball will not enter the winning opening 640.

In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. Although it is configured not to enter the 640, the configuration is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be made by covering it with a case body or the like. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as changing the distance between the nails so that the game ball can pass through. Further, the case body may be a case body in which the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the second winning opening 640 are integrated, or a case body in which only a part thereof is integrated may be used.

Further, a shielding member interlocking with the electric accessory 640a is provided to close the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retracted state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (advanced state). The second winning opening may be opened. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

Further, it is configured so that whether or not the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 enters the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Not limited to this, a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through a passage port, a game ball that has simply been launched, etc.) goes to the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured so that whether or not to enter the ball is changed.

A V winning device 900 is provided under the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like described above. The V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out to the player. Is done. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes through the V winning switch 900e3 described later, a big hit game is given.

An opening / closing door 900f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side is provided above the V winning opening 900a as in the first control example described above, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened. The game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed, so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. The details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. The opening / closing door 900f1 is opened / closed by a V inlet solenoid (one of other solenoids 209z) (not shown).

The upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 and the rolling surface of the game ball on the upper part of the V winning device 900 are provided with a configuration for suppressing the momentum of the rolling game ball (not shown). Specifically, a material with a high coefficient of friction (eg rubber, a material with irregularities) is used to reduce the rolling speed, or a structure in which a rolling game ball collides is used to reduce the rolling speed. There is a structure that guides the ball in the depth direction of the board and lengthens the rolling distance. This is a configuration for collectively entering a large number of game balls into the V winning device when the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened.

On the left side of the V winning device 900, a first winning opening 64 is provided in the lower center of the game board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower part of the first winning opening 64. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in a jackpot game (for example, 16 times in the case of a jackpot C), and a predetermined number of times a game ball enters the first variable winning device 65a. Game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning device 65, the reference numeral is changed from 640 to 65 for the same part. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2, which will be described later, will be described. do. In the V winning device 900 in this control example, the retention member 900n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example, and the V switch 900e3 is replaced with the probability change switch 65e3. Is different in that is provided, and is the same in other respects. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, the reference numeral is changed from 65 to 900 for the same part. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 113A is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2. In this control example, the retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2. With this retention member 900n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 900h3, which is the region to which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 side by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 and is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

The retention member 900n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The retention member 900n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retention solenoid 209a (not shown). The retention member 900n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination region 900h3 by advancing forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) to the rear, the game ball staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

Here, in the V winning device 900, the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened during the small hit game, so that the game ball can enter the ball. Further, the staying member 900n is closed during the small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V winning device 900), and after the small hit game is completed (no new ball can be entered into the V winning device 900). After a predetermined time has elapsed (after 3 seconds in this control example), the opening operation is performed. That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is limited to one game ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 even if the switching member 900h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 from becoming excessive.

The game ball that has flowed down into the special discharge flow path 900e2 will pass through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability change game is given based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3, but in this control example, the jackpot game is given based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 (). See S4603, S4607 of FIG. 138 and S4904 of FIG. 142, which will be described later).

In this control example, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 are limited to one ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the number of game balls to be limited may be appropriately changed by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 900e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2.

In this control example, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 900k is not operated. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 900k is operated, so that the design cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

When the flow path solenoid 900k is not operated, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence by the retention member 900n newly provided in this control example, and the operation is the same as that of the first control example described above. Is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The difference in electrical configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are one. The difference is that the part and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and the staying solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. However, it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 114, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

This control example differs from the first control example described above in that a staying solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the retention solenoid 209a is used to operate the retention member 900n in the V winning device 900. Further, the solenoid described in each of the above-mentioned control examples (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) is treated as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

As other changes, ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113, and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added). It will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, each counter in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 115. This control example differs in that a small hit type counter C5 is added in addition to each counter in the first control example described above.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this control example), reach the maximum value (99), and then return to 0. The small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is special at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the small hit type is selected based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Since the other counters are the same as those of the first control example described above, they are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. ..

The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116 (a)). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Further, in the RAM 203 in the present control example, in addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the big hit start flag 203v1, the big hit medium flag 203v2, the small hit start flag 203w1, the small hit medium flag 203w2, the big hit type value 203x1 when passing V, and the V flag It has at least 203x2 and a normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y. In this control example, the probability change flag 203e is unnecessary, so the illustration is omitted.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in order to determine whether it is the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process 2. (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and is set to off when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the jackpot start timing (see S4702 in FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to execute the process according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot middle flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. This jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to on when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing, similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S4704 in FIG. 140), and when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the start timing of the small hit. Is set to off (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to for determining whether or not a small hit is in progress in the small hit control process (S4807 in FIG. 141), and is turned off when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

The jackpot type value 203x1 when passing through V is used to set the jackpot type to be given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. The big hit type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is acquired in the V-passing process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138). The big hit type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared in the small hit end process executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

The V flag 203x2 is a flag for memorizing that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hit. be. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 in the V-passing process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referred to in the small-hit end process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142). It is set to off after being referenced (S4906 in FIG. 142).

The normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the time saving game is the first time. This normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is set to be turned on when the jackpot type is C at the timing of the jackpot end in the jackpot control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the normal symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Details will be described later, but when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is on (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), the electric accessory 640a is used for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that many game balls can enter the second winning opening 640 after being opened (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a small game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). It is set so that the ball can enter (S644 in FIG. 136).

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIGS. 117A to 117C are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117D schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining and the first random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (b). Judgment value) is set in the table. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 399", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 398", and if it is "1 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "399", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the big hit of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 400. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit of the first special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "3/400".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the random value that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random values is 400, and it is a jackpot. Since the total number of random numbers is 11, the probability of becoming a big hit of the second special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398, the probability of small hits of the second special symbol is "398/400".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, it is a normal symbol hit. It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

As in each control example described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is released for a predetermined time.

Here, as described above in FIG. 112 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in this control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (another solenoid 209z) (not shown). The electric accessory 640a acts to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is released for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time reduction is in progress, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time reduction is not in progress. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a hit when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be won in the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second winning opening even though the time reduction is not in progress (the jackpot with the time reduction is not revealed).

Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball fall area a (a in FIG. 112) that receives the game ball that has naturally fallen on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not fall naturally. It has a game ball guidance area b that guides the game ball that has rolled from the game ball fall area a to the second winning opening 640.

That is, the length of the game ball guidance region b (distance at which the game ball rolls) is at least the distance at which the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the time reduction. By designing it to be longer and shorter than the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.5 seconds) during the time reduction, the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a is surely placed in the opening operation during the time reduction. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a from winning the second prize opening by guiding to the second winning opening 640 and performing the opening operation when the time is not shortened.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIGS. 118A to 118C are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b.

The first winning type selection table 202b selects the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type, and the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for the purpose (see FIG. 118 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), at the time of a big hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected, and when the value is "0 to 49", the big hit C (16R time saving big hit) is selected. In the case of "50 to 99", the jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), at the time of a big hit based on the second winning opening 640, the big hit C (16R time reduction) regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"). Big hit) is selected.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and when the value is "0 to 1", the small hit C (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "2 to 99", a small hit E (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49" at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit C (V can pass) is obtained. It is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", a small hit D (V can pass) is selected.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game by the small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operating, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operating. The game ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits to which a big hit is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hit E is a small hit to which no big hit is given.

Further, in this control example, the type of the big hit given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the big hit given after the small hit C is the big hit C (16R time-saving big hit), and the small hit The jackpot given after D is configured to be jackpot D (16R time saving no jackpot).

In this control example, the type of big hit to be given after that is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 in the subsequent small hit game. You may do it. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass through the V winning switch 900e3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)). At least the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 is specified. Since the probabilistic change state is not provided in this control example, the deviation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, since the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4, the fluctuation pattern during the time saving is defined as shown in FIG. 120 (d). Specifically, during the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is short deviation (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the case of deviation, and long / small hit (10 seconds) in the case of small hit. In the case of a big hit, it is stipulated that it will be a long big hit (20 seconds). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern in the case of a deviation during the time reduction may be a long deviation (10 seconds) and the same length as the small hit.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V inlet passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m (see FIG. 124 (b)). .. Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the detection port 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). This V-entrance pass counter 203j is referred to when setting an effect command for display in the V-pass process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the effect command for display is set in the V-pass process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. This round number cumulative counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and the continuation determination counter 223m receives a jackpot end command. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), so that the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is displayed as the third symbol. It will be displayed on the device 81.

The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used for determining whether or not the big hit or the small hit is continuous, and is used for determining whether to initialize the round number accumulation counter 223k described above. This continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when the small hit start command of the small hit C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is subtracted by 1 when the small hit start command of the small hit D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). This continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144), and if the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, when the small hit D is consecutive twice, the jackpot and the small hit are small. It is determined that the continuation of the hit is completed, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In this control example, the gaming state is divided into a special drawing 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1) gaming state (left-handed game) and a special drawing 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 2) gaming state (right-handed game). Be done. Special figure 1 The game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is launched aiming at the first winning opening 64. If the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64 and the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot C, the winning to the second winning opening 640 is performed after the end of the jackpot. An easy time-saving game state (described as being in the time-saving in FIG. 122) is given. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state, a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in order to aim at the second winning opening 640 arranged on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is jackpot D, the special figure 1 gaming state is performed again because the time-saving gaming state is not given after the end of the jackpot. Further, in this control example, there is also a route in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit type is the small hit C, the big hit (V prize) is obtained. In this case, after the big hit is over, the game shifts to the time-saving game state.

Next, the lottery of the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 is set with a higher probability of a jackpot that is in an advantageous state for the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. ing. In this control example, it has a hold storage function for holding and storing the right to receive a lottery based on the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is changing (specifically, the change display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 after the stop display is displayed, the right to draw a lottery based on the winning is currently changing. It can be put on hold (holding upper limit = 1) until it is confirmed and displayed.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in the short-time and medium-time games in the special figure 2 game state will be described. In this state, the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above in FIGS. 117 and 119, most of the lottery contents of the second special symbol are distributed to small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot (V prize) via a small hit in order to increase the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time saving game state is given again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the small hit type is small hit D, the time-saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, so that the process shifts to the non-time-saving game in which the time-saving game in the special figure 2 gaming state is not given.

Next, the flow of the jackpot in the non-time-saving medium-sized game in the special figure 2 game state will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol stored on hold by the hold storage function of the second special symbol is executed. As a result of the lottery, if the small hit type is small hit C, the time-saving game is given after the end of the big hit, so that the game shifts to the time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, the time-saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no hold memory, so that the game state is shifted to the special figure 1 game state. Since this state is in a non-time saving state, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory.

In this control example, in the second special symbol lottery, a symbol hit whose jackpot type is jackpot C may be selected.

That is, it is designed so that the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is an advantageous lottery for the player, can be performed at least twice by using the above-mentioned hold function. Unless the small hit D is selected twice in a row, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 gaming state.

FIG. 123 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning the second winning opening 640 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example, and FIG. 123 shows a small lottery result based on winning the second winning opening 640. It is a hit, and the case where the big hit (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2 is explained, and the case where the lottery result based on the prize to the second winning opening is the big hit (design hit) is explained. be. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. 123 (a). Based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the second special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing. The time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow path solenoid 900k, and the retention solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on (the stagnation solenoid 209a). FIG. 113 (a). In this state, since the player shoots a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900, a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 900, one of which is formed by the retention member 900n. It becomes a stagnant state (900h in FIG. 113), and other game balls usually flow down the discharge flow path 900e1. The time of the small hit effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

Next, the flow of small hit control by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, the V inlet solenoid is turned off and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed among the above-mentioned plurality of solenoids. By closing the opening / closing door 900f1, a new game ball will not be won in the V winning device 900. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the retention solenoid 209a is turned off, the retention member 900n is in the open state (retracted state), and the game ball retained by the retention member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. Since the set time t2 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball existing in the V winning device 900 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1 when the set time t1 elapses, the V winning is set when the set time t2 elapses. Only the game balls retained by the retention member 900n flow down the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the device 900. Next, the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

By driving the staying solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference in this way, even if the game ball is stayed by the staying member 900n within the movable range of the guiding piece 900h2, the guiding piece 900h2 and the staying member 900n Since the game ball stagnated by the solenoid can be reliably flowed down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the game ball, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 has passed through the V winning switch 900e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening. Will be done.

Next, the differences from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123 (b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the V winning device 900 is not operated. That is, after the fluctuation control of the first special symbol by the main control device 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. During that time, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

Here, the relationship between the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (a) and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (b) will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the total of the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set in 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started regardless of whether the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning hit or the symbol hit, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a). ) Is to match the timing of opening, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect executed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. Can be done.

Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of the time-saving game in this control example. The variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol is on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery hold number of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved display area to be shown is provided below the third symbol display device 81 with a comment area for guiding a comment display and a right-handed game, and a production area in the center where a story is developed as the game progresses. Has been done. FIG. 124 (a) shows that since the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640, the display indicating that the variable display area has not changed is displayed, but the hold display area has no hold. The display is shown, and the current mode name and right-handed notification are displayed in the comment area.

FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The difference from FIG. 124 (b) is that the variable display area is displayed indicating that the second special symbol is changing, and the branch road is displayed in the effect area. In the production area, the character moves deep into the cave during the second special symbol change, and when the game ball wins in the second winning opening 640, that is, the holding area is displayed as having a hold. , Go on one side of the fork. In this way, by allowing the story displayed in the production area of the third symbol display device 81 to be developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640, the game ball during the second special symbol change. It prevents the launch of the second special symbol and ensures that the second special symbol is on hold. In this control example, control is shown in which one of the forked roads is selected and advanced based on the indication that there is a hold, but the player may proceed on the forked road each time the game ball wins a prize in the second winning opening. May select a path to be taken by operating a predetermined operating means, and control to proceed to the selected path due to the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 generated after the selection is completed. .. Further, the color tone and design of the forked road may be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol in the change and the lottery result of the second special symbol held. By doing so, the player can participate in the development of the story progressing in the production area, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the production suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is possible to further prevent the ball from stopping firing.

Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the fluctuation is stopped when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. A door is displayed in the effect area, a definite display indicating a small hit is displayed in the variable display area, a display indicating that there is a hold is displayed in the hold display area, and a right-handed notification display is displayed in the comment area. When this effect image is displayed, the V winning device 900 is open on the lower right side of the game board surface, so a comment is displayed to aim at the V winning device 900 by hitting right, and the V winning device is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, the effect of the character destroying the door is executed in the effect area. Further, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol of the change and the lottery result of the second special symbol held.

Even if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above in the explanation of FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed as changing. Therefore, by making the display display area smaller or by providing it in a place other than the third symbol display device 81, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. be able to.

Further, if the fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is off is set to 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), the effect image in which the door does not come out may be displayed at this timing.

Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900, and FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image in the effect area. A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area of. The types of characters appearing from inside the door will be described later in FIG. 127. When a monster appears, the process shifts to the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 (a) is a production image during a big hit. Since the effect image during the jackpot is mainly a battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the payout display during the jackpot (not shown) are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is a production image when a monster is subdued in a battle production during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, there is at least one more big hit (a state in which the lottery result of the second special symbol on hold is a big hit or a time-saving game is given after the big hit). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) is a production image when a monster is defeated in a battle production during a big hit. When a monster is defeated in a battle production, it is in a state of shifting to a normal game state (a state in which there is no hold of the second special symbol and a time-saving game is not given after a big hit). In addition, after displaying the effect image that is defeated in the battle once, a so-called revival effect may be provided such that the monster is revived and subdued. In addition, if the V prize is not won during the small hit, the door will not open (not shown).

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the character appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125 (a) will be described. FIG. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 is “0” in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2).

In FIG. 127 (b), both the lottery result of the second special symbol and the reserved lottery result of the second special symbol are small hits with time reduction (in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2, the small hit type counter value C5 is “0 to 0 to”. It is displayed in the case of 49 "). In other words, it will be a premier production in which a big hit will be given at least three more times.

The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above, but as shown in FIG. 123, any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol starts the jackpot state. Since the same timing is set and the timing for displaying the type of jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the player is given a lottery for the second special symbol. It can make it difficult to grasp the result.

Further, by displaying FIGS. 124 (b) and 125 (a), it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball, to surely obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and to win the V prize device. Can be surely done.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, for the first control example described above, the point of executing the V inlet passage processing and the V passage processing in the timer interrupt processing, the special symbol variation processing in the timer interrupt processing, the start winning processing, and the normal symbol It differs in that a part of the variable processing is changed and that the big hit control processing 2 and the small hit control processing are executed in the main processing. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the fifth control example. In each of the timer interrupt processes S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109, each process of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example, respectively. Since the same processing as is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process of S104 (see FIG. 129), the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), and the normal symbol variation process of S106 (see FIG. 136) executed in the timer interrupt process. ), The V inlet passage process of S140 (see FIG. 137) and the V passage process of S141 (see FIG. 138), which will be described later, are performed, which is different from the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 129, the difference from the first control example of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes S240 to S244 are different from the first control example. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol variation start processing 2 of S240 is performed in place of the special symbol variation start processing of the first control example (see S213 and FIG. 64). Details of the special symbol change start processing 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132.

The processing of S241 to S242 is performed in place of the processing of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit after the lapse of the fluctuation time (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the big hit type. (S217), the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to 0, and this process is terminated.

By setting the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 to ON in the process of S241, whether or not the jackpot start timing is set and whether the jackpot game is in progress in the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 140) described later. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

Further, by setting the time saving middle counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time saving game is configured to end when the big hit game is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

In the process of S243, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S243 that the lottery result is not a small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, since the lottery of each special symbol is configured to be a small hit, the small hit game is started when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244. It is configured to do. Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol change start processing 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S4001). If the time is not shortened (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time reduction is in progress (S4001: Yes), the time reduction variation start process (S4003) is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal variation start process (S4002) and the time-saving variation start process (S4003) executed in the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). After that, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S4102). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)). If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined by referring to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a big hit (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4104). After that, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4105), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). After that, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4108), and this processing is terminated.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the time saving fluctuation start processing (S4003) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a time saving variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time reduction start processing (S4003) differs from the above-mentioned normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) in that the display mode for time reduction and the variation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. The time-saving variation pattern determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 120 (d)) as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hit start setting process, which is the process added in the above-mentioned fifth control example, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C or D (S4302). When it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the processing of S4303 to S4306 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4307.

When the small hit type is C or D (S4302: Yes), the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set in the big hit type value when passing through V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

On the other hand, when the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set in the big hit type value when passing through V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

When the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

In this start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to 405 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. When the processing of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S406). In this S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

Next, the processes of S407 to S408 are executed. When the processing of S408 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in this control example, the upper limit of the number of pending numbers in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, so that this is configured.

In the process of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processes of S410 to S411 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (S412). In this S412, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored in the same manner as the processing of S406 described above.

When the processing of S407, S409 or S412 is completed, the look-ahead processing 2 (S440) is executed and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead process 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 shows a look-ahead process 2 (S440) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 134) instead of the look-ahead process of S413 executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the look-ahead process 2, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (S4401). If there is no new prize (S4401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize (S4401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S4402).

If it is determined in the processing of S4402 that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), it is based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. As a result of the lottery, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). In this normal symbol variation process (S106), since the change in the lottery probability in the lottery of the normal symbol is eliminated with respect to the above-mentioned first control example, the process of S640 is executed instead of the process of S608 to S611. The difference is that the processes of S641 to S644 are executed instead of the processes of S616, and the change in the fluctuation time depending on whether or not the time is shortened is eliminated (the processes of S619 and S621 are deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes S601 to S607 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. When the processing of S607 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant.

When the processing of S640 is completed, the processing of S612 to S615 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. In the processing of S614, when it is determined that the time is being shortened (S614: Yes), and in the processing of S615, it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

If it is determined in the process of S641 that the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), it is the case that the first normal symbol variation processing is executed in the given time saving game. 2 In order to make the winning opening 640 win a lot of game balls, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "5 seconds x 1 time" (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and during that time, the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, when the first normal symbol change processing in the time-saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640, and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

When the processing of S642 is completed, the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is set to off (S643), and the process proceeds to the processing of S620.

On the other hand, in the processing of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the initial normal symbol variation processing is executed, and it is based on the second winning opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times". (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only a part of the game balls passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. It will be guided to 640. Therefore, when the normal symbol variation processing is executed after the first time in the time-saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, but can enter the V winning device 900 arranged below the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time-saving game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900.

Further, during the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning opening 640. It is not the time, but the time when a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 can enter. As a result, even if the game ball is not fired at the time of the first execution of the normal symbol variation processing, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the second special symbol) is performed during the subsequent execution of the ordinary symbol variation processing. The number of reserved balls in the lottery) can be accumulated up to the upper limit (1) in this control example. On the other hand, during the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 may enter the second winning opening 640. It's an impossible time. As a result, when the time-saving game is not given, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is not allowed to enter the second winning opening 640.

When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is terminated. As a result, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed at 3 seconds regardless of whether or not the time is shortened.

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and the time reduction function may be provided in conjunction with the time reduction function of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation time may be set to 2 seconds during the time reduction. Further, in this control example, the only condition for terminating the operation of the electric accessory 640a is the passage of time, but in addition to this, the electric accessory is subject to a predetermined number of balls (for example, the upper limit of the number of reserved storages). The operation of 640a may be terminated. By doing so, when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first normal symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second and subsequent normal symbol time saving operations are started. Therefore, at the start of the small hit game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being in the open state for a long period of time, and the small hit game can be smoothly performed. ..

Next, the V inlet passing process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

In the V entrance passing process (S140), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that a small hit is in progress (S4501: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process ends. If it is not in the small hit (S4502: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S4503) and this process is performed. finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

Next, the V-passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S141). This V-passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

In the V-passing process, first, the jackpot type value at the time of V-passing is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot C (S4602: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot D (S4606). If it is determined in the process of S4606 that it corresponds to the jackpot D (S4606: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. When the processing of S4603 or S4607 is completed, the V passage command is set (S4604), the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4605, the time saving game is ended by setting the time saving middle counter 203f to 0.

If it is determined in the process of S4606 that it does not correspond to the jackpot D (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. In this control example, it is the small hit C or the small hit D that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and the big hit C or the big hit D is set as the big hit type value at the time of passing V. Only if there is. Therefore, if the V-passing process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 900e3 is executed when the jackpot type value at the time of passing V is not jackpot C or jackpot D, it is illegal. It is considered that the game ball is won in the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the processing of S4608, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the main process in the fifth control example. In this main process, the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the small hit control process (S1041) is executed after the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed. It differs in that it is done.

The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example, respectively. The explanation is omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first variable This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65.

In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4701, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to off (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this process is terminated. ..

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S4704). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S4704: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4704, if the special symbol is in the big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S4707). .. After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, total) are inserted in the first variable winning device 65. 10) If a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the jackpot ends.

In the process of S4710, when it is the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit middle flag is set to off (S4712).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S4713). In the processing of S4713, if it is determined that the jackpot is C (16R time saving big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is set to ON. Then (S4715), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, if it is determined that the hit is D (16R time saving no big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the effect of jackpot termination. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S4710: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small hit control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed and V This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to off (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display small hit start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the small hit.

When the process of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON (S4804) based on the opening scenario, the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and the present process is completed.

The opening scenario referred to in the processing of S4804 is set in the above-mentioned small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 133), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid. The 900k open scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened, and the game ball can be entered into the V winning device 900. On the other hand, only in the small hit C or D in which the flow path solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which a big hit is not given.

Further, by starting the operation of the retention member (the residence solenoid 209a is turned on) in the process of S4805, one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination region 900h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S4801 when it is not the timing to start the small hit of the special symbol (S4801: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S4806). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S4804, if the special symbol is not in the small hit (S4804: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4806, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S4806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V inlet is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10) have passed in the V winning device 900). When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that the closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V inlet solenoid is set to off in order to close the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 (S4708: Yes). S4808), the retention solenoid 209a is set to off in order to terminate the operation of the retention member (S4809), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the above-mentioned V inlet closing condition is satisfied. As a result, the small hit end process (turning off the flow path solenoid) can be executed after the operation of the retention member 900n is completed, so that the game ball retained in the distribution destination region 900h3 is transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. You can surely enter the ball.

In the processing of S4810, when it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to off (S4811), the small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is released. Clear the scenario (S4813) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4810, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S4812) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S4812). This small hit end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to off (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to on (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to off (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not on (S4902: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 900e3 to the small hit game ball, so a big hit is given. In order to end without doing so, a small hit end command is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4909.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the effect of jackpot termination.

When the processing of S4906 or S4907 is completed, the value of the jackpot type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared (S4908), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the command determination process 2 (S1530) executes a process based on the reception of a hit-related command. The other parts are the same, and the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

In the command determination process 2 (S1530), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are executed as in the first control example. After that, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and S1619. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1619.

In the process of S1619, as in the first control example, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1619), and then the present process is terminated.

Here, the hit-related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S1643). This hit-related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S5002), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIGS. 125 (b) and 127) suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5003). In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S5006: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether or not the continuation determination counter 223m is 0. (S5008).

In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the jackpot D is executed twice in succession, and it is the timing when the continuation of the jackpot ends. The round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5008 that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the big hit end command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S5010).

In the process of S5010, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S5006: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S5011), and then the small hit to be started is started. It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the process of S5012, if it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), then the big hit game based on the big hit C is given, so that the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D is determined. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5012, if it is determined that it is not a small hit C (S5012: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit D (S5014). In the process of S5014, if it is determined to be a small hit D (S5014: Yes), then a big hit game based on the big hit D is given, so that a continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D is given. 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5015) to end this process. If it is determined in the process of S5014 that it is not a small hit D (S5014: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the small hit start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S5016).

In the process of S5016, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S5016: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S5017). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5016, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

In the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the V passage processing described later in order to determine the number of game balls entering the V winning device 900 during the small hit game.

When the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set (S5020) in order to execute an effect based on the ball entering the V winning device 900 during the small hit game (see, for example, FIG. 125 (a)). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S5021).

In the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V pass process is executed in order to execute the process based on the entry of the V winning device 900 into the V winning switch 900e3. (S5022), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the V-passing process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S5022). This V-passing process (S5022) is a process executed when it is determined that a V-passing command has been received in the hit-related process (see FIG. 144).

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game that has been executed is the small hit C (S5101). In the process of S5101, when it is determined to be a small hit C (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit on hold (S5102).

In the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is no hit in the hold (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the hold ball, but a big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3. be. Here, the jackpot C is a jackpot with a time reduction, and the probability of becoming a small hit C or D (that is, subsequently becoming a jackpot C or D) in the time reduction game is "397/399". Therefore, in order to execute the 2V effect, which is an effect suggesting that the probability that the big hit game is given for two consecutive times is high, the display 2V effect command is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106.

The display 2V effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 2V command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given for two consecutive times.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a hit on hold (S5102: Yes), a jackpot C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3, and a jackpot or a small hit based on the hold ball is given. If it is done. That is, there is a high probability that the big hit game will be executed two times in a row, and the big hit game will be executed based on the small hit in the hold. Therefore, there is a high probability that the big hit game will be given three times in a row.

Here, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), it is an effect suggesting that the probability that the jackpot game is given three times in a row is high (for example, FIG. 127 (b). ) Is executed, a display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball is not sufficiently fired during the small hit game, and the game ball enters the V winning device 900. If the sphere is not enough. In this case, in this control example, in order not to display the effect suggesting that the probability that the big hit game is given three times in a row is high, the process of S5105 is executed and the process shifts to the process of S5106. As a result, even when the number of prize balls based on the winning of the V winning device 900 is small, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to put the game ball into the V winning device 900.

The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be given three times in a row. do.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the small hit game being executed is not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit on hold (S5107). When it is determined in the process of S5107 that there is a hit on hold (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

In the process of S5108, if it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), the big hit game based on the passage of V is executed, and the small hit C is given based on the hold ball (that is, 2). There is a high possibility that a continuous jackpot game will be given). Therefore, in this case, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109) in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be given three times in a row. The process proceeds to S5106.

On the other hand, in the process of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the passage of V is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the hold ball (that is,). 1) is given a jackpot game). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute the effect suggesting that the jackpot game is given for two consecutive times, the display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106.

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that there is no hit on hold (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the jackpot game based on V passage is executed, so that the jackpot based on V passage is not executed. In order to execute the effect suggesting that the above has been obtained, the display V effect command is set (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5106.

The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display V command, the display control device 114 gives the third symbol display device 81 an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the fact that the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is completed, the V inlet passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the hit-related command processing is executed when the hit-related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2302). This command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and performing processing according to the determined command.

In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Next, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S2440).

If it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the process of S2440 (S2440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2441), and the process returns to the process of S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command in the processing of S2440 (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the processing of S2401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2441) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. This hit-related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command processing (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a hit start command for display (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to the process of S5203.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of the jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S5202), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the timekeeping counter 233h (S5303) based on the jackpot start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5305). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the process of S5201 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5203. When the processing of S5201 or S5202 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to the process of S5205.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the operation on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S5204), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5205. When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

If it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command in the process of S5205 (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third symbol display indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S5205, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

When the processing of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). If it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display in the process of S5207 (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command process (S5208). This small hit start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and has an effect of suggesting the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command process (S5208), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). After that, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5605). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5207 that there is no small hit start command for display (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

When the processing of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the processing of S5209 (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5211.

Here, the details of the small hit end command process (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command process (S5210). This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a small hit end command has been received, and is an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command process (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the small hit end command for display has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

When the processing of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). If it is determined in the processing of S5211 that there is a V entrance passage command for display (S5211: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command process (S5212). This V entrance passage command process (S5212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and the V winning device 900 is entered during the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect based on the entry of the game ball on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5805), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V inlet passage command in the process of S5211 (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5213.

After finishing the processing of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a display 3V effect command (S5213). If it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command in the process of S5213 (S5213: Yes), the 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S5215.

Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing the 3V effect command process (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display 3V effect command has been received, and is 3V (big hit) at the end of the small hit game. Is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that (3 times is continued) on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, as described above, the display 3V effect command is given a big hit and becomes a big hit C when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, the 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5905), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5213 that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5215.

After finishing the processing of S5213 or S5214, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). If it is determined that there is a display 2V effect command in the process of S5215 (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to the process of S5217.

Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing the 2V effect command processing (S5216). This 2V effect command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display 2V effect command has been received, and is 2V (two large hits) at the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that the third symbol display device 81 is to be continued.

Specifically, as described above, the display 2V effect command is given a big hit and becomes a big hit D when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the 2V effect command process (S5216), first, the 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6005), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display 2V effect command in the process of S5215 (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5217.

After finishing S5215 or S5216, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). If it is determined that there is a display V effect command in the process of S5217 (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5217, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed by the hit-related command, so this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing (S5218). This V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display V effect command has been received, and a V prize is won at the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3) on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command process (S5218), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6105), and this process ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the machine is shifted to a state in which it is easy to receive a lottery for the second special symbol (time-saving gaming state) based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. 2 A game that provides a big hit by opening the V winning device 900 based on the lottery result of the special symbol and passing through a specific area (special discharge flow path 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing through the V winning switch 900e4). It is equipped with.

The pachinko machine 10 having such game performance is provided with a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

First, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 does not open in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), and the game board 13 is not provided. It was provided only on the right side of. Secondly, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball is easily won in the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Even so, a time (0.2 seconds) in which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a in the normal game state is opened. Thirdly, the game ball falling area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally falls) into the electric accessory 640a and the game ball that has been rolling from the game ball falling area a are accepted and guided to the second winning opening 640. It is necessary to provide a game ball guidance area b that is possible and that a ball that has naturally fallen from the game board 13 does not buffer, and the game ball rolls around the game ball guidance area b to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, if a so-called small hit, which is not a big hit but is opened by the V winning device 900, is selected, a special discharge flow provided with the V winning switch 900e4. In order to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the road 900e2, a switching member 900h and a staying member 900n are provided. It is a composition such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

Further, in the fifth control example, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 are used from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball. Although it is arranged as (specific winning opening 65a), the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be changed as appropriate. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to a game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during a right-handed jackpot game, a normal symbol start opening (through) The first variable winning device 65 may be provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path rather than all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the launched game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, so that it can be applied to various devices provided downstream thereof. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order. In order to prevent more reliably, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path is opened to open the ball entry or passage port of various devices provided on the downstream side. It is good to close it. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices other than the proper game order, it is based on the detection signals from various switches that detect the game ball provided in each device and the current game state. It is good to notify. Regarding the content of the notification at that time, if a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly related to the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormality notification is made, and in the normal game state, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is passed. If it is detected, by changing the status notification and the urgency of the notification, the game hall clerk can quickly detect the situation that may be disadvantageous to the game field. It should be noted that the abnormality notification is a notification that the sound is louder than the game volume and the signal is output to the outside, and the status notification is a notification that indicates a normal striking method on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device. Conceivable.

Further, in this control example, from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 (specification). Although it is arranged as a winning opening 65a), the V winning device 900 is placed above the second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a) in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. May be provided. With this configuration, even if the electric accessory 640a variably operates and is in the open state during the small hit game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. Further, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 during the small hit game, so that the electric accessory 640a operates variably during the small hit game. This can be suppressed and does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900.

Further, in this control example, the game ball into the V prize device 900 at the time of a small hit game is used by using a configuration in which the flow of the game ball is delayed on the rolling surface of the game ball on the upper part of the V prize device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1. In addition to this, for example, it is a rotating body equipped with 10 pockets for one game ball in the V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13. The V-pocket is provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and the game ball that entered the 10th ball at the start of the small hit game is stored in the V-pocket. A space for storing may be provided, and the game balls may pass through the V winning switch 900e3 for the first time when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space. Further, a control and a configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V winning device 900 by utilizing the advance / retreat operation of the electric accessory 640a.

By setting a limit on the number of time reductions of the normal symbol, the game ball may be smoothly entered into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. Specifically, the normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the electric accessory 640a operating time (for example, 2 seconds) during the shorter time than the fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit. The range in which the total time (for example, 5 seconds) is reduced may be set to the number of time reductions (in the above example, the number of time reductions is 4). With this configuration, since the time-saving game of the normal symbol is completed at the start of the small hit game, it is possible to shorten the time for the electric accessory 640a to variably operate during the small hit game. Further, when the small hit game is started, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a may be prohibited, and the control may be performed to change the electric accessory 640a to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). However, when the reserved memory of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control is changed to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). May be done. In addition to the control of internally ending the time-saving game and returning it to the normal game, the time-saving of the normal symbol here means that the fluctuation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times in the time-saving game of the normal symbol. After a predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set long only for the first predetermined number of times, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set short. , The concept includes all of the control of the state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a hold storage function (special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol. Since this reserved memory is an important configuration for maintaining the playability of the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with a plurality of technical configurations for storing the reserved memory.

First, the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time-saving game state is developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of the second special symbol (FIG. 120 (d)), in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit, is made longer than the variation time of the normal symbol of 3 seconds (S620). It is a composition such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to store the reserved memory. Regarding the second configuration described above, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of whether or not the time-saving game is in progress, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time-saving game is other than during the time-saving game ( It may be set shorter than (during normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the normal game. That is, in general, in the pachinko machine, the time saving function is canceled during the big hit game, and the normal symbol fluctuates with the fluctuation time based on the normal game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the electric accessory 640a does not operate until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the normal game elapses at the maximum, and the game ball may be inserted into the second winning opening. I can't. During that time, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is confirmed and a big hit occurs via the small hit, the problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is a feature of this control example, cannot be stored. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-mentioned times.

In the above-mentioned contents, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the small hit game (V) in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit. The total time (until the detection of the game ball by the winning switch 900e4) may be set longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. This is because the game is in a short-time game during the small hit game. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hit game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining a ball flowing down to the special discharge path 900e2 in the V winning device as in this control example. If, by any chance, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time-saving game, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may start, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the right. It is advisable to make a highlight so as to make a hit, or to give voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big hits and misses, but all of them may be distributed to small hits. By doing so, the reserved memory of the special symbol always becomes a big hit via the V winning device, the speed of the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) that is opened when the jackpot game is played and the V winning device 900 are provided in different configurations, but both functions are V winning. It may be provided in the device 900. In that case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is made to flow down to the normal discharge flow path as shown in FIG. 113 (a) by using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, the cost can be reduced, and the space can be saved. Further, the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900 may be used to determine whether or not to give a time-saving game after the big hit game is completed. In this case, a time reduction is given when the game ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. The switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be predetermined based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, or the switching member 900h is regularly moved at regular intervals to discharge the flow. You may try to switch routes. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to give a probability variation in combination with the technical configurations of the first control example to the fourth control example.

Further, the discharge flow path in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be configured to be three or more depending on the number of functions. Further, the switching member for switching each discharge flow path is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be any configuration as long as the flow path can be switched.

In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate, and the ball is ejected. You may set a jackpot with less time (for example, 2 rounds) and no time reduction. By doing so, it is possible to provide a playability (so-called time saving fall function) in which the time saving ends without acquiring a large amount of balls. Further, in this control example, when a game ball is inserted into the V winning device 900 which has been opened during the time-saving game, a big hit is always made, but the game is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

By using each of the above configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which the number of balls is reduced and the time reduction ends or a pattern in which the time reduction does not occur to the result of entering the V prize device 900 during the time reduction game, so that the jackpot game is acquired. When this happens, the player can be happy and sad.

Further, in this control example, the determination of whether or not to grant the time-saving game after the end of the big hit is determined based on the small hit type (the big hit type in the note). The time reduction is not always given after the end of the jackpot, and if a big hit is made during a non-time reduction game, the time reduction is always given after the end of the big hit, depending on the current game state (whether or not the time reduction is in progress). , Control may be performed to determine whether or not the time reduction is given after the end of the big hit. Even with such control, whether or not to give a time-saving game after the big hit is set based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol.

The number of cards that can hold and store the lottery of the second special symbol may be set as appropriate, and various games can be played by changing the number of cards that can be held and stored in the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hit lottery probability of the second special symbol. It is possible to have sex.

<Variation example of the fifth control example>
Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 153. In this modification, the number of second special symbol lottery that can be held and stored is increased (for example, four), and the probability of hitting special 2 based on the second special symbol lottery is reduced (for example, 1/6) pattern (Fig.). It is a pattern that reduces the value C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value of 117 (C) and increases the loss). By doing this, there is no guarantee that the special 2 hit will occur twice, but since it is possible to receive more lottery for the 2nd special symbol, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the 1st special symbol, it depends on the lottery result. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring a series of villas, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by pre-reading the result of the lottery stored on hold, it is possible to provide a blissful effect for the player, such as a four-series villa final effect.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged on the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, and when the game is played so as to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area (right-handed), the open / close door 65f1 is in the closed state. In some cases, the difference is that the game balls are configured to roll up to about 12 balls on the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed with respect to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (a part in which the detour member 660 is arranged). The detour member 660 is inserted into the opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 with screws in a state where the flow path through which the game ball can flow protrudes to the front side of the game board 13. .. The detour member 660 is composed of a flow path wall portion 660a facing the game board 13 in the front-rear direction.

The flow path wall portion 660a is composed of a front side flow path wall portion 660a1 and a rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2, and the front side flow path wall portion 660a1 and the rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2 are on the bottom surface. It is partially connected and is integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portions 660a1 are arranged with three wall portions protruding rearward at intervals of two or more game balls (2.5 game balls in this control example). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three protruding wall portions on the front side, and the distance between the wall portions is configured in the same manner as the front side wall portion.

In the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2, the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and further, the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 It is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass between them. The bottom surface of the detour member 660 is configured with a slight downward inclination from right to left, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, the bottom surface is closed and the game ball detours over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The road member 660 rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. Further, a connecting portion 660k connecting the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom surface connects each wall portion from each protruding wall of the detour member 660 entrance portion and the front side wall portion 660a1 to the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is formed like this. Since the connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to form a step even when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is reduced.

The rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated at the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball meanders from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball rolls on the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be increased in number. In the detour member 660 in this control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is composed of 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls are inserted in the front-rear direction in the first detour flow path portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion protruding from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion protruding from the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is composed of flow paths. Since five similar flow paths are formed in communication with each other, a maximum of 12 game balls can roll in the detour member 660.

As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the game ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, and more. You can enter the game ball in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is rotated by rotating the rotating piece 650a each time the game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 65e1. The opening piece 650i to be closed is gradually moved in the direction of opening the special discharge flow path 65e2 (to the left in FIG. 155). Then, when the game ball passes through the nine balls, the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the open piece 650i is moved to a position where the game ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state where nine or more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660, the game balls can be made to flow down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, and it is possible to give the player a probability change game state. As a result, the player detours many game balls before the start of the jackpot so that more game balls are rolled on the detour member 660 at the timing when the jackpot game starts. The game can be played so as to fire at 660. Therefore, even in the jackpot game in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, the player can be made to consume a large amount of game balls to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the amusement shop side. Furthermore, even a short-time jackpot game can increase the interest.

Next, the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 155. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example is provided with a flow path opening device 650 in place of the flow path solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h and the switching member 65h. Is different.

Here, the details of this flow path opening device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the flow path opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an opening piece 650i that opens and closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the opening piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b that rotates and winds the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b thereof. It is composed of a rotating piece 650a for rotating the rotating drum 650b and a movable solenoid 650c for moving the restricting piece 650d for restricting the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i is configured in a door shape so as to close the upstream opening of the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable to the left and right. Further, one end of the spring wire 650h is attached to one end side of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of an extra-fine stainless steel wire, and is made of a coiled spring in the middle portion. The coil spring 650h is always attached so as to urge the open piece 650i in the direction of closing the special discharge flow path 65e2. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotary drum 650b, and the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding the spring wire 650h (rightward rotation direction in FIG. 156) to cause the spring wire 650h to rotate. The open piece 650i wound around the rotating drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

The rotating piece 650a is always arranged so as to project from the normal discharge flow path 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure that rotates the rotating drum 650b only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and the rotating piece 650a is rotated downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) spring wire 650h. After rotating in the direction, it is configured to rotate and return to the position (position shown in FIG. 155) before abutment with the game ball by the urging force applied to the rotating piece 650a. When the rotating piece 650a is inverted and returned, the rotating drum 650b is configured so that only the rotating piece 650a rotates without rotating. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, the rotating drum 650b is attached with stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding to the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 10). The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b at intervals of 90 degrees, respectively. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to abut on the restricting piece 650d, and when the restricting piece 650d abuts on any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotary drum 650b winds up the spring wire 650h. It regulates the rotation to. On the other hand, when the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h, the restricting piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by abutting the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 are on the left side of the restricting member 650d. With the stopper members e1 to e4 positioned on the left side while allowing the wire to be located (see FIG. 156), the rotation in the direction opposite to the winding direction is restricted.

As a result, when the game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a and the rotating drum 650b is rotated 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are regulated members. The rotating drum 650h is held in the rotated position by being restricted by the rotating position by the 650d. When the next game ball flows down the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the same operation is repeated, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In this control example, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, and the regulating member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). As a result, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the regulating member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the urging force of the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is in the closed position. It can be slid and moved.

Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a probability variation based on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the probabilistic game is given. In addition, the rate of granting the probabilistic game can be changed by the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

In the present embodiment, the rotating piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge flow path 65e4, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The open piece 650i may be configured to be movable. With this configuration, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters, the open piece 650i is in the open state, and it can be easily configured to flow down into the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it can be configured so that the probability change is surely given by entering 10 more balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open pieces 650i are configured to be in the open state by winning nine prizes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by any other number. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, when the game ball wins the first variable winning device 65, the sprocket is rotated, and in the tenth game ball, the winning opening provided in the sprocket can be won. It may be configured to face a suitable position.

<About the 7th control example>
A seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the continuous chance effect described later is executed, which is not in the first control example described above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

First, the continuous chance production will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the order of change of the special symbol is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 and the reserved balls are stored. It is configured to be. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight reserved balls including the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selected for each reserved ball. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), even the type of the variation pattern selected (short deviation, long deviation, reach, super reach, or special reach) can be discriminated. Has been done.

In the example in which the reserved balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth reserved ball is stored. In this case, the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, shows a state in which the continuous chance effect is set. The details will be described later, but if the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a reserved ball is generated is super reach or special reach, whether or not to execute continuous chance production by lottery. Is determined. When it is decided to execute the continuous chance effect, the number of times to execute the continuous chance effect is determined within the range of the reserved balls already stored. This number of times is determined by the number of times including the reserved ball determined to execute the continuous chance (in this example, the sixth reserved ball). For example, if the number of reserved balls is six as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of reserved balls is determined by lottery up to six times.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 159 (a), an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. In FIG. 158 (a), the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), and the continuous chance effect is produced from the variable display of the special symbol for the first reserved ball. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variation display of the 1st special symbol when the execution of is set.

In the effect in which the execution of the continuous Chan effect is set, the effect in which the symbol trembles is executed while the special symbol is still stopped at the previous variation display at the start of the change of the special symbol. After that, as a background image, the characters "Continuous chance !!" are displayed at the same time as the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbol ha indicated by the five "black circles" displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the number of reserved balls currently stored. Here, the reserved symbol ha1 is the second reserved ball held as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is the third reserved ball, the reserved symbol ha3 is the fourth reserved ball, and the reserved symbol ha4 is reserved. The fifth ball and the reserved symbol ha5 correspond to the sixth reserved ball.

In FIG. 158 (b), the special symbol is stopped after the fluctuation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (the variation corresponding to the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) has elapsed. The display mode when displayed is shown. In this continuous chance effect, when the continuous chance effect is set for the fluctuation with respect to the next reserved ball, in the previous continuous chance effect, a combination of a specific main symbol called a chance eye (in this control example, "341". ") Is configured to be displayed. The chance eye is set with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the jackpot (displayed in doublets), and notifies that it is out of order. By displaying this chance eye, the player can recognize not only that the lottery result is out of order, but also that the continuous chance effect is continuously executed for the next fluctuation. Then, the characters "Continuous chance effect !!" displayed on the background image are continuously displayed even when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and are displayed over the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol.

FIG. 159 (a) is an example of a variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) to 158), which is the second variation of the reserved symbol shown in FIG. 157 (a). It is a figure shown. In FIG. 159 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is a reserved ball (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157 (a)) from which the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a). The display mode when the reach state is reached after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation is shown. Here, since the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is correct is out of order, the stop display is made in the out-of-order combination as in the combination of the special symbols shown in FIG. 159 (b).

Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As already described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be super reach or special reach are stored based on the winning information of the first to fifth reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or special reach is stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball is the super reach), the continuous chance production ends once with the reserved ball. After executing the setting to make the effect appear as if it was done, one or more consecutive holding balls among the holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball) It is set for the reserved ball that executes the latent effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the latent effect is an effect that is displayed so as to tremble in a state where the symbol in the stopped state of the previous special symbol is stopped at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. .. Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance effect, after the stop symbol is displayed by shaking it, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance effect is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation, but in this latent effect, the stop symbol is displayed by shaking. After that, even if the fluctuation is started, the background display indicating that it is a continuous chance effect is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this way, the player can expect that the continuous chance effect will be started by displaying the stop symbol tremblingly. It should be noted that the same effect as the latent effect may be selected and executed even when the execution of the continuous chance effect is not decided or when the normal special symbol is changed. Therefore, even if the latent effect is displayed, the player also recognizes that the continuous chance effect is not always executed by the effect of the special symbol corresponding to the subsequent hold, and the continuous chance effect is produced by the latent effect. It is possible to play a game in anticipation of the execution of.

In FIG. 157 (a), among the third to fifth reserved balls, the fifth reserved ball is processed by S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Up to (third to fifth reserved balls), the execution of the latent effect is decided (assumed to be decided). As a result, in the variation of the special symbol for the third to fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player may have missed the final fluctuation in the continuous chance production with the second reserved ball, but the continuous chance production may be started again, or in fact, the continuous chance production is hidden. You can expect that it will continue just by doing it. Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is executed again in the change of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball.

In this control example, no matter how many times the latent effect is continuously executed, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect will be executed thereafter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the latent effect is continuously executed three or more times. In that case, it may be configured so that the continuous chance effect is always executed after that. With such a configuration, when the latent effect is executed, the player can be interested in the continuous number of times, and there is an effect that the interest can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (b), the number of reserved balls to be established after the reserved balls that triggered the decision to execute the continuous chance effect is determined, and the number of the reserved balls is set to the maximum. , The case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six reserved balls are established, and the winning information command output when the sixth reserved ball is established causes continuous chance production from the third reserved ball. It shows the case when the execution is decided. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case where the digestion of the reserved ball progresses from the state of FIG. 157 (b) and the third reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first reserved ball. It is the state shown. In this state, the holding ball (FIG. 157 (c)) in which the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined at the timing when the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to fluctuate. In), the number of times the latent effect is executed is determined by maximizing the number of reserved balls established after the fourth reserved ball). Here, the latent effect is executed a continuous number of times in which the above-mentioned latent effect is determined for the change of the reserved ball that changes after the change for the fourth reserved ball is completed.

As a result, the player continues the continuous chance effect because the latent effect is executed even after the final change in the continuous chance effect (in this control example, the change of the special symbol for the fourth reserved ball) is completed. You can expect that you are doing it. Furthermore, since the latent effect is configured to be executed within the range of the reserved ball established at the start of the first continuous chance effect, the super reach or special reach that is a big hit to the established reserved ball. It can be expected that the fluctuation is memorized and the continuous chance effect or the latent effect is executed.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the super reach or special reach to the reserved ball established at the time of the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect (the reserved ball stored after the reserved ball of the final change of the continuous chance effect). If there is, the reserved ball before the change is set to execute the latent effect, and the continuous chance effect is executed again by the change of the super reach or the special reach, so that the player can perform the hidden effect more. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance production when displayed. Further, in this case, the continuous chance effect may be started with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball that becomes the special reach or the super reach.

Regarding the continuous chance effect, in this control example, the notification mode is configured to be displayed in the background, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific character may be displayed and the background color is different from the normal time. It may be varied to a different color, or it may be configured to output a type of BGM or a special sound effect. Further, the chances displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be other combinations, and are variably displayed as, for example, a symbol of the character "continuation" which is not a normal symbol. It may be configured as such, or it may be variably displayed on a symbol such as a character, and as appropriate, a special mode of deviation different from the symbol indicating the deviation in normal time (doublet). It may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from the display of).

Next, the electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only the differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in this control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c), and the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example will be described first with reference to FIG. 160. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of 113 will be described. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the continuous chance number table 222d and the latency number table 222e are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous chance number table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. The continuous chance number table 222d is different from the winning continuous chance number table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)), which is referred to when the winning / failing judgment result indicated by the received winning information command is a hit. It is composed of a continuous chance number table 222d (see FIG. 162 (b)) for the number of consecutive chances for deviation referred to in a certain case. The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining the execution or non-execution of the continuous chance effect, and determining the number of times when the continuous chance effect is executed.

FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous chance number table 222d for winning. In the continuous chance number table 222d for this hit, the continuous chance effect is not executed according to the current number of reserved balls, and the number of times determination counter 223n (0 to 198) described later is used for each execution number with the current number of reserved balls as the maximum value. ) Is set respectively. When the number of reserved balls is stored, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of "0 to 160" is set as a judgment value of the determination content for not executing the continuous chance effect. Therefore, a determination value of "161 to 198" is set as a determination value for one continuous chance effect. Here, based on the acquired value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, the determination content set to the matching determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the continuous chance number-of-times table 222d. Here, if non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. Further, when the number of consecutive chance effects is determined, the continuous chance effect is set for the execution of the first reserved ball. The number of executions set in the continuous chance number table 222d is the reserved ball that triggered whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the sixth reserved ball). Shows the number of reserved balls stored consecutively before it, including. For example, when a lottery for continuous chance production is executed for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) and the number of executions of four times is selected by the continuous chance number table 222d, three balls are executed. The continuous chance effect is started from the reserved ball of the eye, and the continuous chance effect is continuously executed until the sixth reserved ball.

Similarly, the determined value to be referred to is set from the continuous chance number table 222d according to the number of reserved balls when the winning information command is received. In this control example, the larger the number of reserved balls when the winning command is received, the easier it is to execute the continuous chance effect. Further, as is clear from the comparison with the continuous chance number table 222d for deviation shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the continuous chance effect is produced for all the reserved balls. Is set to a high probability of being executed. As a result, the execution of the continuous chance effect is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach for which the winning / failing determination result is a hit. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be easier to determine as the number of reserved balls increases, the continuous chance effect is more likely to be executed for fluctuations in more consecutive reserved balls, and the player can easily execute the continuous chance effect even in the case of deviation fluctuations. Can play games with high expectations for big hits.

As shown in the consecutive chance number table 222d for losing, even if the number of reserved balls is 6 or more, if the winning / failing judgment result is wrong, a maximum of 6 consecutive chances can be produced. The judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth continuous chance production is started, the player can recognize at an early stage that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit by continuing the continuous chance production once more. Therefore, it is possible to make people interested in the number of consecutive chance productions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the latent number lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent number lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the above-mentioned continuous chance number table 222d, the latent number lottery table 222e is a lottery opportunity for the continuous chance effect among the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of consecutive chance effects. It is determined whether the reserved ball to be super reach or special reach is stored in the other reserved balls other than the reserved ball (super reach or special reach reserved ball), and the super reach or special reach is obtained. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times to execute the latent effect with the reserved ball up to the reserved ball which became the lottery trigger of the reserved ball and the continuous chance effect when the reserved ball is stored.

Explaining with the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the sixth reserved ball is established, the continuous chance production of 6 times of execution is determined, and the continuous chance is determined by the first to sixth reserved balls. It is decided that the production will be executed. Therefore, when it is determined whether or not the first to fifth reserved balls have a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second reserved ball is a super reach or a special reach. Since it is a reserved ball, it is possible to execute a latent effect up to three times for the fifth reserved ball from the third reserved ball. Here, with reference to the latent number lottery table 222e, the table contents to be selected are set for each of the hit / fail determination results for the sixth reserved ball, and the latent number to be described later is set for each maximum latent number. A determination value corresponding to the determination counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), assuming that the hit / fail judgment result of the sixth reserved ball is a hit, the judgment value of the maximum number of latent times of 3 times is referred to in the contents of the hit table. Here, if the value of the acquired latency determination counter 223o is "0 to 50", the latency is 1 time, if it is "51 to 149", the latency is 2 times, and if it is "150 to 198", the latency is 3 Times are set. Here, when the number of latent times of two times is determined, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is not executed for the third and fourth reserved balls, and the above-mentioned latent effect is executed. Will be done. The continuous chance production is started again with the 5th reserved ball, and is continuously executed until the 6th reserved ball. The number of latent effects after the continuous chance effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) is also determined by the latent number lottery table 222e. It should be noted that the reserved balls (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) and the subsequent reserved balls (5 in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) that triggered the determination of the continuous chance production. If there is no reserved ball to be super reach or special reach in the 7th to 7th reserved balls), the table contents corresponding to the deviation of the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

In the latent number lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the latent effect is limited to a maximum of 3 times regardless of the number of reserved balls that can be produced. There is. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that when the latent effect is executed on the next reserved ball, the player will win a big hit in the subsequent continuous chance effect. Therefore, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive latent effects, and can improve the interest of the game.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number determination counter 223n, a latent number determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of the continuous chance effect. The number of times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to each predetermined cycle and updates the result. It should be noted that the effect counter 223f and the latent number determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set so that the update cycles are different from each other, and are configured not to be synchronized. The number of times determination counter 223n is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The latent number determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times the latent effect is executed in the continuous chance effect from the latent number lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly added and updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and is performed every predetermined cycle by the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is added and updated one by one. The latency number determination counter 223o is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be executed for each reserved ball when the continuous chance effect is executed. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, the data indicating the determined effect content is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is digested. The reserved ball that starts to fluctuate is shifted to the execution area. As a result, continuous chance production can be reliably executed.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up at the time of power failure, and is restored to the state at the time of power failure when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, continuous chance production can be continuously executed.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 161. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and the deviation (see FIG. 161 (b)). The probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is at least specified. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving gaming state is set in addition to this.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal). The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0 to 149" for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds) and "150 to 197" for various out-of-super reach (60 seconds) are out of special reach. "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

In this control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and the timing variation type counter CS1 in which the game ball wins is acquired in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even the fluctuation type selected at the time of winning can be determined before the fluctuation starts. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, when the variation type selected is different depending on the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach or the like is also used. By allocating the value of the counter CS1 to a constant value even when the number of reserved balls is variable, the variation type can be determined at the time of winning.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. In the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example, the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) with respect to the first control example. The difference is that the start-in process (FIGS. 66, S105) is changed to the start-win process (FIG. 165, S105). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example, the processing of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 is S250 to S252 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed to the processing of. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls having the holding order of 1 are stored by referring to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S251). The details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, when the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is won, the change of the special symbol is started in the winning order in which both are combined. There is. The maximum number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, which is the same as in the first control example. When a reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. As the winning order, the order in which 1 is added to the total number of winnings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, based on the fact that one reserved ball is digested (starts to fluctuate), the winning order is also decremented by 1 and updated.

In the process of S251, it is determined whether the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the holding area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order in which the change starts next. To. When it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next by the processing of S251 is the second special symbol (S251: Yes), the processing of S205 is executed. Since the processes of S205 to S207 are the same as those of the first control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S251, when it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the order in which the fluctuation starts next is the first special symbol (S252). When it is determined that the winning order in which the variation starts next is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processing of S210 to S212 is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is terminated. For other processes, the first control example will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of this start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIGS. 165 and S105) in the seventh control example, the process of S406 becomes the process of S420 and the process of S412 becomes the process of S430 with respect to the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example. The difference is that the look-ahead process (S413) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (S450). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the total of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added. The difference is that the information in the order of winning is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, in this control example, the variation type (short deviation, long) selected by the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of winning. It is configured to be able to discriminate between off, normal reach, super reach, and special reach) and notify the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command.

When No is determined in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the look-ahead process 2 is executed (S450). After executing the look-ahead process 2 (S450), this process ends.

The read-ahead process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S450). The look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) in the seventh control example is different from the look-ahead process (FIG. 67, S413) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S503 or S504 is executed, the process of S510 is executed. In the processing of S510, the fluctuation pattern is based on the lottery result (win / fail determination) based on the winning information (counter value) acquired in S503 or S504, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired. The variation type to be selected is determined from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result determined in S510 and the variation type is set.

As described above, in this control example, the selected variation type can also be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command. Therefore, in this control example, the continuous chance effect, which is a special effect straddling a plurality of variations, can be executed when the hold ball on which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed is stored by the voice lamp control device 113. .. In this embodiment, the main control device 110 pre-reads and determines the variation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning information command indicating the information of each acquired counter value is set by the voice lamp control device 113. Each data that can be discriminated may be set so as to discriminate the variation type and the like.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
With reference to FIGS. 167 to 170, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) is in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540), and the variation display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) is in variation display with respect to the first control example. The difference is that they are changed to the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example differs from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes S1650 to S1651 are added. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), the processing of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1650). When the winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), the winning information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

Here, the prize information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information processing (S1651). In this prize-winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). Whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set is determined when it is determined that the continuous chance effect for determining whether the information about the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is set (S1721: Yes). , End this process. In this way, while the continuous chance effect is set, it is configured so that a new continuous chance effect is not set, so that it is possible to suppress problems such as the effect being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. ..

If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). .. If the received winning information command is not a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number of times determination counter 223n and the latent number of times determination counter 223o are set. Acquire (S1724).

Based on the acquired number of times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of reserved balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to the received winning information command), the continuous chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (b)). (Refer to) Acquires (determines) information (number of executions or non-execution) regarding execution of continuous chance production. The information acquired in S1724 determines the number of times the continuous chance effect is executed, that is, whether the continuous chance effect is executed (S1725). If the execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined (S1725: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1726 that the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the reserved ball corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects becomes super reach or special reach. It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether or not the holding ball (excluding the holding ball that has received the winning information command (the holding ball that is the final fluctuation of the continuous chance effect)) is stored (S1726). Although not shown, when the winning information command is received, the data corresponding to the information indicated by the winning information command received in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball is stored as in the first control example. Will be done. With the digestion of the reserved ball, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and when the fluctuation starts, the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten.

If it is determined in the process of S1726 that the reserved ball to be the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the process of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball to be super reach or special reach (S1726: Yes), the winning / failing determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent number lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726. The number of hidden balls, which is the number of reserved balls stored before the reserved ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the reserved ball that is the super reach or special reach determined in, and the processing of S1723. The number of latency is determined from the acquired value of the number of latency determination counter 223o (S1727). After that, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed for each Ryukyu ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each reserved ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set corresponding to each of eight reserved balls, and for each reserved ball, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect, and the continuous effect. Data that can identify the re-entry of the chance effect is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to the area corresponding to the corresponding reserved ball each time the reserved ball is digested. When the continuous chance effect is completed, all the stored data will be cleared, so it can be determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is set depending on whether or not the data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, the post-latent setting process (S1750) is added to the variation display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1709 is executed, the post-latent setting process is executed (S1750). The subsequent latency setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the subsequent latency setting process (S1750).

In the post-latent setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined whether or not it is the earliest variation of the continuous chance effect based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1751). Here, it is determined whether the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the reserved ball that starts to fluctuate is the data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1751 that the start variation of the continuous chance effect is not (S1751: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect is (S1751: Yes), the information of the currently reserved ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). Regarding the acquired information on the reserved ball, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach is stored for the reserved ball that is stored after the final change of the continuous chance effect (S1753). If it is determined that the reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the reserved ball that is stored next to the reserved ball corresponding to the final fluctuation of the continuous chance production is super. The number of holdings up to the holding ball stored up to one before the holding ball that becomes the reach or special reach is determined as the maximum value (number of times that can be hidden) (S1754). The number of latent times is obtained from the latent number lottery table 222e based on the value obtained from the latent number determination counter 223o, the result of determining whether or not the reserved ball is a super reach or a special reach, and the number of possible latent times determined in S1754. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of latent times determined in S1755, the continuous chance production is determined. Here, from the reserved ball stored after the reserved ball for the number of latent times to the reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is set as the reserved ball for executing the continuous chance effect. After the process of S1756, the process of S1758 is executed.

In the process of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball to be super reach or special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latency number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final change of the value and the continuous chance effect. The number of latent balls is determined from the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of latent balls that can be held (S1757). After that, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of latent times is determined based on the data in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order.

In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755 to S1756 and S1757 (S1758). After that, this process ends.

In this way, even at the start of the continuous chance production, the latent effect and the new continuous chance production are set for the reserved balls that have been established from the time it is decided until the start, so that the player can have various continuous chances. You can entertain the production. Further, the continuous chance effect is an effect performed for the variable display of a plurality of consecutive reserved balls by pre-reading the determination result of the established reserved balls. As a result, when the continuous chance production is started, the player has a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach among the reserved balls that are established at that time, and the lottery result is not a hit. I have the expectation. Here, in this control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the reserved balls established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is expected to have more reserved balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to maintain expectations for the latent effect on the reserved ball after the end of the continuous chance effect.

In this control example, the latent effect is an effect that causes the symbol to quiver, but the effect is not limited to this, and a sound effect, a character display, or the like may be executed at the start of fluctuation or the like. Further, the pattern of the special pattern or the like may be changed to a pattern different from the usual one and displayed.

<8th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. The eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal board 261 has a accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a jackpot 1 terminal for indicating the state and type of the jackpot. Is provided.

Then, when the jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off at the time when the jackpot game is started. When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, when a jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery, no time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the jackpot game is started. Further, when a jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery / time saving no jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Further, regardless of these jackpot types, when the jackpot game is executed, the bonus continuous operation terminal is controlled to be turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the jackpot is hit by comparing the timing at which the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on. The type can be determined. As a result, the hall computer 262 can determine the jackpot type without providing the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (big hit F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Can be done.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is added to the first control example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples. In the following description, the differences from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it is clearly shown that the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is provided with the external output terminal board 261. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

An external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 in this control example. The external output terminal board 261 is provided with at least an accessory continuous operation terminal, a jackpot 1 terminal, and a jackpot 2 terminal.

The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the continuous accessory actuating device is operated and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed, that is, the period during which the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, it indicates a period other than that (big hit game). Is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game has started in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177), and in the process. It is set to off when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress. However, unlike the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time reduction available jackpot), and the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. It is set to on when passing through.

Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress in the process. If it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), it is further determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. In some cases (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal indicating whether the state of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for the player, a jackpot gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. If it is, it indicates that it is in an advantageous state for the player described above, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, it is not set to on at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time saving available jackpot), but is set to on when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Is to be done.

Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminals are determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). Further, in the processing, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), further. When the probability variation setting flag 203h is determined to be on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has ended (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

The external output terminal board 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal), and outputs signals from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. It is possible to receive. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262, and since they are already known configurations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a jackpot type for the first control example described above. Is different in that it is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

In this control example, unlike the first control example described above, the jackpot F, the jackpot G, and the jackpot H are provided as the types of jackpots. These jackpot types are the first hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that the jackpot F and the jackpot G jackpot H can be selected respectively, and the first hit type counter value C2. It is selected based on.

The details of the first type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value "0 to 33" of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value of the jackpot F, and "34 to 66" is used as the judgment value of the jackpot G as the judgment value of the jackpot H. "67-99" is set. In the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 65) executed by the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first type selection table 202f is displayed. , The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery available / time saving jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a becomes a jackpot that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. ing. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game is given after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery, short time available jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a enters the probability variation switch 65e3. It is a big hit that has never happened. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game will be granted. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery, time saving no jackpot), the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability variation switch 65e3, as in the above-mentioned jackpot G. Is. Further, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the time-saving game is not given, and the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot when the fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol variation processing of the main control device 110 (S216: Yes in FIG. 176), and the jackpot type is referred to. The opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on (see S217 in FIG. 176), is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and is referred to in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. It will be.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different in that the jackpot type storage area 203α is provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type related to the executed jackpot game, and stores the values corresponding to the jackpot types (big hit F, G, H). The jackpot type storage area 203α is set when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed by the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 176). See S260 in FIG. 176).

Then, when it is referred to in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 and it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and not the jackpot G (S7003: No in FIG. 177), the probability variation setting flag 203h When is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), the outputs of the V winning terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process that the jackpot type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 176), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). See S7004). Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot G, as in the case where the jackpot type is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, since the game ball does not pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3 and the probability variation setting flag 203h is not turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177), the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot The two terminals are never set on.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, if both the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G, while the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or a jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F, while if there is no V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can. It should be noted that the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may be compared to determine the jackpot type of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the game state of the game machine, the passing state of the game ball of the probability change switch 65e3, and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261.

FIG. 174 (a) shows a gaming state of the gaming machine, an output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and a passing state of the gaming ball of the probability change switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. , Is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals of the external output terminal board 261.

Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the off state. Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G in the gaming state of the gaming machine is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. .. After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the time saving state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off in the external output processing described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). Then, when the time-saving game is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, with reference to FIG. 174 (b), the gaming state of the gaming machine when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and the probability change switch 65e3. It is a timing chart which showed the passing state of a game ball, and the output of 1 jackpot terminal and 2 jackpot terminals of an external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started, as compared with the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed. The difference is that the signals of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when the V prize is won).

Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are in the off state. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output processing described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON based on the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (see S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, as in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation given after the jackpot game is completed. When the game is completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

When the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Since there is no such thing, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal remain off. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time-saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to remain off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

Next, a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 shows the game state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the passing state of the game ball of the probability change switch 65e3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. It is a timing chart which showed the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the terminal board 261.

FIG. 175 (a) is a timing chart when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F. It is a timing chart when a game is executed continuously.

First, a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (a). In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot of the jackpot G and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7002 and S7004). After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game is given, and the continuous operation terminal of the accessory and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game ends. Later, the time-saving game is given, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the jackpot 2 terminals are not set to off, and the on signal is continuously output.

Then, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot G becomes a jackpot again, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminals also continue. It will be set to on (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the big hit game to be executed again is completed, the time saving game is given, and the continuous operation terminal of the accessory and the big hit 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the big hit 2 terminal is set. It is not set to off, and the signal of on is continuously output. Then, the jackpot does not occur during the execution of the time-saving game, and when the time-saving game ends, the game shifts to the normal game state and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is continuously executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot of the jackpot H and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). (See), on the other hand, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not set to on and remain off (S7005: No in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time-saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to remain off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot G and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is output. It is set to on (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, the time-saving game is given, and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is the time-saving gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to off, and the output remains on. After that, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot F becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot 2 terminal continues. Will be set to on.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game is completed. When the jackpot game ends, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off (S7007 in FIG. 177), while the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game ends, so to the jackpot 2 terminal. Output is not turned off and remains on. After that, when the probabilistic game is completed, the game shifts to the normal game and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off.

As described above, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. This makes it possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, if both the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G, while the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or a jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F, while if there is no V prize (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can.

Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game.

When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game, the output is continuously turned on (the period during which the output is on) without being turned off. Therefore, it can be determined that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that a part of the special symbol variation processing and the external output processing is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 176, the details of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing (S104). In the eighth control example, as compared with the first control example described above, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit after the lapse of the fluctuation time (S216: Yes), the big hit type related to the lottery result is the big hit type storage area 203α. The difference is that it is configured to be stored in, and the other parts are the same, so a detailed description of that part will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation processing, first, the processing of S201 to S216 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S217) based on the big hit type, and the start of the big hit is set (S218). .. After that, the value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

When the processing of S260 is completed, the main processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed as in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is a process of transmitting to an audio lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to a value of each area of the RAM 203, or the like.

In the external output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001). In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (S7002). , S7003. The accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 is detected by the hall computer 262. As a result, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the processing of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on (S7003: Yes). S7004), the process proceeds to S7010. By the processing of S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, and the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot G has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating jackpot F or jackpot H and is not a value indicating jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the probability change switch 65e3, and it is confirmed that the probability change game is given after the jackpot game is completed. .. In this case, the process proceeds to S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010.

Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k operates during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262 is delayed from the continuous operation terminal of the accessory whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the jackpot based on the jackpot F is turned on. It can be determined that the game has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

On the other hand, if the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the game ball does not pass to the probability change switch 65e3 is executed. It can be determined that it was.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7005 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7010.

In the processing of S7001, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are sent. The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

After finishing the process of S7007, it is nextly determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined to be in the probability variation gaming state, and when the time reduction / medium counter is larger than 0, it is determined to be in the time reduction gaming state. In the process of S7008, if it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminal. On the other hand, in the process of S7008, if it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to the process of S7010.

By the process of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the probabilistic game or the time-saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off. The output of the jackpot 2 terminals is continuously turned on. On the other hand, when the probabilistic game or the time-saving game is not given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off.

In the process of S7010, another external output process is executed (S7010), and this process is terminated. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as a hold ball number command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 described above to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. .. As a result, the information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111.

As described above, in the eighth control example, if the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type of the lottery result. It is configured so that it can be used. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and then when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned on, and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the bonus continuous operation terminal is turned off.

As a result, three types of hall computers 262 that detect the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are provided by detecting the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. It is possible to determine which jackpot type the jackpot game is being executed among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game.

When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during a probabilistic game or a time-saving game, the output is continuously turned on (the period during which the output is on) without being turned off. Therefore, it can be determined that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

In this control example, the jackpot type is discriminated by the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type can be discriminated by the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal. May be good. Further, either one of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may not be provided, or a terminal for outputting the jackpot may be separately provided on the external output terminal board 261.

Further, this control example is not limited to the one described above, and a terminal of an external output terminal board 261 for outputting information related to other jackpot games may be provided. For example, the external output terminal board 261 may be provided with a V winning terminal that outputs an on signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent acts such as passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even during the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot H without the probability variation lottery. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The output of the terminal does not turn on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects the fraudulent act as if the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is assumed that the game ball has been inserted into the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fraudulent act. And can be notified.

Further, in the above-mentioned eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal is not provided and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type depending on the time difference.

Specifically, when the jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the time for the jackpot game (for example, 120 seconds). When the jackpot game of jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Turns off the output of the jackpot 1 terminal at the end. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time for the jackpot game, which is the time from the period in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). .. Further, when the jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, but is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

With this configuration, if the hall computer 262 determines that the output of the jackpot 1 terminal has been on for 120 seconds, it can determine that the jackpot game by the jackpot G has been executed. can. Further, if the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot F has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on for 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot H has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. In addition, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is set for each jackpot type, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on only for the on time specified at a predetermined trigger (for example, at the start of the jackpot). May be good.

Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to be turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. As a result, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but if the game ball is not entered into the specific winning opening 65a due to the fact that the game ball is not launched, the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, it cannot be detected that the jackpot is F. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability change switch 65e3 is performed even though the game ball is entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has not passed (in the case of jackpot H).

<9th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In the ninth control example, the above-mentioned eighth control example is provided with an external output terminal board 261 that outputs a signal according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, and continuous winning is performed to the specific winning opening 65a. The difference is that it is configured so that it can be detected.

Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a prize is won in the gaming machine. Will be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs, and the output is continuously turned on when the continuous winning is performed.

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated prize is continuously won by acquiring the signal of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal. Can be determined. Further, in the hall computer 262, the process that needs to be executed when the continuous winning is generated without calculating the acquisition result of the signal of the winning terminal and determining whether or not the continuous winning is generated. Is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is added to the eighth control example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples. For example, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal may be controlled according to the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, the differences from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those of the eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the 9th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 178, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different in that the winning period counter 203β and the continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the eighth control example described above. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting the period for outputting a signal to the winning terminal (winning output period). The winning period counter 203β is determined when it is determined that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, and the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more each time the external output process is executed (FIG. FIG. 180 S8008: Yes), subtracted one by one (see S8009 in FIG. 180). Then, when the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004: Yes in FIG. 180), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

As a result, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) based on the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting the period for outputting a signal to the continuous winning terminal. The continuous winning period counter 203γ is determined when it is determined that the game ball has been entered (winning) in the specific winning opening 65a in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 180). S8001: Yes), set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, and when the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more each time the external output process is executed. (S8010: Yes in FIG. 180) is subtracted by 1 (see S8011 in FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output of the external output terminal board 261 to the continuous winning terminal is set to off. If a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) again (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

As a result, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (2 seconds in this control example), while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a, the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 You can keep the output to on. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has elapsed, the output of the external output terminal board 261 to the continuous winning terminal is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the game state of the gaming machine and the signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when the jackpot game is executed. ..

A case where the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (a). FIG. 179 (a) shows the game state of the gaming machine when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and the continuous operation terminal, winning terminal, and continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261. It is a timing chart which showed the signal output from.

First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operating device is not operating, the accessory continuous operating terminal is off, and the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, the big hit game is started, and when the bonus continuous actuating device is activated, the bonus continuous actuating terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened / closed, and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a after the operation of the accessory continuous operating device, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is output for a predetermined time (in this control example). It is controlled to be on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the lapse of the winning output period (100 milliseconds) (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses, and turns off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the bonus continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to off, and the game shifts to the normal game (or the probabilistic game or the time-saving game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new winning ball during the continuous winning output period based on the winning ball will be described. FIG. 179 (b) shows the game state of the gaming machine and the outside when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new winning ball during the continuous winning output period based on the winning ball. It is a timing chart which showed the signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the output terminal board 261.

First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, and when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

Then, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the entry of the game ball, and the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) Is controlled to be on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the lapse of the winning output period (100 milliseconds) (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until the lapse of the continuous winning output period (2 seconds). (S8006: Yes in FIG. 180).

When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a game ball has newly entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). (See S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Further, the output of the winning continuation terminal is also reset (updated) so that the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) is turned on (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to off after the lapse of the winning output period based on the new ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and then continued after the lapse of the updated continuous winning period. The output of the winning terminal is set to off (S8007 in FIG. 180). If a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the updated (reset) continuous winning period, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal is continuously used. The output will be set to turn on.

When the jackpot game is completed, the bonus continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to off, and the game shifts to the normal game (or the probabilistic game or the time-saving game).

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously winning (winning) into the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. .. As a result, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without performing the calculation based on the previous winning information. This can reduce the processing load of the hall computer 262.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 9th control example>
Next, the control process of the main control device in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 180. The ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that a part of the processing is changed from the external output processing. Since the other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

The details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This is a process of transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the detection switch 65c1, it depends on whether or not the switch of the detection switch 65c1 is turned on in the switch reading process of the main control device 110. Determine.

In the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (S8002). 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) is set in the winning period counter 203β, and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the continuous winning period counter 203γ (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), when the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off, and the process proceeds to S8008.

If it is determined in the process of S8004 that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). If it is determined in the processing of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a. Since the game ball does not newly enter the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off (S8007), and the output of the continuous winning terminal is set to off (S8007). Move to processing.

If it is determined in the process of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8008 as it is.

Here, even when the ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, such as when the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a state other than the jackpot gaming state, the processing of S8005 is performed. Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is already turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off as it is. Since the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a only during the big hit game, the processes S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

As a result, it is not necessary to execute the processes of S8001 to S8007 in the game state other than during the big hit game, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, if the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, fraudulent activity or abnormality may occur. Therefore, an error terminal is separately provided in the external output terminal 261 for the error. By turning on the output of the terminal, it may be configured to detect fraudulent activity or error occurrence. It is not necessary to use the error terminal to detect fraudulent activity or abnormality occurrence, and a notification sound for notifying the error may be output, or a display suggesting the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may try to do it.

After finishing the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008). If it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the winning output period (100 milliseconds), the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is subtracted by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 in the processing of S8008 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the winning output period, not the winning output period, so the processing of S8009 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010). If it is determined in the processing of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) is set, the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is subtracted by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

If it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 in the processing of S8010 (S801: No), it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, not the continuous winning output period, so the processing of S8011 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

In the process of S8012, other external output processes are executed (S8012). The other external output processing is, for example, the external output terminal indicating that the period during which the accessory continuous operation device is operated, that is, the period during which the jackpot game is executed, as in the case of the external output processing in the eighth control example described above. A process of turning on the continuous operation terminal of the accessory of the plate 261 at a predetermined trigger is executed. When the processing of S8012 is completed, the main processing is terminated and the process returns to the main processing.

As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined that the game ball is continuously entered (winning) into the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a prize is won in the gaming machine. Will be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs, and the output is continuously turned on when the continuous winning is performed.

As a result, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning by the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without performing the calculation based on the previous winning information. This can reduce the processing load of the hall computer 262.

Note that this control example is not limited to the one described above, and may be configured so that the output of the continuous winning terminal is continued only at the time of a specific jackpot type. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal, thereby determining the jackpot type that has become a jackpot. Can be made possible.

Further, the period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (winning output period) may be different for each jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. For example, if the jackpot type is jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, if the jackpot G is, the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, and if the jackpot H is, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (winning output period), thereby performing the jackpot of the jackpot game. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of discriminating the jackpot type, it is possible to make a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal board 261, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the ninth control example, the game ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the ball entry interval. If a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 will be continuously turned on, and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected on the hall computer 262 side. Is. Further, as the winning output period becomes shorter, it is necessary to shorten the detection interval of the winning terminals by the hall computer 262 accordingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal will be turned off and the number of winnings cannot be detected accurately.

Therefore, when the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is very short (10 milliseconds, etc.), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. , There is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, a period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (winning output stop period). ), And after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entered into the specific winning opening 65a. You may do it.

As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to be ON is longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the ball-balled game ball can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect (do not miss) the winning. Further, in the hall computer 262, it is not necessary to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at an interval shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 5 milliseconds), and the processing load of the hall computer 262 is reduced. Can be mitigated.

Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot game. The jackpot game is configured so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the state (round) in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). There is. This round ends with the lapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) or the entry of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the specific winning opening 65a, and then the interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round is about to begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set longer than the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. The winning terminal of the board 261 can be output.

Specifically, when 10 game balls continuously enter the specific winning opening 65a at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). It is necessary to set the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 to be on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds) 10 times in total based on the minute). Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds) after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, It is assumed that the next winning output period is configured to start. In this case, the time required to output the signal based on all the winning balls to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the output of the winning terminal is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) And the number of times the winning output period required after the output of the winning terminal (9 times) multiplied by the winning output period (50 milliseconds) is added to obtain 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is completed based on all the incoming balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. Is possible.

Therefore, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to be ON is longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since all the output based on the game ball can be executed during the subsequent round-to-round interval, the hall computer 262 can detect (do not miss) the winning. Even if all the outputs based on the newly entered game balls during the prize output period cannot be executed during the inter-round interval period, the specific prize will be awarded from the execution of the jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game. Since there is a period during which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (big hit game interval), it may be configured so that it can be executed during the big hit game interval. The above-mentioned specific example is an example, and the period such as the winning output period, the winning output suspension period, and the interval between rounds may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the ninth control example, for example, a V winning terminal that outputs an on signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) based on the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is provided on the external output terminal board 261. You may do so. As a result, by comparing the output timing between the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the entry into the specific winning opening 65a and the V winning terminal, an illegal V winning (entry of the game ball into the probability change switch 65e3). It becomes possible to determine whether or not the ball) has been performed by the hall computer 262.

Specifically, even though the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is detected, and V If the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that V winning (a game ball is entered into the probability change switch 65e3) is illegally performed. Therefore, when the V winning terminal is on even though the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off, it can be detected as invalid or abnormal.

Further, a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a predetermined passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the time (1 second) required for passing through the period when the continuous winning terminal is on (continuous winning output period), the V winning terminal is set to the period when the continuous winning terminal is off (other than the continuous winning output period). When it is turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect it as an illegal V prize.

Specifically, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 after a predetermined passage time (1 second) has elapsed. It does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the lapse of a predetermined passing time (1 second). Therefore, if the continuous winning terminal, which is turned on based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and then turned off after the lapse of a predetermined passing time (1 second), is turned off, the probability change switch. The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on during the period when the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that the V winning terminal is an illegal V winning.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of the technical idea of a moving member that is moved only by urging force>
The display area of the liquid crystal display device from the retracted position located outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the urging device that generates elastic urging force in one direction and the urging force generated by the urging device. A moving member that is movably formed to a predetermined position located on the front side of the A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising a device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor for generating a driving force for moving the moving member are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the moving member is moved by the motor drive, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member formed so as to be movable from the retracted position to a predetermined position by the urging force in one direction is restricted (stopped) by the position regulating device at the retracted position. ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is arranged in the retracted position and starts moving by the accumulated urging force.

Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed at the target value from the start when the moving member is started to move from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

Examples of the urging device include a device using the repulsive force of a magnet, a device using spring elasticity, and the like, and examples of the releasing device include a driving device that gives a driving force to mechanically move the position regulating device. , A device for releasing the electromagnetic adsorption of the position regulating device and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is provided with a drive device having a function of generating at least a driving force for moving the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the release device is configured by the driving device. Gaming machine A2.

Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is required in order to repeatedly perform the effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device for generating a driving force is required. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device inside the gaming machine is limited, there is a possibility that the space for arranging the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the release device is configured by the drive device, so that the drive device is released from the regulation of the moving member and the moving member is retracted from the predetermined position. It can also be used for returning to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive device is separately prepared, the space for disposing the release device and the drive device can be suppressed.

Further, after the moving member has moved from the retracted position to a predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect of the moving member can be repeated.

Examples of the drive device include a motor and an air cylinder.

In the game machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the proximal end side, and the position regulating device is projected from a first rotating body rotated about the first axis and the first rotating body thereof. The pin member is provided with a pin member eccentrically located on the first axis, the pin member is connected to the moving member on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis formed on the proximal end side of the moving member and the pin member. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is formed so as to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis and the pin member formed on the proximal end side of the moving member.

Therefore, by moving the moving member to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead center in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held in the retracted position. can. This eliminates the need for, for example, a structure that detects that the moving member is placed in the retracted position and operates the position regulating device to regulate the moving member.

Further, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position even if there is no driving force such as a drive motor. It is possible to secure a large amount of regulatory power. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large amount of urging force accumulated in the urging device, and it is possible to make the effect of starting the moving member at high speed remarkable.

In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion for guiding the pin member, and is a straight line connecting the pin member of the position regulating device and the first axis at at least one of the retracted position or the predetermined position. The direction orthogonal to the guide portion and the extending direction of the guide portion are arranged so as to coincide with each other, the position regulating device is engaged with the driving device, and the driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the pin member is formed so as to be movable along a guide portion by being rotated by the above.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when the moving member starts to rotate from the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are provided. Since the directions match, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion at the start of rotation of the first rotating body.

Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position regulating device on the moving member, it is necessary to shift the positional relationship between the first axis, the rotation axis on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member (rotate the position regulating device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engaged state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are engaged with each other and a non-engaging state in which the positioning device and the driving device are disengaged are formed. The gaming machine A5 is possible, and the non-engaged state is formed at least when the moving member is started from the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, so that the resistance applied to the position regulating device is applied. As a result, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engaging state between the driving device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counter the urging force of the urging device, the high speed at the start of the moving member can be ensured, so that the degree of freedom in designing the urging device can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

As an embodiment in which the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position regulating device, and the gear meshed with the gear is partially. The second rotating body formed in the above is arranged in the driving device, and the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, or the position regulating device is the first. A magnetic body is formed on the side surface of the first rotating body, and a second rotating body in which the magnetic body adsorbed by the magnetic body is partially formed is arranged in the drive device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged. An example is the case where the drive device is transmitted by the adsorption with.

More specifically, when the first rotating state and the second rotating body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulating device and the driving device form an engaged state in the region where the gears are meshed, and the position regulating device and the driving device are driven in the region where the gear meshing is released (the region where the gears are not formed). The device and the device form a non-engaged state.

In the game machines A1 to A5, the moving member includes an effect member that is swingably supported by the moving member and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least in a predetermined position. The member extends from the proximal end side to the swinging end side which is the opposite end of the proximal end side, and is formed in such an manner that the extending direction is the longitudinal direction, and the proximal end side is the liquid crystal. The effect member is pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. It is formed, and in the retracted position, the first direction is taken along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and in the predetermined position, the first direction is the tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that one end in the first direction projects toward the opposite side of the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effecting member is arranged at the retracted position, the effecting member moves its first direction toward the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is said to be in line with it. Therefore, even when it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be made easier to install.

Further, when the effect member is arranged at a predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction serves as the effect end. Since it is sandwiched and projected to the opposite side of the retracted position, the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used to produce an effect.

As a case where it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member on the outside of the liquid crystal display device, for example, a case where a retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device is exemplified. Will be done.

The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first protruding portion, wherein a change in the posture of the effect member occurs when the first protruding portion is guided by the first guide portion.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the change in the posture of the effecting member is caused by the protruding portion of the effecting member being guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

That is, for example, when the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted by the ascending movement of the moving member, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of the moving member being ascended and moved. Depending on the design of the first guide portion, it is possible to arbitrarily select whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending moving end.

As the first guide portion, an elongated hole formed through and having an elongated direction, a groove formed as a recess having an elongated direction, and the like are exemplified and guided. Examples include a mode in which the first protruding portion is slid on the first guide portion, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the first protruding portion, and a mode in which the rotating body is rolled to the first guide portion. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and the swing axis of the moving member. A concentric circle portion extending along the above-mentioned circle is provided, and the concentric circle portion is formed on the predetermined position side and the posture changing portion is formed on the retracted position side. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its posture with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member do not change their posture with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as a unit can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture change portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided by the posture change portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric circles are extended along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first protrusion of the effect member is guided by the concentric circles, the first protrusion of the effect member and the effect are produced. The effect member is moved while the relative positional relationship between the member and the axial support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the concentric circles are formed on the predetermined position side, the effect member and the moving member can be made visible to the player as a unit for a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and the swing axis of the moving member. The gaming machine A9 is provided with concentric circle portions extending along the circles, and the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its posture with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member do not change their posture with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as a unit can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture change portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided by the posture change portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric circles are extended along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first protruding portion of the effecting member is guided to the first guide portion, it becomes the first protruding portion of the effecting member. , The effect member is moved while the relative positional relationship with the axial support position of the effect member and the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the effecting member can be quickly changed while the effecting member is visually recognized by the player.

In any of the game machines A6 to A9, the movement is provided with a second guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extending along the rotation locus of the moving member. The member includes at least one second protruding portion guided by the second guide portion, the second protruding portion thereof is integrally formed with the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. In this case, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the second protruding portion is in contact with one end of the second guide portion.

Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, it is not possible to stop the motor to reduce the momentum of the moving member as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. It is necessary to form a mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second protruding portion hits the end portion of the second guide portion. By being in contact with each other, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

Further, since the second protruding portion is guided to the second guide portion extending along the rotation locus of the moving member, the second guide portion and the second protruding portion optimize the rotation of the moving member at the same time. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member in the direction of the swing axis.

Here, the first protruding portion and the first guide portion of the effecting member may be brought into contact with each other to serve as a stopper, but since the effecting member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion. There is a problem with strength. On the other hand, since the second protruding portion is integrally projected from the moving member, the problem of strength is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

By forming a plurality of sets of the second protruding portion and the second guide portion, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches a predetermined position. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the second protrusion. Further, as the second guide portion, an elongated hole formed through and having an elongated direction, a groove formed as a recess having an elongated direction, and the like are exemplified and guided. Examples include a mode in which the second protruding portion is slid on the second guide portion, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the second protruding portion, and a mode in which the rotating body is rolled on the second guide portion. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction, in which one end thereof is larger than the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of the one end portion. The gaming machine A11, characterized in that the width is reduced.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that the groove width of one end portion is smaller than that of the other end portion. That is, since a large gap formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position is secured, resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be suppressed. Further, the gap formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position can be reduced, and the wobbling of the second protruding portion can be suppressed.

Here, as an embodiment in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end of the second guide portion toward the other end, or the second guide portion is reduced. An example is a case where the groove width is sharply reduced in a part of the above (a groove width is reduced in at least two types).

In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through hole, the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide portion, and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide portion is pierced. Similar effects can be obtained even if the thickness in the setting direction is formed in such a manner that one end is reduced as compared with the other end. In this case, further, when the moving member is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling, especially in the direction in which the second guide portion is formed.

In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the side surface on the small diameter side of the second guide portion is formed from the one end portion to the other end portion. The gap with the second protruding portion is reduced up to the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second protruding portion is increased at the other end portion as compared with the gap, so that the side surface on the large diameter side is formed. The gap between the one end and the second protrusion is reduced, and the gap between the two ends and the second protrusion is reduced from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. A game machine A12 characterized by a large gap.

According to the gaming machine A12, the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position by ascending movement. Therefore, when the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member swings. When the second protrusion is slightly moved in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the shaft, the second protrusion is likely to come into contact with the small diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the small diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap between the moving member and the second projecting portion is reduced at the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to smoothly swing the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position.

Further, when the second protruding portion is swung from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the large diameter side of the second guide portion, the moving member is swung to a predetermined position, and finally the gap with the second projecting portion is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a gap between the main body extending from the base end side to the swinging end side and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. It is provided with a decorative portion disposed apart from the front side, and when the effect member changes its posture, at least one of one end in the first direction or the other end on the opposite side of the one end is the main body portion and the said. A game machine A13 characterized in that it is stored between it and a decorative part.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effecting member changes its posture, at least one of both ends of the effecting member in the first direction is the main body portion and the decorative portion. It is stored with a slight gap between it and. Therefore, when the effect member changes its posture and, for some reason, the effect member can move significantly in the direction of the swing axis with respect to the main body portion, the main body portion and the decorative portion serve as a guide to prevent the movement. , It is possible to limit a large movement of the effect member in the direction of the swing axis.

According to this, when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a laminated relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

In the gaming machine A13, the movement locus of any part of the effect member and the movement locus of any part of the decorative member are the shaking of the effect member in the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that it overlaps in the direction of the moving axis.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably stored between the main body portion and the decorative portion in the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. As a result, as compared with the case where the effect member is stored between the main body portion and the decorative portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case where the fixing plate prevents the displacement in the front-rear direction, It is possible to exert a guide function that regulates the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction from an earlier stage.

As a result, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, not only the interference between the moving members of the moving unit outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device but also the moving unit inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to prevent interference between moving members.

<Example of technical idea to suppress wobbling of moving members>
A moving member formed so as to be slidable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, an effect member arranged on the moving member, and the effect member thereof. In a gaming machine including a second driving device that generates a driving force for driving the gaming machine, the retracting position is a position separated from the predetermined position in the lateral direction of the gaming machine by a predetermined distance and from the predetermined position. The effect member is at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position is the movement end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being driven.

Here, a moving member formed so as to be slidable and an effect member arranged on the moving member and driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slid and moved in the horizontal direction. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-085811). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving member receives a force due to the reaction of the drive of the effecting member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member in a predetermined position, the effecting member is required. There is a problem that it is necessary to continue to apply a force that resists the force due to the reaction of the drive of the moving member to the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position, which is the end of movement of the moving member, is formed diagonally downward of the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second driving device at a predetermined position and the moving member receives the force due to the reaction, the force due to the own weight of the moving member works toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is placed in the predetermined position. Since it can be maintained (to push it back), the moving member can be maintained at a predetermined position even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is unnecessary.

The vertical direction of the gaming machine means the direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the horizontal direction of the gaming machine means the direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction of the gaming machine. do.

As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method, a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of a moving member, and a method of winding the belt.

The game machine B1 includes an auxiliary member arranged at a distance of a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is displayed on a liquid crystal display at least in a state of being arranged at the predetermined position. The overhanging portion is provided inside the display area of the device, and the overhanging portion is in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, at least in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. The gaming machine B2, which is characterized in that it comes into contact with the auxiliary member when it swings.

Here, the overhanging portion of the moving member is formed so as to project inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that interference with other accessories is prevented. Therefore, it is required to suppress the shaking in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane of the moving member, and the moving member is placed at a predetermined position. In the arranged state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides and moves, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the overhanging portion and prevent the overhanging portion from colliding with other accessories.

In the gaming machine B2, the overhanging portion is characterized in that the rigidity on the root side is weakened as compared with the tip side.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the rigidity of the root side is weakened as compared with the tip side of the overhanging portion, so that the wobbling that occurs at the tip of the overhanging portion is caused by the overhanging portion. The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

Here, as a method of weakening the rigidity, a case where the overhanging portion is formed of a resin material having a partially different rigidity by two-color molding, a case where the thickness of the overhanging portion is partially changed, and the like are exemplified. ..

When the overhanging portion is formed in a thin thickness in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding moving direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

Further, when the root side of the overhanging portion is formed thinner than the tip end side, the wobbling on the tip end side of the overhanging portion is converted into a bending deformation with the root side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being horizontally moved in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides on the root side of the overhanging portion.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is axially supported by the outside of the liquid crystal display device and is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is arranged in the retracted position, the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

As a result, another moving member is arranged on the same layer as the layer on which the moving member is arranged, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the other moving member projects inward of the liquid crystal display device. It becomes possible to perform various productions in a limited space.

In addition, as a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by a rotating shaft, or a mode in which a protruding portion inserted into the elongated hole is provided and the protruding portion is guided through the elongated hole. Is exemplified.

In the game machine B4, the overhanging portion is provided along the direction from the shaft support portion of the one end portion of the auxiliary member toward the other end portion in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A game machine B5 characterized by having an extended contact portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member is provided with a contact portion, and the contact portion is a state in which the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the shaft branch of one end to the other end. Therefore, in a state where the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, it is possible to secure an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact with each other at the contact portion.

In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip portion of the hand portion, and the movement thereof is performed. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that as the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position between the overhanging portion and the auxiliary member moves toward the tip end side of the hand portion.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, an effect member is arranged at the hand portion of the overhanging portion, and as the moving member slides to the retracted position, the overhanging portion and the auxiliary member are connected. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand part. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the protrusion (extending distance) of the overhanging portion extending to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference. As a result, even if the tip end side of the overhanging portion wobbles due to the driving of the effecting member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobbling is small. As a result, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the moving member from wobbling in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkable.

In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is arranged below the moving member, and one end thereof is oscillatedly supported by the moving member, and the other end thereof is opposite to the moving member. The case where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is formed at the longitudinal direction and the direction connecting the other end of the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. However, the gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the longitudinal direction of the effect member is tilted in the horizontal direction.

Since the moving member is moved diagonally downward toward a predetermined position, the moving member is required to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. When placed in the retracted position, it is necessary to arrange the lower end of the effect member at a position raised from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the distance that the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward a predetermined position. rice field. Therefore, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, the lower part of the effecting member is wasted as a dead space.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is arranged below the moving member and the moving member is arranged in the retracted position as compared with the case where the effect member is arranged below the moving member. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effecting member is formed to be smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effecting member is formed. Take a horizontal tilted posture.

Therefore, when the moving member is placed in the retracted position, even if the lower end of the effect member is placed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. The distance to be evacuated can be absorbed by the change in posture of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the effecting member from being wasted as a dead space when the moving member is arranged in the retracted position, and to form the effecting member as a large member longer in the longitudinal direction.

The gaming machine B7 includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member is said to move as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the members are arranged at the predetermined positions, the members take a posture tilted in the horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is in the horizontal direction when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connecting member while taking a tilted posture, the effect member is tilted horizontally as the auxiliary member is tilted horizontally. Can be made to.

Further, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member pivotally supported by the moving member, it is supported by a plurality of members, so that the force generated by driving the effect member can be exerted. It is possible to disperse and make the effect of suppressing wobbling of the effect member and the moving member remarkable.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the other end side of the effecting member.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the other end side of the effecting member, so that the weight of the effecting member effectively acts on the connecting member. Can be made to. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, a force is effectively applied to the auxiliary member in a direction in which the auxiliary member is tilted more, so that wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member and the effecting member connected to the auxiliary member.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine at a position where the effecting member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine at the position where the effecting member is pivotally supported by the moving member, so that the weight of the effecting member is heavy. It can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with the axial support position between the moving member and the effect member as a boundary.

Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be easily transmitted. It can cause wobbling. As a result, by driving the effect member, it is possible to perform an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member.

<Example of technical idea to suppress assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions overhanging in the same direction, a lid member abutting on an overhanging end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of reflective members whose portions are rotatably supported, and a light source that irradiates light toward at least one of the plurality of reflective members, and at least one of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of shaft support grooves are formed on the end surface of the overhanging end of the wall portion, and the reflective member is pivotally supported by being projected from the main body portion and the main body portion and fitted into the shaft support groove. The rotary shaft portion, which is composed of at least one rotary shaft portion and is fitted into the shaft support groove, is fitted from the open end of the plurality of shaft support grooves, and the open end of the shaft support groove is fitted into the lid member. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is pivotally supported by being closed.

Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable body that is axially supported at both ends and is formed so as to be able to change its posture in order to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are arranged, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the work of inserting the movable body into the hole in order to pivotally support the movable body and the subsequent work It is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body from the hole so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole as many as the number of movable bodies, and there is a problem that the assembly man-hours increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft support grooves are formed on the wall portion of the base member, the rotating shaft portion of the reflective member is fitted into the shaft support groove, and the open end of the shaft support groove is the lid member. By being closed by, a plurality of reflective members can be rotatably supported. By rotating these reflective members, the direction of the light emitted from the light source toward the reflective member can be changed.

Therefore, it is not necessary to insert the reflective member into the hole to support the shaft, and then attach parts (screws, retaining stoppers, etc.) to fix the reflective member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole. It is possible to prevent the assembly man-hours from increasing in proportion to the number of.

In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only on one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is formed in the other on the opposite side of the one, and the shaft portion of the reflective member is diagonally inserted into the hole. Later, when the reflective member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other side on one side is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other side on the other side, and the shaft thereof. An example is a case where the reflective member is fitted onto the pin and then the reflective member is tilted so that the shaft portion formed on the other side of the pin is fitted into the shaft support groove.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion.

Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member be formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end surface of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw becomes the thinness of the wall portion. It becomes the lower limit and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, so that the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is not limited and the wall portion is formed thin. can do.

In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflective member are combined to produce an effect. The effect of the production can be improved.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that pivotally support the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member is inserted into the shaft support hole formed in the lid member, so that the area for pivotally supporting the rotation shaft portion is set to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently secured by the area corresponding to the thickness corresponding to the shaft support of the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the formation length of the shaft support hole.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extension portion extending from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member is the extension portion. In a state where the fitting portion to be fitted to the setting portion is provided and the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is attached to the extension portion at least in a direction adjacent to the shaft support groove and the rotation. The gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is in contact with the axial direction of the shaft portion.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove. It is possible to easily align the wall portion in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove with the lid member.

Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, and the wall is formed. The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced by the lid member.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the axis of each of the pair of wall portions and the adjacent reflective member is closed by the main body portion of the pair of reflective members. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflective members are brought into contact with each other in the direction of rotation.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axes of the adjacent pair of reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Since it can be blocked by the main body of the slingshot, the light emitted from the light source can be shielded by a plurality of reflective members.

Further, in the closed state, since the surfaces of the pair of reflective members in the rotational direction are in contact with each other, the gap formed between the main bodies of the adjacent reflective members can be closed, and the gap between the reflective members can be closed. It is possible to suppress light leakage.

Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is completely opened, the player can visually recognize the entire emitted light. However, while the shutter member slides from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping with the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, it takes a long time for the player to visually recognize the entire light.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflective member suppresses the leakage of light in the closed state, and allows the light emitted to the player to pass by the rotation of the reflective member from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflective member can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the player can visually recognize the entire light in the case of rotating the reflective member as compared with the case of sliding the shutter member.

Further, since the ends of the reflective surface portions of the adjacent reflective members are formed so as to be in contact with each other, the deviation of the posture of the reflective members can be corrected by another reflective member. Therefore, even if there is a reflective member having a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflective members, the posture of the reflective member after rotation is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflective member. Therefore, the quality of the effect of the reflective member can be guaranteed.

In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member is characterized in that the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other are chamfered.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the contact portions of the facing surfaces of the reflective members are chamfered, so that the reflective members can be tilted more toward the adjacent reflective members. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflective members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces of a plurality of reflective members in the rotational direction, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the pattern at the boundary of the reflective members.

Examples of the chamfering method include a method of shaving on a curved surface (with an R) and a method of shaving on a flat surface.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflective members and a transmission member slidably moved by the drive device are provided, and the transmission member is the rotation. The plurality of reflective members are formed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and each of the plurality of reflective members has a transmitted portion abutted on the transmission member on at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the transmitted portion and the reflecting member are rotatably formed by sliding the transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in such a manner that the transmission member is slid and moved in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. The transmitted portion formed on each of the rotation shaft portions of the plurality of reflective members is brought into contact with the transmitted member. Here, by sliding the transmission member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflecting member is rotated in conjunction with the rotation, so that a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated by the sliding movement of one transmission member. ..

Examples of the transmission member include a belt and a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a columnar portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion.

In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion in which teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can be meshed with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion, and teeth formed in the rack gear portion of the transmission member so as to be meshable are formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid and moved, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflective members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, so that slippage between the transmission member and the reflective member can be prevented. Can be done. Therefore, a plurality of reflective members can be rotated synchronously.

In the gaming machine C8, it is formed on at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member with a width larger than the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that expanding teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmitting member is larger than the distance between the adjacent teeth. Since the expanding teeth formed with a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expanding teeth are engaged.

As a result, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even if the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member causes an abnormality, it is possible to prevent the reflection member rotated by the transmission member from over-rotating.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member with its own drive device>
It is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed so that the outer side and the inner side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be slid back and forth, and the inner side surface formed in the inner side of the display area in the moving direction. A pair of moving members formed in a positional relationship in which they can come into contact with each other, and a driving device for driving the pair of moving members, and a movable range of one of the pair of moving members. Interferes with the movable range of the other moving member, which is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and by moving the one moving member, the other moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that by moving one moving member in the same direction, the other moving member is pushed forward and formed so as to be movable.

Here, a pair of accessories are moved from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and come into contact with each other to make the liquid crystal display device invisible. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-040413). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the movement of a pair of accessories is monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member, and the other moving member moves, so that the other moving member is movably formed. It is possible to form unexpected movements that are difficult to form only with a driving device that drives a moving member.

For example, when the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay due to the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, which causes monotony of the moving member. Therefore, as the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction. As a result, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form only by the driving device that drives the other moving member.

Further, since the pair of moving members can be moved without synchronizing the drive device for driving the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the drive device can be suppressed and the control load of the drive device can be reduced. ..

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction.

Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one of the moving members changes direction becomes larger by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when the moving member changes direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction, so that one of the moving members abuts in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. At the time of changing the direction of the member, the other moving member moving upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction to change the direction of one moving member. The period required for this can be shortened. The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction, but means a direction in which a slight horizontal component is allowed.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction.

When one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member in the process of moving and the other moving member moves in the same direction, the driving device of one moving member is a pair. Since the moving members are moved together, the burden on the drive device becomes large.

Here, when the pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the load on the drive device for driving the moving members arranged below becomes the burden on the driving device for driving the moving members arranged above. Compared to this, it becomes larger and there is a difference in the life of the drive device. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, and it becomes difficult to schedule maintenance as compared with the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable in a substantially horizontal direction, so that the difference in the load on the pair of driving devices is reduced. be able to.

That is, when the moving member is formed so as to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member is not subjected to the force due to gravity in the movable direction, so that the load on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, it is possible to match the replacement time for each drive device.

The direction of slide movement of the moving member does not have to match the horizontal direction, and the moving member can be tilted from the horizontal direction to the extent that it can stand still due to the frictional force with the driving device.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a base member on which the moving member is arranged is provided, and a shaft rod for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

Thereby, the shaft rod can be used as both a member for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable and a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

The gaming machine D4 includes a bogie portion that is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod and has a pair of wheel portions that are rotatably formed with respect to the shaft rod at at least both ends. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that it is fixed to at least one end of a moving member.

According to the gaming machine D5, the bogie portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the bogie portion has a wheel portion that can be rolled on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

Further, since a pair of wheel portions are arranged so as to sandwich the shaft rod and they are arranged at at least both ends of the bogie portion, the posture of the shaft rod and the bogie portion can be maintained constant.

In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other, the wheel portions arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other. As a result, the resistance applied to the wheel portion when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other can be increased, so that the impact when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other can be alleviated.

The pair of wheels to be abutted may be formed to have different diameters from each other. In this case, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased by sandwiching the wheel portion having a small diameter between the wheel portion having a large diameter and the shaft rod.

In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmission unit to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted, and is formed long in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft rod, and is formed in one of the longitudinal directions of the moving member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the transmission portion and the carriage portion are arranged at the end portion of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted is formed at one end of the trolley portion. Since the bogie portion is guided by the shaft rod and slid to move, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the drive device can be optimized.

That is, since the moving member is formed to be long, bending is likely to occur, and the bending occurs with one end on which the carriage portion guided by the shaft rod is arranged as a fulcrum. When the transmission portion is formed at the other end portion which is the opposite end portion of one end portion where the carriage portion is arranged, the position of the transmission portion is likely to change due to the bending of the moving member, and the transmission portion is easily moved. The engagement relationship between the transmission part of the member and the drive device is likely to be displaced. If the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device is deviated, the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides and moves becomes large, which is a problem.

On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end of the carriage portion, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at one end, and the moving member is formed. Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmission part of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides and moves can be suppressed.

As an embodiment of the transmission unit, for example, when a rotary gear is formed from the drive device side, a rack gear portion formed at one end thereof is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that contact between the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission portion side.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the deviation due to the bending of the moving members in the calculation of the contact positions of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D9 is characterized in that a contact between the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side of the transmission portion side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end on the opposite side of the transmitting portion, so that the transmitting portion is contacted when the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other. The impact on the side can be mitigated. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device due to the contact between the pair of moving members.

In the game machines D7 to D9, the moving member is extended in parallel with the direction in which the moving member slides, and the shaft rod is attached to the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end of the moving member. A pair of guide wall portions that are abutted from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the head, and the moving member is rotatably supported by the other end portion and is abutted against the guide wall portion. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, wherein the pair of rotating bodies is attached in a sliding direction of the moving member, and is rotated as the moving member is slid and moved.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion is extended parallel to the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported at the other end of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

Here, when the moving member bends and vibrates greatly with one end as a fulcrum due to a sudden stop of the moving member, among the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member, the moving member The rotating body on the opposite side of the bending direction is pressed against the guide wall portion. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the bending vibration of the moving member, it is possible to easily suppress the bending vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed by a free end. ..

Further, since the rotating body and the guide wall portion are smoothly in contact with each other when the moving member is started, the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall portion and the moving member when the moving member is started can be suppressed.

As an example of the mode of contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion, and a gear meshed with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on the side surface of the rotating body. Will be done.

In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes a gear-shaped tooth portion engraved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion. ..

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

A gaming machine provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members in any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined by the detection result of the detection device. D12.

Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by an electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the instability of the voltage of the electric motor. As a result, the pair of moving members may collide at an unexpected speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members is provided, and the detection result of the detection device is used. Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding with each other at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted by the detection result of the detection device that can detect the position and speed of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other, and most of the pair of moving members are in the event of a collision. A constant velocity state can be formed. This makes it possible to soften the impact of a pair of moving members at the time of collision.

<Characteristic E group> (Distracts attention from V-certain attacker when V-probable operation)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. In a gaming machine having a variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter, the variable winning means is a predetermined condition. An opening / closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which a game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, a ball entry detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, and a ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area. And, when the privilege state giving means which grants the privilege state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection means, and at least the opening and closing means are operated, it is predetermined. The gaming machine E1 characterized by having an effect executing means for producing the effect of the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the identification information indicating that the lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. In the variable winning means, the opening / closing means opens and closes a specific area in which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the detection by the ball entry detection means that the game ball has entered the specific area, the privilege state granting means grants the privilege state that is advantageous to the player. Further, at least when the opening / closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. As a result, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of incongruity of the game can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the effect executing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the player's attention can be distracted from the opening / closing means.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect executing means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, a notification mode indicating that the hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as an effect is notified by the effect executing means, so that the opening / closing means can be used. There is an effect that the movement can be made difficult for the player to discriminate.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the effect executing means is executed at least over a period from before a predetermined period during which the opening / closing means is operated to a period during which the opening / closing means is operated.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the effect executing means is executed over a period from before the predetermined period in which the opening / closing means is operated to the period in which the opening / closing means is operated. There is an effect that the operation of the opening / closing means can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means has an opening through which the gaming ball can enter, a state in which the opening is closed and the gaming ball is difficult to enter, and an opening in the open state. The opening / closing means has a regulating member that can be changed to a possible state, and the opening / closing means has a short opening time shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to flow down from the opening to the specific region, and the opening to the opening. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that either one of a long opening time longer than the time required for the gaming ball to flow down to a specific area is executed based on a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, the variable winning means is provided with an opening through which the game ball can enter, and a regulating member that changes the opening between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball can enter. Then, either a short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or a long opening time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The opening / closing means is executed based on a predetermined condition on either side. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not the game ball is inserted into the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

In the gaming machine E5, a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state based on the lottery as the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the lottery means. It has a type determining means for determining the type of the special game when it is drawn as a specific lottery result, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it determines either the short opening time or the long opening time.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state is executed by the special game executing means based on the fact that the lottery means has drawn a specific lottery result, the special game is performed by the type determining means. The type is determined. Then, in the opening / closing means, either the short opening time or the long opening time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be easily changed depending on the type of privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic F group> (One attacker forms a V-probable route)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a specific lottery result. When is displayed, the variable winning means that can be changed from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter, and the probability that the lottery means draws the predetermined lottery result are normally set. In a gaming machine having a probability setting means for setting either a normal probability or a special probability which is a higher probability than the normal probability, the variable winning means enters a ball when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass, a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific area. The probability setting means has a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the opening to either one of the regions, and the probability setting means is subject to the condition that the game balls have passed through the first specific region. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it sets a probability.

According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When the display means displays identification information indicating that the result is a specific lottery, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. Then, either the normal probability at the normal time or the special probability which is a higher probability than the normal probability is set for the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means by the probability setting means. In the variable winning means, the game ball is distributed to either the first specific area through which the game ball that has been opened and entered into the opening can pass or the second specific area different from the first specific area. Is sorted. Further, in the probability setting means, a special probability is set on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special probability is set by the variable winning means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the gaming machine F1, a special game that facilitates the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has a special game executing means to be executed, and a type determining means for determining the type of the special game to be executed by the special game executing means when a lottery is performed with the specific lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means in either the first state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2 characterized by having a distribution setting means set within the period of the special game of 1 above.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game execution means executes a special game that makes it easy for the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. To. Then, when a lottery result is drawn with a specific lottery result by the lottery means, the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means is determined by the type determination means. Further, either the first state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second specific area is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of 1 special game. As a result, the distribution means can be controlled according to the type of the special game determined by the type determination means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be controlled more simply.

In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time, which is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, as the second state from the open state. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that a second time, which is longer than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific region from the opening, is set as the first state from the open state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, in the distribution setting means, the first time, which is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is the second state. The second time, which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not to set a special probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the sorting means is The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which a gaming ball is distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined opening state among the plurality of open states.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distribution means is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which the game ball is distributed to the second specific area in the predetermined open state among the plurality of open states. This makes it possible for the player to expect the game ball to be distributed to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the passage of the gaming balls through the first specific area or the second specific area. The gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the fact that the gaming balls pass through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since it is paid out by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic G group> (long press production)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation thereof. A signal output means for outputting an operation signal based on the operation of the means, a determination means for determining whether or not the operation signal output by the signal output means is received, and the operation signal by the determination means. It is characterized by having an effect variable means for varying the effect executed by the effect executing means based on a release timing in which it is determined that the operation signal has not been received after it is determined to have been received. The gaming machine G1.

According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the lottery means to be executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, it is determined that the operation signal output by the signal output means has not received the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been received by the determination means. Based on the release timing, the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed by the effect variable means. As a result, the effect can be varied in various ways by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the effect variable means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and if it is within the allowable period, it is more than if it is outside the allowable period. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it can be varied to produce an effect that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, when the effect variable means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period, it is more than when it is out of the allowable period. Since it is variable to the effect that is advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the gaming machine G1 or G2 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the permissible period when it is determined by the discriminating means that the operation signal is received. ..

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined by the discriminating means that the operation signal is being received, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notifying means. It has the effect of allowing a person to play a game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies in a special notification mode that the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characterized gaming machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, in the notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the lottery result and play the game according to the notification mode.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect variable means receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determination means receives the operation signal. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the effect is changed when it disappears.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, in the effect variable means, the operation signal is continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the discriminating means receives the operation signal. After that, when it is determined that the operation signal is no longer received, the effect is changed, so that there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed more.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
The effect is based on a display means for displaying the effect of the game, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and a determination result by the operation determination means. It is advantageous for the player based on the effect variable means for varying the effect, the effect setting means for setting the effect content variable by the effect variable means according to the timing of operating the operation means, and the operation of the operation means. A period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect content is set and a second period in which the effect content that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set, and the first period and the first period. The first notification mode for discriminatingly notifying the two periods and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode are at least the same. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying during a period.

According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect variable means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect content variable by the effect variable means is set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. Is set by at least the period setting means. The first notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. Is notified by the notification means at least in the same period. As a result, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period setting means sets a plurality of the first period within an effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effective.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, a plurality of first periods are set in the period setting means within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, so that the operation is performed in the first period. It has the effect of being easy to configure.

In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode is characterized in that the symbol is variably displayed for the transition of the period according to a predetermined rule, and the current period set is notified. H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with a variable symbol according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode is to change and notify the transition of the period based on a randomly set rule.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified by changing the symbol based on the randomly set rule. It has the effect of being able to provide a wide variety of effects to people.

<Feature I group> (Overflow control)
Based on the entry port where the game ball can enter, the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. A lottery means for drawing when the lottery conditions are satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the like. A player when the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result are displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, a storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a ball entrance. A ball entry variable means that changes between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a ball entry variable means in which the ball entry variable means is normally in the first state. In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state which is more easily changed than a state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the dynamic display mode determining means is stored in the storage means. Based on the number of the information, the dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed, and when the special state is set, at least in the storage means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period when the stored information is not more than a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are obtained. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means in which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Further, the first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are changed by the ball entry variable means. Then, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a special state that is more likely to be changed to the first state than the normal state at the normal time is set by the state setting means. Further, in the dynamic display mode determining means, the dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed based on the number of information stored in the storage means, and the special state is determined. When set, at least when the amount of information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number or less, the establishment of the lottery condition is delayed by the delay means for a predetermined period. As a result, since it is delayed by the delay means, it can be configured so that the dynamic display period is determined in a state where a large amount of information is stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine I1, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number, the dynamic display mode determining means sets a dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period from the set number. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than when many are stored.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means stores more information than the set number when the number of information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number. Since it is easier to determine the dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display period is longer than in the case of the above, there is an effect that the period in which the dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delaying means delays a period longer than the period in which the ball entry variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. ..

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means is delayed for a longer period than the period in which the ball entry variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined with a large amount of information stored.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball entry variable means is changed to the first state, a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls in which the information is stored in the storage means can be entered. The gaming machine I4, which is maintained in the first state below.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, in the ball-entry variable means, when the ball is changed to the first state, information is stored in the storage means in a predetermined number or less. Since the ball is maintained in the first state within the period during which the ball can enter, there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

<Characteristic J group> (Hidden shaking fluctuation)
The lottery means for executing the lottery, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result are displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is dynamically determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The display mode includes, as the dynamic display of the lottery result, a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again, and the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode is included. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a static symbol display means for displaying a static symbol on the front side of the identification symbol when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped.

According to the gaming machine J1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means in which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Then, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The identification information indicates the lottery result by the lottery means by the combination of a plurality of identification symbols. Further, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, as the dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, there is a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. When the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode, the static symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means. As a result, the temporarily stopped identification symbol can be made to appear as if it has been fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by changing the display position slightly periodically.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed, so that the identification symbol is temporarily stopped. It has the effect of being able to inform you in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machines J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the identification symbol starts dynamic display again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the identification symbol can be easily seen by the player.

A gaming machine J4, wherein in any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, so that there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of 1 based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the pseudo continuous display mode is the pseudo-continuous display mode. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is set so as to be easily determined when it is the specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are played. That is, in the dynamic display mode determining means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Further, in the pseudo continuous display mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is set so as to be easily determined when it is a specific lottery result, so that the player can expect a specific lottery result by the pseudo continuous display mode. effective.

<Characteristic K group> (If the winning rate of the Fuden chucker and the attacker is the same and the attackers are narrowed down, the Fuden winning will be higher)
A ball entry variable means that can be changed into a ball entry port where a game can enter, a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game ball at the entrance, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a lottery means thereof. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the result is a specific lottery, the opening through which the game ball can enter. And an opening variable means for changing the opening into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game executing means determines the variable means in the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the ball entry port enter the opening when the opening is in the closed state and the ball entry port is in the first state. The game machine K1 is characterized in that the game balls are arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter the ball entrance.

According to the game machine K1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the information of the acquisition means acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. The first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are varied by the ball entry variable means. The opening is varied by the opening variable means that changes the open state in which the game ball can enter and the difficult closed state, and in the privilege game execution means, the variable means is changed to the open state for a predetermined period. Further, when the opening is closed and the entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening is likely to enter the entrance. Placed in each position. As a result, the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the gaming ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and the game is played toward the entrance side. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that it is configured to guide a ball.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the gaming ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and entered. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, the game ball can be easily configured to enter the ball, which has the effect of improving the efficiency of the game.

The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine K2 is provided with a guiding means for guiding the gaming ball from the wall member to the entrance.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be more efficiently entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a launching means for launching the gaming ball into the gaming area, and
It has a launching force adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching force of the gaming ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the gaming area has the gaming ball launched by the launching means. At least a first region in which the ball can flow down and a second region different from the first region are formed, and the opening is a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down in the second region can enter. The ball entry port is characterized in that the game ball flowing down either the first region and the second region is arranged at a position where the ball can enter in common. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the firing force adjusting means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine K4, a special entrance for the game ball that has flowed down the second area and a privilege for giving a privilege to the player when the game ball enters the special entrance. The means and the first setting state in which the game ball flowing down the second region is easily guided to the opening and is difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and the first setting state is difficult to be guided to the opening and is difficult to be guided to the special entrance. The gaming machine K5 is characterized by having a setting means that can be set to either a second setting state that is easy to be guided.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K4, the state of the game can be changed, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the setting means is configured to be able to be set from the outside of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, the setting can be changed by the setting means, and there is an effect that the taste of the game can be adjusted.

In any of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second region is likely to be guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the entrance side, and is difficult to be guided to the opening. The gaming machine K7 is characterized by having an adjusting means capable of being adjusted to a second adjusting state that is easily guided to the ball entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that the gambling of the game can be adjusted by adjusting by the adjusting means.

<Characteristic L group> (loop twice with V attacker)
A first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a second ball entry means that can be changed from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and a first entry means thereof. Based on the first determination means that makes a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the means and the determination result of the first determination means as the first determination result, the second entry means is the second. The special state setting means for setting a special state that is easily changed to the state, the second determination means for making a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, and the determination result of the second determination means. In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entry means capable of entering the ball, the specific area through which the game ball entered into the third entry means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above, and a right storage means capable of memorizing at least two rights for the determination to be executed by the second determination means by the special state setting means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a determination means for determining whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the determination result of the second determination means.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player.

Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game.

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that it hits twice once it rushes into a certain change, and other game characteristics are the same as those of the conventional gaming machine, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. rice field.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a predetermined first determination result is selected by the first determination means, thereby providing a special state in which the determination by the second determination means is easily received, and further, the second determination means. After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by, the judgment by the second judgment means is executed after having an interesting game property that a big hit is given for the first time by passing the game ball through a specific area. By memorizing the right to do so, even if the special state is once changed to the normal state, the memorized second determination means can execute the determination. Therefore, when the game state is far from the big hit (shift from the special state to the normal state), at least the chance of the big hit is given again, so that the player can enjoy while expecting the big hit until the end. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the second ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means, and during at least a part of the period during which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means. , The gaming machine L2 characterized in that it is variable to the first state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine L1, in order to ensure that the determination by the second determination means is performed in the special state, the control is performed to put the second ball entry means into the second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. The problem that the second ball-entry means in the state hinders the entry into the third ball-entry means has emerged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second entering means is closed (retracted) during the period when the third entering means can enter the ball. , The effect is that the ball can be smoothly entered into the third ball entry means without being hindered.

In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entry means to the second state and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means can be dynamically displayed. The display means has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is set to the special state. Based on this, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is easily determined until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The above-mentioned gaming machine L2 has made it possible to smoothly enter the gaming ball into the third entry means, but in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, in addition to that, the second special during the special state. At the same time, a configuration for securing the reserved memory of the symbol had to be achieved.

On the other hand, the gaming machine L3 has a control for setting the period of dynamic display for changing the second ball entry means to the second state to be shorter than the normal state in the special state.

By this control, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, opening of the third ball entry means, elapse of a predetermined time, entry of a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entry means, reaching the upper limit of the reserved memory, etc.). Until is satisfied, the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be prioritized, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the entry of the game ball into the third entry means can be prioritized. Therefore, it has the effect of being able to play the game smoothly.

In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entry means to the second state and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means can be dynamically displayed. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the means, the dynamic display period determining means, and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means have elapsed, and the above-mentioned When the identification information indicating the determination result of changing to the second state is displayed, the variable control means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state is provided, and the variable control means is said to have the same. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the second ball entry means is changed to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

In the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for changing the second ball entry means as the second state for a long period of time until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as that of the machine L3 can be obtained.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied before the third ball entering means can enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to surely satisfy a predetermined condition before the third entering means can enter the ball, so that the third entry means can be achieved. The ball can be smoothly entered into the means.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means thereof. It has a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and the second dynamic display period determining means is at least the first time since the special state is set. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set for the dynamic display of the machine.

The above-mentioned gaming machine L5 enables smooth gaming for entering the third ball entry means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determination means can be stored in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determination means in the special state can be stored. Depending on the timing, a new problem has emerged in which at least two rights to execute the judgment by the second judgment means cannot be memorized. That is, if a jackpot based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second entry means is set to the second state as the determination result of the third determination means in the special state, the special game is the first. 2 There arises a problem that the ball entry means is terminated before the second state is reached, and the right to newly execute the determination by the second determination means cannot be stored.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first second dynamic display (second dynamic display) after the special game (short-time game) is started. 2 Since the period of the special symbol variation display) is set longer than the dynamic display (normal symbol variation display) time, the dynamic display is completed by the end of the first second dynamic display, and the second dynamic display is completed. 2 The ball entry means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problem and secure the characteristic playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

In the game machines L1 to L6, the third ball entry means is a game machine L7, wherein the game ball passes through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of the game balls enter.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by the immediate end of the third ball entry means and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine L7, the third ball entry means is such that when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter in the state of 1 in which the ball can be entered, the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine L8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by the immediate end of the third ball entry means and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball-entry means has a regulating means for restricting the passage of the gaming ball to the specific area and the restricting means for restricting the ball from entering the predetermined number of gaming balls. The gaming machine L9 is characterized by having a variable means for varying the release state so that the gaming ball can pass through a specific area.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number of gaming balls entered into the third entering means reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the situation where the player is awakened because it ends immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the gaming ball is restricted from entering the specific area. Based on the variable control means for varying the variable member and the determination result of the first determination means, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means, and the first determination means makes it possible to enter the ball. When it is determined as the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member so as to change the variable member to the restricted state for a period during which the ball can enter the third ball entry means. When the second determination means determines that the second determination result is obtained, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the gaming ball can enter the specific region. The gaming machine L10 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means even when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determination means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the ball is entered into the third ball entry means by any of the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. Characterized gaming machine L11.

According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, it is determined whether or not to set a special state when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the previous game by understanding that the third ball entry means can enter the ball and that there is a possibility of a special state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the second determination result or the determination result that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state in which the determination by the second determination means is performed is itself advantageous to the player, and is therefore very interesting. A gaming machine can be provided.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the gaming machine L13 is characterized in that the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game even based on the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the privileged game is executed even in the first determination result, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in interest.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means allows the game ball to enter a fourth ball entry means different from the third entry means as the privilege game. Characterized gaming machine L14.

According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, and the gaming toward the four ball-entry means. Since the game of firing a ball is performed, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball-entry means has a ball-entry portion where the game ball can enter and a guidance position where the game ball can be guided to enter the ball-entry portion. The gaming machine L15 is characterized by having a guiding member that can be changed to a non-inducing position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry portion.

In order to utilize the playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a problem that the first state is difficult to enter and the second state is easy to enter in the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, a guiding member is provided in the second ball entry means, and the guiding member can be changed between a guided position and a non-guided position. By doing so, the first state makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the second state makes it easy to enter the ball, which has the effect of making it possible to utilize the playability of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine L15, the guiding member has a first region in which a falling gaming ball can be received and a second region in which a gaming ball rolling from the first region can roll to the entry portion. The gaming machine L16 having the above, wherein the gaming ball rolled into the second region is configured to be able to enter the entry portion.

According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is composed of a first region and a second region, and the guiding member can enter the ball entering portion from the second region. Even if the ball entry section is provided at a position where it is difficult for the gaming ball falling from the gaming board to enter the ball in the non-guidance position, the ball entry section is allowed to enter the ball entry section when the guiding member is in the guidance position. It can be facilitated and has the effect that the playability of this gaming machine can be utilized.

In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guiding member is in the second state for a period longer than the rolling period required for the gaming ball received in the first region to enter the ball entry portion. The gaming machine L17 is characterized in that it is variable to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period when the special state is not set.

According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L16, the game ball on the guiding member enters the period during which the guiding member is changed from the non-inducing position to the guiding position when a special state is set. Since it is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the ball and a period during which it is difficult for the gaming ball on the guiding member to enter the ball entry section when a special state is not set. It has the effect of making it possible to utilize the playability.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the second identification means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second identification means by the second dynamic display means. A privilege from the determination result of the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period in which the information is dynamically displayed and the determination result of the second determination means to the execution of the privilege game. The second dynamic display period determining means includes a privileged pre-game executing means for executing the pre-game, and the second dynamic display period determining means is the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. And the total of the period of the pre-privilege game is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. It is something to do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by this.

In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not immediately provided, but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through a specific area. .. In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, there is a problem that the player wants to have expectations as much as possible just before the jackpot game is provided. Ascended. That is, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means is displayed before the privilege pre-game based on the second determination result is executed. There was a problem that the player would recognize it and the interest in the game would be poor while the pre-privilege game was being executed.

According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, and before the privilege. The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result to the provision of the jackpot game, and the determination result of the second determination means are the second determination results. The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result (other than the second determination result) of the second determination means. By making the above equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing when the pre-privilege game ends, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means is provided, and the predetermined determination result is the said. The gaming machine L19, characterized in that the determination result of the second determination means is the determination result of executing the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L18, it is possible to display the jackpot based on the determination by the second determination means at the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display until the end. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By differentiating the privilege given to the player between the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L19 includes an effect executing means for executing an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying an effect executed by the effect executing means. The effect executing means displays the second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result and the privilege pre-game effect corresponding to the privilege pre-game on the display body, and the second privilege game is executed. When displaying an effect corresponding to the determination result to be performed on the display body, the gaming machine L20 is characterized in that at least a part of the second determination result effect is used.

Generally, in a gaming machine, an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations is executed by using a display body (for example, a liquid crystal display) so that the player can grasp it. Then, the player is happy and depressed while grasping the content of the effect display displayed on the display body. Even in a gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a demand for an effect display suitable for playability.

According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L19, a part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game is executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. By using it for the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed only by a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content displayed to the player. It has the effect of making it possible to make people interested in all of the games and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L20, in the second determination result effect, the corresponding second determination result dynamic display effect and the second identification information are confirmed and displayed while the second identification information is dynamically displayed. It is composed of a second determination result dynamic display confirmation effect corresponding to the above, and when the effect execution means executes an effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second privilege game is executed, it is part of the effect. At least, the gaming machine L21 characterized in that the effect during dynamic display of the second determination result is used.

According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L20, when the effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second privilege game is executed is executed, the effect during the dynamic display of the second determination result is partially displayed. By using this, a common effect will be performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player can use only the start part of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether the privileged game will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all the production contents displayed to the player, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. be. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege gaming effect includes a pre-privilege gaming effect corresponding to while the pre-privilege game is being performed, and a privileged game confirmation effect corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the specific area. When the effect corresponding to the determination result of executing the second privilege game is executed by the effect execution means, at least the effect during the pre-game game is used as a part of the effect. Gaming machine L22.

According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L21, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the effect during the pre-privilege game is used as a part of the effect. As a result, a common effect is performed at the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can play either privilege game only in the final stage part of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether or not it will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all the production contents displayed to the player, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect executing means has the first notification effect for notifying that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means. The second notification effect for notifying that the second privilege game is the determination result to be executed is executed, and after the effect execution means executes the effect, the first notification effect or the second notification effect is executed. The gaming machine L23 characterized in that the timings for executing and are the same.

According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timing at which the effect of notifying the determination result of the second determination means is displayed is the same, so that the player grasps the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being played and to improve the interest of the game.

By providing two or all of the configurations of the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be achieved.

<Characteristic M group> (Performs a latent effect during Let's Mambo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination is executed based on the acquisition means for acquiring information, the information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the information storage means. The determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when is displayed, a pre-determination means for determining information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means, and the specific effect determining means thereof. From the discriminating means for determining whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied for the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, and the information determined by the discriminating means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Also has a specific effect regulating means for restricting the execution of the specific effect with respect to the information stored later and stored before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine M1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only makes the player interested in the jackpot, and has a problem that the interest of the game is lowered for the variable display which is out of the question. There was a need to further improve the interest in games.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute a specific effect by dynamically displaying the information already stored in the information storage means. With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, it is determined by the determining means whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specific to the information stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied and before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect. The execution of the production is regulated by the specific production regulation means.

As a result, among the information for which a specific effect is determined, the execution of the specific effect is restricted for the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the specific effect is continuous. After making the effect to be executed seem to be finished, the specific effect can be executed again. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode of 1 is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. It is determined that the discriminating means has means, and when it is determined that the information is such that a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When it is determined that the information is such that a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, it is determined by the determining means that a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, by displaying a specific dynamic display mode, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that a specific effect has been completed.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determining means determines the execution of the specific effect based on the determination that the information is the information for which the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior determination means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the execution of a specific effect is a specific effect based on the fact that the information is determined by the pre-determination means to determine a specific dynamic display mode. Since it is determined by the deciding means, the player is made to recognize at an early stage that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by any fluctuation of the continuous hold when the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

When it is determined by the specific effect determining means to execute the specific effect in any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the execution of the specific effect is started with respect to the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 having a start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when it is determined by the specific effect determining means to execute a specific effect, the information already stored is stored. Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed can be randomized to provide the player with various effects. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect is determined. Among the information stored before the trigger information, the information stored continuously a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, the gaming machine M5, which regulates the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Of the information stored before the information that triggered the decision to execute a specific effect, the information stored after the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is continuously stored a predetermined number of times. Since the specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means for the information stored in the machine, the specific effect is regulated a number of times in a row, and the player can expect that the specific effect is executed again. There is an effect.

The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine M5, the specific effect regulating means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, a predetermined number of times is determined by a specific regulating means by lottery, so that the number of times that a specific effect is regulated can be randomized, and the interest of the player is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

One of the gaming machines M1 to M6 is characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect with respect to the dynamic display for the information whose specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means. Gaming machine M7.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggestion effect suggests a dynamic display for information whose specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means. Since it is executed by the execution means, there is an effect that the player can have the expectation that the specific effect is continued by the suggestion effect.

<Characteristic N group> (The number of latent times after Let's Mambo is determined by the number of holdings at the start of Let's Mambo execution)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination is executed based on the acquisition means for acquiring information, the information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the information storage means. The determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed, and
Before the second condition is satisfied, the information is already stored in the information storage means based on the pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the information storage means and the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. When the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means that determines the execution of the continuous effect that executes a specific effect each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed with respect to the information being performed, and the effect determining means. Suggested for the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information. A gaming machine N1 having a suggestion effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effects images such as variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball being awarded (starting prize) is satisfied at the starting port, and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area, or three. A total of 9 symbols, etc. displayed in x3 squares are variablely displayed, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines are equipped with a probability fluctuation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them once enter into a probability change. Then, there are some that are given a predetermined game value such as a big hit at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), in order to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only makes the player interested in the jackpot, and has a problem that the interest of the game is lowered for the variable display which is out of the question. There was a need to further improve the interest in games.

According to the gaming machine N1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect each time the dynamic display of identification information is executed for the information already stored in the information storage means based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. Is determined by the production determining means. The movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous effect by the effect determining means. Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect for the target display is determined by the suggestion effect determination means. As a result, since the suggestion effect is executed even after the continuous effect is completed, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous production seem to be more than the actual number of consecutive times, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. The effect determining means has the determining means, and when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the continuous The gaming machine N2 characterized in that it is determined to execute the production.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode 1 is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the prior determination means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the specific motion is performed. The target display mode is performed, and there is an effect that it is possible to recognize at an early stage that a specific dynamic display mode is executed by starting the continuous effect.

The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is an effect that is executed even during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is executed even during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect. There is an effect that the player can expect.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3 has a number-of-number determination means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery when the suggestion effect-determining means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed. N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion effect determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestion effect is performed can be randomized, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and an effect of showing the lottery result is executed. In such a gaming machine, an input means such as a push button that can be operated by the player is provided, and a predetermined effect is executed according to the operation timing (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110361).
However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the timing of operating the input means.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a display means for displaying the effect of the game, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination for determining that the operation means has been operated. A means, an effect variable means that changes the effect based on the determination result by the operation determination means, an effect setting means that sets an effect content that is changed by the effect variable means depending on the timing of operating the operation means, and an effect setting means. Based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. The first period and the second notification mode are different from the first notification mode and the first notification mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are discriminateably notified by the period setting means for setting at least the first period and the second period. It has a notification means for notifying at least the same period of the second notification mode in which the period is discriminateably notified.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within an effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effective.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the first notification mode is set by changing the symbol for the transition of the period according to a predetermined rule. It informs the period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the second notification mode is such that the symbol is changed with respect to the transition of the period based on a randomly set rule. It is for notifying.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect variable means based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means. .. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect content variable by the effect variable means is set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. Is set by at least the period setting means. The first notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period and the second notification mode for separately notifying the first period and the second period in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. Is notified by the notification means at least in the same period.
As a result, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a plurality of first periods are set in the period setting means within the valid period in which the operation of the operating means is effective. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be easily operated and configured in the first period.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed by changing the symbol according to a predetermined rule. Since the current period set is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is based on a randomly set rule. Since the design is variable and notified, there is an effect that a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
81 Display means
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
S305 lottery means
S307, S309 Part of the dynamic display mode determining means
S1004 Part of the privilege game execution means

Claims (4)

Display means for displaying the production of the game, and
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
An operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated, and an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated.
Based on the discrimination result by the operation discrimination means, the effect variable means for varying the effect and the effect variable means.
An effect setting means for setting an effect content that is variable by the effect variable means depending on the timing of operating the operation means, and an effect setting means.
Based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set. At least the period setting means to set, and
A first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are discriminatively notified and a notification mode different from the first notification mode are used to separately notify the first period and the second period. (2) A gaming machine characterized by having a notification means for notifying the notification mode at least in the same period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period in which the operation of the operating means becomes effective. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the first notification mode is to display a variable symbol for the transition of the period according to a predetermined rule and notify the set current period. .. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second notification mode is to notify the transition of a period by changing a symbol based on a randomly set rule.

Images